Nortel Networks Network Router 9150 User manual

NTDR84AC
555-8421-215
Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide
Product release 1.5
Standard 3.1
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide
Product release:
Publication number:
Document release:
Date:
1.5
555-8421-215
Standard 3.1
January 2005
Copyright © 2005 Nortel. All Rights Reserved
Printed in Canada
All information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the
right to make changes to equipment design or program components, as progress in engineering,
manufacturing methods, or other circumstances may warrant.
*Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, Unified Networks, Meridian 1 PBX, Communication Server
1000 (CS 1000), and Communication Server 2100 (CS 2100) are trademarks of Nortel.
TelStrat is a registered trademark of TelStrat International, Ltd. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows
are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
FCC: Customer instructions
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom
side of the equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC
registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If
requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses the following standard connections and codes:
USOC Code: RJ21X, Facility Interface Code: 02DU5-64, and Service Order Code: 6.0F.
The REN number shown on the label is used to determine the number of devices that can
be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line can result in
the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. The sum of the RENs should not
exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that can be connected to a line,
as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service might be required.
However, if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC
if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
No repairs can be performed by you. If you experience trouble with this equipment,
please contact the following for repair and warranty information:
Nortel
Product Service Center
640 Massman Drive. Nashville, TN 31210
Phone: 1-800-466-7835
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
might request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone
company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state
public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for
information.
Industry Canada: Equipment attachment limitation
NOTICE: The Industry Canada Label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational,
and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical
Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee that the equipment will
operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, you should ensure that it is permissible to be connected
to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. You should be aware that
compliance with the above conditions might not prevent degradation in service in some
situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, can give the telecommunications company cause to request you to
disconnect the equipment.
You should ensure, for your own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the
power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: You should not attempt to make such connections yourself, but should contact
the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The termination on an interface can consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirements that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
Publication history
January 2005
This is the Standard 3.1 issue of the Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide for Remote Gateway
9100 Series product release 1.5.
July 2004
This is the Standard 3.0 issue of the Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide for Remote Gateway
9100 Series product release 1.5.
September 2001
This is the Standard 2.0 issue of the Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide for Remote Gateway
9100 Series product release 1.3.0. Support for
Communication Server 2100 (CS 2100) has been added
along with new and enhanced feature information that was
formerly published in the Remote Gateway 9100 Series and
RLC Release Notes.
March 2000
This is the Standard 1.0 issue of the Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide for Remote Gateway
9100 Series product release 1.0.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
v
Publication history
vi
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Contents
About this document
xvii
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
How to use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Skills you need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Nortel product knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Telecommunications experience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Data networking knowledge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Conventions used in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Precautionary messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Instructions for selecting menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Instructions for displaying property sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
PBX terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Related information products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Printed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
1
Remote Gateway 9150 description
1
Product introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Remote Gateway 9150 hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Add-on modules description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
System security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Trunk connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
64K (56K) dynamic adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Bandwidth allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Minimum call duration timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Idle timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How the timers work to control ISDN costs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
vii
Contents
Standard 3.1
How the Remote Gateway 9150 unit works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing call process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming call process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridge Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host controlled call mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locally controlled call mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Transitioning Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call scenario 1: host-controlled—internal corporate call . . . . . . . . .
Call scenario 2: host-controlled—external corporate call . . . . . . . . .
Call scenario 3: locally controlled mode—local call . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported digital telephone sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2000 series (M3310, and M3820 European models) and
M39xx series digital telephone set model and
accessory compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M39xx series digital telephone set accessory compatibility . . . . . . . .
Supported telephone modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer telephony integration (CTI) applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice over IP features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Transitioning Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online/offline table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications system and software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration PC connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
20
22
24
26
26
29
30
30
31
32
32
34
35
36
37
37
40
41
42
42
43
43
43
44
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
2
Contents
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit
installation
Installation checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables included with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables you must supply yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP addressing and routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numbering plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optivity Telephony Manager and Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . .
Trunk connection management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Transitioning Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online/offline schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the online/offline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk bandwidth allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLC settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 unit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll fraud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data network security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning for future growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding DSP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding trunk interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deployment options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port and station assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementing PSTN mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementing Voice over IP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementing Remote Gateway 9150 units behind Network Address
Translation (NAT) routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementing QoS Transitioning Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
45
46
50
50
51
52
52
53
53
55
55
56
57
57
59
59
62
63
64
64
64
65
65
66
66
68
70
70
70
71
72
72
73
73
75
75
76
77
78
79
ix
Contents
Standard 3.1
Planning the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data entry form completion sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station assignments and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN BRI information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection link between the RLC and
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online/offline schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numbering plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
81
81
81
82
83
83
83
84
84
85
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Precautionary messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Required installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Required tools for hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Required tools for software installation or upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Unpacking and inspecting the equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Removing and replacing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit cover . . . . . . . . . . 90
Installing trunk interface or DSP application modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Determining when to install trunk interface or
DSP application modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Determining where to install the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installing trunk interface or DSP application modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Removing trunk interface or DSP application modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Choosing a suitable location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Cables you must provide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Connector and pin-out reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Remote Gateway 9150 unit connection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Attaching the cables to Remote Gateway 9150 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the network . . . . . . . . 109
Powering up the Remote Gateway 9150 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Power-up self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
LED indicator test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Installing the Configuration Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
x
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Contents
Using the Configuration Wizard to perform initial configuration . . . . . . . .
What you can configure with the Configuration Wizard . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing a serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing configuration with the Configuration Wizard. . . . . . . . .
Testing the network connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying telephone network connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Using Configuration Manager
133
What is Configuration Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and viewing Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Manager description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts of the Configuration Manager screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Property sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drop down boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scroll boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scroll bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration files description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Manager: File operations diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Manager: File operations description . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to use the Configuration Manager file operations. . . . . . . . . .
Creating a configuration file on the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uploading a configuration to a unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading a configuration from a unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the device type for offline configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging on to a unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default logon ID and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging on to a unit using the connection history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging on to a unit using Telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging on to a unit using the serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
115
115
116
117
119
129
129
134
135
137
137
137
138
139
139
140
140
141
142
143
144
145
145
146
148
153
153
154
154
155
155
156
157
157
157
157
158
158
161
164
xi
Contents
Standard 3.1
Logging off of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Remote Connection command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a system restart or shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to perform a restart or shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling the Configuration Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
173
9150 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency service programmability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 system settings . . . . . . . . . .
International tones support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring International Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the IP addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Configuration field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prioritizing voice traffic over shared networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLC connection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the RLC connection information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSTN connection configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security level configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9150 port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridge Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a fax station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the fax port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 ISDN BRI Interface information—
for Norway and Sweden only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifiers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the BRI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
166
167
169
169
171
172
174
175
176
176
186
188
192
193
193
197
198
199
199
200
207
208
214
220
221
222
225
226
226
227
227
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Contents
Trunk group configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary trunk on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk access codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
National ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring trunk groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring DSPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto upgrade configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring automatic upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syslog configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring syslog functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridge Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call processing capabilities and station settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call appearance keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCR keys increase DSP requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Private lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling permissions and restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATA- and MCA-equipped stations and
bandwidth requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
257
259
Modes of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host-controlled mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locally controlled mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relationship between host-controlled and
locally controlled modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offline mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why offline mode is important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What controls the online and offline modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
232
233
233
234
234
235
235
235
236
239
240
240
240
243
244
247
248
250
250
251
253
254
255
255
260
260
261
261
262
262
262
263
xiii
Contents
Standard 3.1
Placing and receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods for placing outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing host-controlled calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing outgoing locally controlled calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling another station at your site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator updates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host-controlled indicator updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locally controlled indicator updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone features operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency service calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Going online and offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SPRE code to put all stations into online mode. . . . . . . . .
Using the SPRE code to put all stations into offline mode . . . . . . . .
Overriding an automatic offline event from the host PBX . . . . . . . . .
7
Administration
279
Changing the administration password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Configuration Manager password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit password . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a backup configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing backup configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the backup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uploading a configuration file over the IP network . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing display logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the display logs to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the size of Remote Gateway 9150 unit logs. . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
264
264
265
265
266
267
268
268
269
270
270
273
273
274
274
275
276
276
276
277
277
277
278
280
280
281
282
282
283
285
285
286
290
290
291
292
293
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Contents
Statistics screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bandwidth Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller Info Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRI Information Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Call Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Call Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Information Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN Module Information Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSTN Error Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the firmware and software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the current firmware and software versions . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining the latest upgrade file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading the upgrade file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a firmware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual firmware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to perform a firmware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About firmware upgrades and configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading the Remote Gateway 9150 unit firmware . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic or scheduled firmware upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-contained firmware upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a software upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading the Configuration Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Troubleshooting
347
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying why a problem occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 unit LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What to do if the LEDs do not display correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital telephone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptoms descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptom descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
294
294
297
300
303
307
311
315
318
320
322
325
327
332
335
335
336
336
337
337
337
338
338
339
339
339
340
342
343
346
346
348
348
349
349
351
351
356
356
xv
Contents
Standard 3.1
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptom descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Configuration Manager PING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Configuration Manager PING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsuccessful PING options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syslog testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Syslog testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms and alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to a catastrophic failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inoperative hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair and warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asia/Pacific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
Planning forms
371
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data entry form completion sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the Remote Gateway 9150 forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Sample configuration files
Pin-out tables for connections
390
390
390
391
392
394
396
400
403
TELCO 1 connector pin-out table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TELCO 2 connector pin-out table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet connector pin-out table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admin (serial) connector pin-out table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power connector pin-out table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
372
372
372
372
374
389
Example of a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample configuration printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice port configuration on the Meridian 1 PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data port configuration on the Meridian 1 PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RLC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Gateway 9150 unit configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
360
360
362
362
364
365
365
366
367
367
368
368
368
369
369
369
404
406
408
409
410
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
D
Contents
Display log definitions
411
Display logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Glossary
485
Fields index
507
Index
515
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xvii
Contents
xviii
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Preface
About this document
In this preface
About this guide
xviii
Product overview
xix
Skills you need
xx
Conventions used in this guide
xxii
Related information products
xxv
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xvii
About this document
Standard 3.1
About this guide
The Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 5558421-215) is for telecom and data network managers and administrators who
plan, install, and manage corporate telecommunications and data networks. This
guide contains the following information:
!
a detailed description of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
!
procedures necessary to properly install, configure, and manage the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit at a location remote from the host PBX
!
troubleshooting procedures for addressing possible problems
This guide assumes that you are familiar with the following:
!
basic telecommunications terminology
!
basic networking terminology
!
PC terminology and operation (specifically, Windows 95, 98, NT
Workstation 4.0, Millennium Edition (ME), 2000 Professional, XP
[Professional and Home Edition])
!
Nortel PBX terminology, functionality, and administration
How to use this guide
This guide provides step by step procedures for installing, configuring, and
managing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit as a part of your Nortel remote
services network. Review this guide before beginning Remote Gateway 9150
unit installation and configuration.
When you are ready to begin, follow the steps for planning, installing, and
configuring your hardware in the order that they are presented in this guide. This
helps you to achieve a successful, trouble-free installation.
xviii
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
About this document
Product overview
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit provides full-featured host PBX services to as
many as 32 users located in your office.
The Remote Gateway 9150 solution consists of the following components:
!
Reach Line Card (RLC)
The RLC is installed in the PBX at the host location and relays voice and
signaling information from the digital telephones connected at the Remote
Gateway 9150 site to the PBX at the host site.
!
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit is installed in your office. It relays voice
and signaling information between the digital telephones in your office to
the PBX at the host location.
!
10BaseT Ethernet and ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) connections
These connections provide the voice and data connections between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the host PBX.
!
ISDN BRI trunk interface modules are supported for the following:
— U interface
— S/T interface
!
optional Digital Signal Processor (DSP) application modules
You can add these modules to increase the system’s voice processing
capacity.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses the Voice over IP technology to route voice
conversation and telephone set control signals between your office and the host
PBX over your existing IP data network.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can also use the PSTN to route calls if:
!
the voice Quality of Service (QoS) degrades below predefined thresholds
In this case, Nortel’s patented QoS Transitioning Technology automatically
transitions calls to the PSTN when the voice QoS degrades. Calls transition
back to the IP network when the QoS returns to normal.
!
you are not yet ready to use the IP network to route voice calls
You can configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to use only the PSTN,
and implement the IP network functionality when you are ready.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xix
About this document
Standard 3.1
Skills you need
Knowledge of, or experience with, the following concepts as appropriate to your
network is helpful when administering the Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
!
Microsoft Windows
!
software installation
!
network configuration
Nortel product knowledge
Knowledge of, or experience with, the following Nortel products and concepts:
!
basic administration of a Meridian 1, Communication Server 1000
(CS 1000), or Communication Server 2100 (CS 2100) PBX (telephone set
and XDLC configuration)
!
characteristics and principles of XDLC operation
!
PBX data calls
!
Meridian digital telephones
Telecommunications experience
Knowledge of, or experience with, the following aspects of telecommunications:
xx
!
Extended Digital Line Cards (XDLCs) and how they work
!
configuring voice and data ports
!
configuring ISDN BRI, PRI (or other types of trunks)
!
establishing telephone connections
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
About this document
Data networking knowledge
Knowledge of, or experience with, the following aspects of data networking:
!
data link (Layer 2 of the OSI model)
— IP protocol
— routing
!
network (Layer 3 of the OSI model)
— addressing
— traffic analysis and provisioning
— configuration
!
Voice over IP concepts
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xxi
About this document
Standard 3.1
Conventions used in this guide
This section describes the conventions used in this guide.
Precautionary messages
Note: A “Note” describes the secondary results of procedures or commands, or
special conditions that require you to use a procedure or command.
ATTENTION!
Provides information essential to the completion of a task.
CAUTION
Risk of data loss or equipment damage
.
Cautions you against unsafe practices or potential hazards, such as
equipment damage, service interruption, or loss of data.
WARNING
Risk of minor personal injury
.
Warns you of a potentially hazardous situation that can result in
minor or moderate injury.
DANGER
Risk of electric shock
.
xxii
Alerts you to an immediate hazard that can result in death or
serious injury through high voltage or electric shock.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
About this document
Instructions for selecting menu options
To simplify the instructions for selecting menu options, this guide abbreviates
the selection path. For example, if you must choose Over IP from the PSTN
Connectivity menu, under the Tests menu, this guide uses the following style:
From the menu, choose Tests → PSTN Connectivity → Over IP.
Instructions for displaying property sheets
To simplify the procedures for accessing property sheets throughout this guide,
the instructions for displaying a particular property sheet are summarized in a
“Getting there” statement.
The procedure for displaying the screen that you need depends on if you are:
!
performing an online configuration (connected to a node by serial port or
Telnet)
!
performing an offline configuration (not connected to a node)
Example
Getting there
9150 → Configuration Manager → IP Configuration
The long instruction for this example is as follows:
1
Do the following:
IF
THEN
you are performing an offline
configuration,
select the device type as described in
“Selecting the device type for offline
configuration” on page 156.
you are performing an online
configuration,
connect to, and then log on to the node
as described in “Logging on to a unit” on
page 157.
2
In the left pane, click on the plus sign (+) beside Configuration Manager to
expand the node list.
3
Click on IP Configuration.
Result: The IP Configuration property sheet for the Remote Gateway 9150
unit displays in the right pane.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xxiii
About this document
Standard 3.1
PBX terminology
Throughout this guide, the term “host PBX” refers to any of the following
Nortel PBX platforms:
xxiv
!
Meridian 1 PBX
!
CS 1000
!
CS 2100
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
About this document
Related information products
This section lists sources for additional information related to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. You can order printed documentation and the CD-ROM
from your Nortel distributor.
You can also download the documentation in Portable Document Format (PDF)
from the Nortel website. To locate these documents, click on the Technical
Documentation link at the following website:
www.nortel.com
Note: The information available on the website may supersede the information
provided on the CD-ROM.
For further details, refer to Remote Gateway 9100 Series and RLC Release Notes
(NTP 555-8421-102).
Printed documents
The following documents provide additional information on the RLC and other
elements of a Remote Gateway 9100 Series system:
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines
(NTP 555-8421-103)
The Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines, written for
the installer/administrator, describe how a Remote Gateway 9100 Series system
integrates with existing telecommunications and data networks. This document
helps you to ensure that your networks are prepared for 9150.
Remote Gateway 9100 Series and RLC Release Notes
(NTP 555-8421-102)
The Remote Gateway 9100 Series and RLC Release Notes, written for the
installer/administrator, describe the features and known problems for the
different elements of a 9150 system. This document contains information
pertaining to the Reach Line Card (RLC), the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
Remote Gateway 911x series units, and Digital Telephone IP Adapter units.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
xxv
About this document
Standard 3.1
Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210)
The Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide, written for the
installer/administrator, describes how to install, configure, and manage the
Reach Line Card on the host PBX.
Remote Gateway 911x Series Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-220)
The Remote Gateway 911x Series Installation and Administration Guide, written
for the installer/administrator, describes how to install, configure, and manage
Remote Gateway 911x series units.
Digital Telephone IP Adapter Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-211)
The Digital Telephone IP Adapter Installation and Administration Guide,
written for the installer/administrator, describes how to install, configure, and
manage Digital Telephone IP Adapter units.
Installer’s Notes
The following Installer’s Notes are quick reference documents that are provided
with the component discussed in the document:
!
Reach Line Card Installer’s Notes
!
Remote Gateway 9150 and RLC DSP Application Module Installer’s Notes
!
Remote Gateway 9150 Trunk Interface Module Installer’s Notes
CD-ROM
A Remote Gateway 9100 Series Product CD-ROM is available containing the
documentation in Portable Document Format (PDF), firmware, and Remote
Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager software.
xxvi
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 1
Remote Gateway 9150 description
In this chapter
Product introduction
2
Operational characteristics
12
How the Remote Gateway 9150 unit works
16
Telephones
26
Administration software
43
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
1
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Product introduction
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit installed in your office provides PBX
functionality for up to 32 digital telephones. Voice and signaling information
between the digital telephones connected at your office and the RLC installed on
the PBX at the host location is relayed over one or both of the following:
!
IP network
!
PSTN
The illustration below shows the connection between a Remote Gateway 9150
unit and an RLC.
Remote site 1: Branch office
Up to 32 digital telephones
Fax machine
Remote Gateway 9150
POWE
R
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODU
L2
2
LE
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
STAT
TX
RX
Ethernet
US
Central
office
trunks
(ISDN BRI)
Corporate office
Host PBX
ISDN PRI
Corporate
WAN
Public
Telephone
Network
Ethernet
Reach Line Card
G101391
Note: Nortel does not support a Remote Gateway 9100 Series system as a freestanding key system.
2
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Remote Gateway 9150 hardware description
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit is installed in your office and can be mounted
on a desk, in a rack, or on the wall. This section describes the LED indicator
displays, power supply, cables, and connectors for the unit.
LED indicators on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The following diagram shows the LED indicators on the front panel of the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
POW
ER
ETH
ERN
ET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MOD
2
ULE
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
Power Ethernet
Modules
V.35
Rem
STA
ote G
TUS
atew
ay 91
50
Status
Note: The V.35 LED indicators are present but are not functional.
G101402
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
3
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
The operational status of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is indicated by these
LEDs as described in the following table.
LED indicator LED indicator
type
name
Description
Power
On
When lit, this LED indicator signifies that
power is present.
Ethernet
TX
When flashing, this LED indicator signifies
that data is being transmitted by the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over the Ethernet network.
RX
When flashing, this LED indicator signifies
that data is being presented to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over the Ethernet network.
COLL
When flashing, this LED indicator signifies
that a collision has occurred on the Ethernet
network.
L1 and L2
L1 LED indicator:
Module
!
not lit: there is no D-channel activity
!
flashing: the D-channel is active but the
B-channel is not active
!
lit solid: both the D- and B-channels are
active
L2 LED indicator:
V.35
Boot status
4
!
not lit: the B-channel is not active
!
lit: the B-channel is active
TX
For future use.
RX
For future use.
Status
Indicates the condition of the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. This LED indicator stays
lit when the power on self-test is successful. If
it goes out, there is a problem.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Collisions
Half-duplex Ethernet connections only allow their nodes to either send or
receive packets at any given time. Collisions occur when two nodes on a halfduplex Ethernet connection attempt to transmit information simultaneously.
Before transmitting, the Network Interface Card (commonly referred to as the
NIC card) monitors the line, or listens, for transmissions. A NIC card listens to
the line for the amount of time that it takes to transfer a minimum-sized packet
the maximum length of the cable. If the NIC card senses no transmission from
the destination node, it proceeds with its own transmission.
If a NIC card detects a collision, it waits for a period of time determined by the
back-off algorithm, then re-transmits the packet. Ethernet nodes keep track of
how many times they must re-transmit a packet with a maximum collision re-try
counter. In previous versions of Remote Gateway 9100 Series software, the
maximum collision re-try counter had a limit of 15. After 16 unsuccessful
attempts to transmit a packet (the original attempt plus 15 re-tries) the Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit dropped the packet. In an effort to decrease delay and
improve QoS, the limit of the maximum collision re-try counter is now eight.
After nine unsuccessful attempts to transmit a packet (the original attempt plus
eight re-tries) the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit drops the packet and begins
attempting to transmit the next packet.
Note: Since Ethernet traffic has a nominal speed of 10 Mbps, the flashing
Ethernet COLL, TX, RX LED indicators are cosmetic. They do not reflect realtime traffic patterns or packets.
Connectors
The following connections are made from the rear panel of the Remote Gateway
9150 unit to the telephone and data networks:
!
Two 25-pair connectors (labeled TELCO 1 and TELCO 2) provide tip and
ring connections to user stations (telephones) and central office trunks
(ISDN BRI).
These connections provide the interface to the telephone network and the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
!
An RJ-45 connector (labeled ETHERNET) provides a 10BaseT Ethernet
connection.
This connection provides the ability to pass both voice and data traffic over
the existing Ethernet network.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
5
Remote Gateway 9150 description
!
Standard 3.1
A DB-9 connector (labeled ADMIN) provides an RS-232 serial port
connection.
You can use this serial port connection to configure a Remote Gateway
9150 unit that is directly connected to a PC.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation,” for a
detailed description of cables and connectors.
Mounting options
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can be mounted on a desk, in a rack, or on the
wall.
Universal power supply
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit includes an auto-sensing 110/220 V power
supply that is compatible with commercially available UPS systems.Refer to the
diagram on page 7.
Note: If you want to connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a UPS, ensure
that the UPS has a minimum rating of 100 Watts.
6
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Remote Gateway 9150 power supply
TELC
O1
ETH
ERN
Remote Gateway 9150
ET
TEL
CO
2
P OW
ER
ADM
IN
Remote Gateway
9150 cable
To wall
outlet
Power supply
Power cable
G101536
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
7
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Add-on modules description
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can support trunk interface modules, such as
ISDN BRI U or S/T interfaces, and up to three DSP application modules.
Optional trunk interface modules
Trunk interface modules route calls over the PSTN. The number of modules you
must install depends on the number of simultaneous calls you want to process in
host-controlled or locally controlled mode.
Note: To determine how many trunk interface modules you need for your
calling requirements, use the “Remote Gateway 9150 System expansion
worksheet” on page 385.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can support up to four U or S/T ISDN BRI
interfaces. Each module supports one ISDN BRI line (with two B-channels)
from the local telephone service provider. Refer to the following illustration for
an example of an ISDN BRI module:
ISDN BRI module
U interface (NTDR74xx)
S/T interface (NTDR75xx)
G101420
8
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Note: Initially, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with no ISDN BRI modules
installed.
Optional DSP application modules
DSPs convert voice and fax into digital data for transport over the IP network
and PSTN. Initially, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with the ability to
support up to eight simultaneous calls through a DSP that is built into the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s motherboard. To add support for up to 32
simultaneous calls, you must install DSP application modules. Up to three DSP
application modules are supported. Each module provides up to eight more
simultaneous calls.
Note: To determine how many DSP application modules you need for your
calling requirements, use the “Remote Gateway 9150 System expansion
worksheet” on page 385.
In addition, you can configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit for blocking with
only enough modules to support the maximum number of simultaneous calls.
For example, a Remote Gateway 9150 unit that is equipped with a single DSP
application module supports 16 simultaneous calls, for a ratio of 2 to 1 blocking.
Refer to the following illustration for an example of a DSP application module:
DSP application module (NTDR73xx)
G101388
Note: For more details, refer to “Planning for future growth” on page 72.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
9
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Connection options
Communications between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in your office and the
host PBX take place using 10BaseT Ethernet or ISDN BRI connections, or both.
This section provides a description of each of these connections.
10BaseT Ethernet interface
Voice over IP technology is used to carry voice conversation and telephone set
control signals over your IP network to the host PBX. The voice data is
forwarded as UDP/IP packets, and the signaling data is forwarded as TCP/IP
packets.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit, vintages AC, BC, CC, and earlier use a
half-duplex 10BaseT Ethernet connection. Vintages AD, BD, CD and later
default to a half-duplex 10BaseT Ethernet connection. You can configure a fullduplex 10BaseT Ethernet connection on units of these vintages through
Configuration Manager. When you configure a full-duplex 10BaseT Ethernet
connection, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit's Ethernet collision LED remains on
solid (constantly lit). In addition, when you enable full-duplex Ethernet, you
must also set the corresponding port on the connected switch to 10 FULL
Duplex. Remote Gateway 9100 Series products do not support Auto negotiation
of the Ethernet interface.
ISDN BRI lines to PSTN
The PSTN provides a cost-effective alternative to leased lines. You can use
ISDN BRI lines at the Remote Gateway 9150 site to place local calls without
involving the host PBX. You can also choose to use the ISDN BRI lines instead
of the IP network to route calls through the host PBX.
To use ISDN BRI lines, you must install trunk interface modules. The Remote
Gateway 9150 unit can support up to four U or S/T ISDN BRI trunk interface
modules. (Refer to “Add-on modules description” on page 8.)
Quality of Service (QoS) Transitioning Technology
If both the IP network and ISDN BRI lines are used, you can use the QoS
Transitioning Technology to re-route calls from the IP network to the PSTN
when the QoS on the IP network degrades. When the QoS returns to normal, the
QoS Transitioning Technology automatically moves the calls back to the IP
network.
10
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit monitors the QoS on the IP network. If the QoS
falls below pre-programmed acceptable thresholds, calls are dynamically and
transparently switched to the ISDN BRI lines. Refer to “QoS Transitioning
Technology” on page 34 for additional details.
Analog port for fax machines
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit has one analog port that you can use as a fax
connection. Refer to “Fax support” on page 41 for more detailed information.
ATTENTION!
You cannot transfer a call on a telephone set connected to
the analog port of a Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Remote
Gateway 9100 Series does not support Switch Hook flash.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
11
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Operational characteristics
This section provides details on how the Remote Gateway 9150 unit functions.
System security
This section describes the security levels that are supported for controlling
access from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the RLC on the host PBX.
12
!
No security
When no security measures are used, the RLC accepts all incoming calls
from the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
Use this level with caution as it can be prone to unauthorized use. For
example, a user in your site could accidentally, or intentionally, enter a
trunk number for another site and place long distance phone calls through
this connection.
!
Caller Identification (ID)
When Caller ID is used, and the PSTN routes the call, the RLC identifies
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s calling line identification (CLID). If the
CLID matches the remote number configured on the port assigned to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit, access is granted. If the incoming call’s CLID
does not match, access is denied.
Note: Caller ID authentication cannot be performed over the IP network.
!
Provision ID
You can use Provision Identification (ID) authentication over the IP
network or PSTN. When you choose Provision ID, the Remote Gateway
9150 unit sends its 10-digit security identifier (password) for each
connection request. The RLC compares the security identifier with the one
configured on the RLC port where the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
assigned. If the security identifiers match, access is granted.
If the security identifiers do not match, then an event is recorded in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit system log (you can view the system log in
Configuration Manager). The telephone that was used to place the call
displays a message indicating that communications with the host PBX are
down.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
You must configure two security identifier passwords on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit:
— inbound security identifier: This is the RLC’s security identifier. It is
presented on incoming calls.
— outbound security identifier: This is the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
security identifier. It is presented to the RLC on outgoing calls.
You must configure the same security identifiers in reverse on this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit’s RLC port.
Trunk connections
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports the following digital trunk
connections:
!
ISDN BRI from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the PSTN
!
ISDN PRI from the PSTN to the RLC at the host site
Multiple Subscriber Numbering (MSN)
Remote Gateway 9100 Series supports MSN. If the Central Office provides each
B-channel with a unique DN, then the first B-channel that you configure defines
the number for both B-channels.
Remote Gateway 9100 Series requires the ISDN numbers to be unique per
module for PSTN connections between the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
Do not configure B-channels as Local and Remote if MSN is disabled.
For Remote Gateway 9150 units with multiple BRI modules:
!
Configure a maximum of one BRI module as Remote Only if PSTN
connections are required.
!
Configure all other BRI modules as Local only.
For Remote Gateway 9150 units with just one BRI module the BRI module can
be configured as Local only or Remote only. If local ISDN calls and remote
calls over PSTN are required, then MSN must be enabled.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
13
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
64K (56K) dynamic adaptation
With some carriers, 64K calls routed over a 56K PSTN infrastructure may cause
errors. The dynamic adaptation feature allows the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and the RLC to dynamically detect the limitation of the bandwidth. The call is
then downgraded from 64K to 56K.
Bandwidth allocation
The RLC automatically allocates trunk bandwidth to the Remote Gateway 9150
connection as needed. For example, as calls are initiated and bandwidth
requirements increase, additional trunk connections are established. Likewise, as
calls terminate and bandwidth requirements drop, connections to idle trunks are
terminated.
Connection types
The Remote Gateway 9150 connection to the RLC can be defined on the RLC as
permanent or on demand. A permanent connection means that the ISDN
connection to the host PBX always remains open. An on demand connection
means that the ISDN connection is established only when a connection with the
host PBX is required.
If the connection is defined as demand, then you can configure minimum call
duration and idle timers on the RLC to help reduce call charges.
Minimum call duration timer
Most ISDN tariffs specify minimum charges incurred when you open the line,
regardless of the call duration. This charge is the minimum call charge listed on
long distance telephone bills.
The minimum call duration timer is used in PSTN mode only and specifies the
minimum length of time that each PSTN call to the host PBX remains active,
regardless of telephone activity or inactivity. Configure the timer on the RLC to
drop inactive connections just before an additional charge period is incurred. For
example, if the timer is set to 59 seconds and your call lasts only 20 seconds, the
ISDN connection drops when the timer reaches 59 seconds.
14
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
If another call is made to the host PBX before the timer expires, the timer is
reset. The timer tracks the current call.
Idle timer
The idle timer identifies the maximum length of time that an ISDN connection
remains idle before Remote Gateway 9100 Series closes it. Idle means that a
voice connection exists but is not active, and buttons are not being pressed on
digital telephones.
For example, if the idle timer is set on the RLC to 60 seconds, the ISDN call
remains open for 60 seconds after you hang up. If you or someone else dials
another number before 60 seconds have passed, another ISDN connection is not
opened.
How the timers work to control ISDN costs
The minimum call duration and idle timers work together to control ISDN
charges. The following examples describe what happens when the minimum call
duration timer is set to 59 seconds and the idle timer is set to 60 seconds.
Example 1
If the call lasts for 20 seconds and no other calls are made, the ISDN connection
drops when the minimum call duration timer reaches 59 seconds. The minimum
call duration timer expires before the idle timer.
Example 2
If the call lasts for 65 seconds and no other calls are made, the ISDN connection
drops after another 60 seconds has passed without activity. Since the ISDN call
exceeded 59 seconds, the minimum call duration timer no longer applies. The
idle timer is used, in this case, to prevent further ISDN charges.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
15
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
How the Remote Gateway 9150 unit works
There are two major components to the Remote Gateway 9150 product:
!
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit located in your office
!
the RLC located on the PBX at the host site
These two components, along with the connection options described on page 10,
extend the host PBX services to users in your office.
The following diagram shows a RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 network:
Remote site 1: Branch office
Up to 32 digital telephones
Fax machine
Remote Gateway 9150
POW
ER
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODU
L2
2
LE
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
STAT
TX
RX
Ethernet
US
Central
office
trunks
(ISDN BRI)
Corporate office
Host PBX
ISDN PRI
Corporate
WAN
Public
Telephone
Network
Ethernet
Reach Line Card
G101391
16
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Outgoing call process
To place outgoing calls, users can either pick up the handset on the telephone or
press a line appearance key. There are two types of line appearance keys:
!
host call appearance key
Use this key to place a call through the host PBX.
!
local call appearance keys
Use these keys to place calls to other stations in your office, or to place and
receive calls through the local PSTN. You can define up to two local call
appearance keys on each digital telephone.
For a detailed description of the outgoing call process, refer to the sample
illustrations beginning on page 20.
Incoming call process
When a user places a call through the host PBX to a user at the Remote Gateway
9150 site, a connection is made from the RLC to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and the host PBX completes the call. If a connection cannot be established, then
the call rings until it is forwarded to voice mail by the host PBX. Refer to
Chapter 6, “Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations,” for a more detailed
description of the incoming call process.
When someone places a call through the PSTN to a user at the Remote Gateway
9150 site, a connection is made from the central office to the Remote Gateway
9150 unit. The number that outside callers dial is the number assigned by the
ISDN service provider to the ISDN BRI B-channel carrying the incoming call.
You can configure an unanswered incoming local call to Call Forward to a DN
on the host PBX. The Bridge Port connects the call to the host PBX and it can
then transfer to voicemail.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
17
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Bridge Port
A Bridge Port is a proxy port that represents a local or inbound PSTN call to the
host PBX. When a local incoming call on a Remote Gateway 9150 unit needs
PBX services, the Bridge Port obtains a PBX presence on behalf of the local
call.
Bridge Ports can represent the following types of local calls:
!
Call Forward: A Local and Remote call made to another Local and Remote
telephone uses Call Forward to connect to a third telephone on the PBX.
!
Call Transfer: A Local call to a Local and Remote telephone uses Call
Transfer to connect to a local trunk or a host-based set.
!
Conference: A Remote call to a host telephone can connect to trunk call(s),
or if you are on a call to a local trunk, you can connect to host telephone(s)
to create three-or-more-party telephone calls.
To configure Remote Gateway 9150 Bridge Ports refer to page 250.
Host controlled call mode
When a user places a call to someone at the host site, or when someone from the
host site calls the Remote Gateway 9150 site, the call is in host-controlled call
mode. Calls in host-controlled mode are routed through the host PBX. Refer to
the sample illustrations on pages 20 and 22.
Locally controlled call mode
When a user places a call from a local call appearance key, or the call is to
another telephone at the Remote Gateway 9150 site, the call is in locally
controlled mode. Calls that are initiated from the local call appearance key are
routed through the local PSTN. Calls to other extensions in the Remote Gateway
9150 site are routed only through the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
The host PBX is not involved in locally controlled mode calls. Refer to the
sample illustration on page 24.
18
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
QoS Transitioning Technology
If the QoS on the IP network falls below a predefined threshold, you can
configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to automatically route voice traffic
away from the IP network connection to the PSTN connection. Refer to “QoS
Transitioning Technology” on page 34 for a detailed description.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
19
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Call scenario 1: host-controlled—internal corporate call
The following diagram shows how a call is routed when making a
host-controlled call to the corporate office.
Host-controlled call (corporate internal call)
Branch office
(Chicago)
Up to 32 digital telephones
User 1
User 2
User 3
1
A
Remote Gateway 9150
POW
ER
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MODU
LE
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
STAT
US
Central office trunks
(ISDN BRI)
Ethernet network
2
Host location
(Los
Angeles)
B
PSTN
RLC
Host
PBX
ISDN PRI
3
C
1
Host
stations
4
2
3
Voice over IP call
PSTN call
G101392
The network that is used to route the host-controlled call is transparent to the
user, and the dialing requirement is the same for both. Calls work the same way
in reverse, from host PBX site to the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
20
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Voice over IP network call
1
User 1 presses the host call appearance key.
Result: User 1 hears a dial tone. This indicates that the connection to the
RLC over the IP network was successful.
2
User 1 dials a telephone number (such as the extension number of host
station 1).
Result: The dialed digits are sent by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit as
packets across the Ethernet network. The RLC converts the packets to the
format required by the PBX. The PBX then converts the data to voice and
routes the call to host station 1.
PSTN call
1
User 3 presses the host call appearance key.
Result: User 3 hears a dial tone. This indicates that the connection to the
RLC over the PSTN was successful.
2
User 3 dials the telephone number (such as the extension number of host
station 3).
Result: Dialed digits are sent across the PSTN then sent through the host
PBX to host station 3.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
21
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Call scenario 2: host-controlled—external corporate call
The following diagram shows how a call is routed when making a
host-controlled call to a party outside the organization.
Host-controlled call (corporate external call)
Branch office
(Chicago)
Up to 32 digital telephones
User 1
User 2
User 3
1
A
Remote Gateway 9150
POW
ER
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MODU
LE
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
STAT
US
Ethernet network
Central office trunks
(ISDN BRI)
2
B
Host location
(Los
Angeles)
ISDN PRI
RLC
C
Host
PBX
1
PSTN
3
D
5
4
2
3
Voice over IP call
PSTN call
Called party
is local
pizza parlor
(Chicago)
G101393
The network used to route the call is transparent to the user, and the dialing
requirement is the same for both. Calls work the same way in reverse, through
the host PBX site to the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
22
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Voice over IP network call
1
User 1 presses the host call appearance key.
Result: User 1 hears a dial tone. This indicates that the connection to the
RLC over the IP network was successful.
2
User 1 dials the external telephone number.
Result: The dialed digits are sent by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit as
packets across the Ethernet network. The RLC converts the packets to the
format required by the PBX. The PBX then converts the data to voice and
routes the call through the PSTN to the called party.
PSTN call
1
User 3 presses the host call appearance key.
Result: User 3 hears a dial tone. This indicates that the connection to the
RLC over the PSTN was successful.
2
User 3 dials the external telephone number.
Result: Dialed digits are sent across ISDN BRI through the PSTN, through
the host PBX to the called party.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
23
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Call scenario 3: locally controlled mode—local call
The following diagram shows how a call is routed when making a call within
your local area.
Locally controlled call
Branch office
(Chicago)
Up to 32 digital telephones
User 1
User 2
User 3
1
Remote Gateway 9150
POW
ER
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MODU
LE
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
STAT
US
Central office trunks
(ISDN BRI)
Ethernet network
2
Host location
(Los
Angeles)
PSTN
ISDN PRI
RLC
3
Host
PBX
1
2
3
PSTN call
Called party
is local
pizza parlor
(Chicago)
G101394
24
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Local call
1
User 1 presses the local call appearance key and hears a dial tone from the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
2
User 1 then dials a trunk access code (such as #61) and hears a dial tone
from the Central Office (PSTN).
Note: If all trunks are busy and unavailable, then User 1 hears a fast busy
signal.
3
User 1 dials the telephone number (the pizza parlor in this example). The
dialed digits are sent across the ISDN BRI connection through the PSTN to
the called party.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
25
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Telephones
This section lists the telephones, modules, and related applications supported by
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. This section also describes some of the basic
characteristics of these elements of a Remote Gateway 9100 Series system.
Supported digital telephone sets
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports following Meridian digital telephone
sets:
!
M2008D
!
M3110
!
M3902
!
M2008HFD
!
M3310
!
M3903
!
M2216D
!
M3820
!
M3904
!
M2616D
!
M3901
!
M3905
Notes:
1.
Because it is a discontinued model, the M2616CT cordless digital
telephone set is no longer supported.
2.
When you update the message on the host PBX that displays when the
digital telephone set is idle, you must unplug the digital telephone set and
plug it back in for the change to take effect.
Notes for M2xxx series digital telephone sets:
26
1.
The M2006 digital telephone set is also supported, but can be used only for
locally controlled calls.
2.
Auto Answer Back (AAB) activation on M26xx series digital telephone
sets on Remote Gateway 9100 Series units connected to CS 2100 PBXs
does not produce a dial tone. The digital telephone sets operate properly,
but no dial tone is present. To produce dial tone in this situation, configure
the port on the RLC as a TAPI port.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Notes for M39xx series digital telephone sets:
1.
If you want to use an M3901 digital telephone set for remote (hostcontrolled) calls, you must configure the digital telephone set as an M3901
at the remote unit and as an M3902 at the host PBX. For local calls, you
must configure the M3901 digital telephone set as an M3901 at both the
remote unit and the host PBX.
2.
To label the Local Keys on M3902 digital telephone sets, use the options
key on the digital telephone set itself.
3.
The M3904 digital telephone set Key Map fails using Virtual Office on
Remote Gateway 9100 Series. Upgrade the digital telephone set’s firmware
to version 7.9 to resolve this problem.
4.
Uploading and downloading M3904 and M3905 firmware requires the
most recent digital telephone set hardware. To resolve problems following
firmware uploads and downloads, including missing functionality, refer to
the User Guide and Release Notes for your particular digital telephone set.
5.
When logging on to an ACD queue using an M3905 digital telephone set
connected to a Remote Gateway 9150 unit, the logon process takes longer
than expected if a headset is not plugged into the digital telephone set.
Initialization of the digital telephone set under these conditions can take up
to one minute.
6.
Phase I M3905 digital telephone sets receive false messages during a reboot of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and can lock up. Unplug and re-plug
the telephone cord at the wall jack or perform a system shutdown and repower up the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to recover. This is not a problem
with Phase III M3905 digital telephone sets.
7.
When you answer an incoming local call on an M39xx digital telephone
set, the call log records the calling DN. However, you cannot dial directly
from the Call Log, as the trunk access code and country code do not always
appear. To resolve this, navigate through the call log to the number that you
want to dial. Press the Edit key and the digit(s) of the missing code(s).
Press the Done key. To dial the revised number, press the Dial key.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
27
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
For example, the call log for an ISDN number displays the digits
4445551212. The missing trunk access code (9) and country code (0) are
required to dial the number. Use the Edit key to enter the missing digits, 9
followed by 0. The number now appears in the M39xx’s LCD display as
904445551212. The end-user can now press the Dial key to place the call
from the call log.
28
8.
If you downgrade the host PBX to a release prior to X11 release 25.40, you
must also downgrade any new or upgraded M39xx digital telephone sets so
that the Meridian 1 PBX can support them. This applies to digital telephone
sets attached to Remote Gateway 9100 Series units and Extended Digital
Line Cards.
9.
Flash upgrade download times to remote M39xx digital telephone sets over
an IP network with low delay and packet loss are comparable to PBX wired
downloads. Using PSTN bandwidth on a Remote Gateway 9150 unit or a
Remote Gateway 911x series unit, download times increase.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
M2000 series (M3310, and M3820 European models) and M39xx series
digital telephone set model and accessory compatibility
Digital Telephone Set Modelsi
Compatibility with
Remote Gateway 9150
units
M2006
✓
M2008D, M2008HFD
✓
M2616D
✓
M2216D-ACD
✓
M2616CT Cordless
Discontinued
✓
M3310, M3820 (Europe only)
ii
✓
M3902, M3903
✓
M3904
✓
M3905 (ACD)
✓
M3901
M2000 series (M3310 & M3820 European models) Add-on Modules
Headsets
✓
External alert
✓
✓
Key-based expansion module
ATA (Analog Terminal Adapter)
iii
✓
MCA (Meridian Communications Adapter)
✓
i.The host PBX must be running software capable of supporting each digital telephone
set model used.
ii.Refer to the Meridian digital telephone hardware compatibility section of the Reach
Line Card Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210) for required
configuration details.
iii.ATA modules support analog telephone sets and facsimile (FAX) machines. ATA
modules do not support modems.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
29
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
M39xx series digital telephone set accessory compatibility
The following table shows Remote Gateway 9150 unit compatibility with
M39xx series digital telephone set accessories.
M39xx series Digital Telephone Set Accessories
and Add-on Modules
Compatibility with
Remote Gateway 9150
units
Headsets
✓
External alert & recording interface
✓
Key-based expansion module (22-button, up to two per
3904/05)
✓
Display-based expansion module
✓
ATA (Analog Terminal Adapter)
i
(Refer to Note i)
Personal Directory PC utility
✓
Full-duplex Speakerphone
✓
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Adapter
✓
i.The Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports ATA modules. These modules support analog
telephone sets and facsimile (FAX) machines. They do not support modems.
Supported telephone modules
The following telephone modules are supported:
!
add-on modules (to add more keys)
!
application modules that provide more functionality
!
Meridian Communication Adapters (MCA)
!
Analog Telephone Adapters (ATA)
Notes:
30
1.
You cannot dial host PBX calls from the Call Log of M39xx series digital
telephone sets because the Trunk Access code and country code can be not
displayed. You cannot dial local calls from the Call Log of the M39xx
series digital telephone sets because the information contained in the Call
Log does not contain trunk group information.
2.
After re-boot of a Remote Gateway 9150 unit, re-boot each ATA as well.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Computer telephony integration (CTI) applications
There are two types of CTI applications:
!
first-party CTI applications that use the Symposium Desktop TAPI Service
Provider
!
third-party CTI applications that use Symposium TAPI Service Provider for
the Meridian 1 PBX
Both types can be used with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
TAPI Type
Symposium Desktop TAPI Service
Provider 1.6
Symposium TAPI Server Provider
for Meridian 1 PBX release 2.1
Supported CTI Application
!
Symposium FastView 1.6
!
Symposium FastCall 1.6
!
Symposium Call Manager 5.0
!
other TAPI-compliant applications
!
Symposium Agent 1.1
!
Symposium Call Manager 5.0
!
other Symposium Partner products
You can use first-party CTI applications with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit if
!
your PC is equipped with a Symposium Communicator card version 1.2
with software version 2.0
!
your digital telephone is equipped with a Meridian Communications
Adaptor (MCA)
Note: The Symposium Communicator card is not available in all countries.
Check with your Nortel distributor for availability.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
31
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports all Nortel ACD applications.
If an ACD agent loses communication to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, or the
unit goes offline, the agent is placed in Make Set Busy (MSB) mode. This mode
logs the agent out of the ACD queue so that calls can be routed to other ACD
agents. Once you re-establish communication between the agent and the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit, the digital telephone set display shows “Set Busy
Activated”.
In addition, when an ACD agent is on a call using a Local Calling key, the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit sends a transparent Not Ready key press to the host
PBX and places the ACD agent’s digital telephone set in Not Ready mode. This
feature prevents the ACD agent from receiving ACD calls when active on a
local call. The Remote Gateway 9150 unit removes the digital telephone set
from the Not Ready mode when the agent terminates the local call.
If you are having trouble with ACD agents being logged off unexpectedly or
calls that terminate prematurely, try the following:
!
Set the User On Demand Idle Timer to 90 seconds and the User On
Demand Minimum Call Timer to 1 second.
Note: You can configure these settings on the RLC’s Remote Connection
Configuration property sheet in Configuration Manager.
!
Allocate a permanent connection for the ACD agents.
— On the RLC Port Configuration property sheet, click on the Configure
button for the Network Port in question.
— In the Network Port Configuration dialog box, select Permanent
Allocation.
Voice over IP features
You can configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to use the following Voice
over IP (VoIP) features:
!
32
Convert analog voice into digital data for transmission as voice packets
over the network for calls to or from the fax machine or other analog device
that is connected to the analog port on Telco 1.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
!
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Automatically switch from the IP network to the PSTN when the voice QoS
on the IP network falls below a predetermined threshold, and back to the IP
network when the QoS returns to normal.
Packetized voice
DSPs located in the Remote Gateway 9150 unit convert voice into digital data
packets and, if compression is used, compresses them. The data is constructed as
UDP/IP voice packets for transmission over the IP network.
When voice packets are compressed, they consume less bandwidth, leaving
more bandwidth for data or other voice or fax communications. The following
algorithms are supported:
!
G.711: Packets are transmitted at 64 Kbps (that is, they are not
compressed).
!
G.726: Packets are compressed and transmitted at 32 Kbps.
!
G.729A: Packets are compressed and transmitted at 8 Kbps.
G.729A is the default algorithm on both the RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
In addition to voice compression, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports the
following additional packetized voice features:
!
A voice jitter attenuation buffer removes the variable delays from the voice
packets sent across the IP network, thus avoiding awkward-sounding
speech.
!
Packet loss handling techniques accommodate missing packets or packets
received too late to be processed.
!
Silence suppression prevents packet transmission during periods when
there is no voice data present. Comfort noise is inserted to assure the user
that the line is still active.
Silence is determined when the difference between the adaptable noise
floor and the detected signal is less than 9 dB. To prevent clipping, silence
must be present for a minimum of 250 milliseconds.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
33
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
QoS Transitioning Technology
Communications between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in your office and the
host PBX take place across the IP network using a 10BaseT Ethernet interface.
You can configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to switch automatically from
the IP network to the PSTN when the voice QoS falls below a predetermined
threshold. Within the QoS settings, you can also enable Differentiated Services
(DiffServ) and 802.1Q Mapping to give priority to voice over IP traffic on your
network.
Both the RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit monitor the IP network’s QoS
constantly. If the IP network QoS degrades, causing poor voice quality, the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit moves, or transitions, the call to the PSTN. When
the QoS returns to normal, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit transitions the call
back to the IP network.
QoS transition recovery
Due to the requirement for on-demand router support, the IP network is not
continually tested during QoS transition situations. It is tested only when there
are active voice calls over the PSTN. As a result, to switch back to the IP
network, QoS Transitioning Technology needs active calls for the userconfigured recovery period.
If you test QoS transition by disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit, or RLC, expect up to a 20-second delay before the
Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit can place or receive a call. You do not
encounter this delay when the network degrades and calls switch to BRI as
designed.
For detailed instructions on configuring the thresholds, refer to the Reach Line
Card Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210). For
guidelines on evaluating and adjusting the QoS on your IP network, refer to the
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines
(NTP 555-8421-103).
Voicemail messages and Quality of Service transitions
It can take several seconds of sustained errors to cause a Quality of Service
(QoS) transition to the PSTN. During this time, voice quality may suffer due to
errors. If a message to a voice mailbox is being recorded during these errors,
portions of the message can be unintelligible.
34
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Log reports and statistics
Configuration Manager provides a statistics log that identifies the number of
QoS transitions (refer to “Caller Info Statistics” on page 300).
Refer to Chapter 7, “Administration” for a detailed description of log and
statistic reports.
Port management
You can assign Remote Gateway 9150 stations to one of the following types of
RLC ports:
!
single-user ports
!
multi-user voice ports
!
dynamic port pool
Port types are assigned on the RLC. Refer to the Reach Line Card Installation
and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210) for detailed instructions.
Single-user ports
Each port that is defined as a single-user (dedicated) port on the RLC supports
one Remote Gateway 9150 station.
Multi-user ports
Ports that are defined on the RLC as multi-user ports allow multiple stations on
different Remote Gateway 9150 units to time-share a single port on the host
PBX.
Up to eight persons can share the same RLC port, but not at the same time. All
stations that use this type of port must respond to the same DN and have
identical telephone set configurations. This port type is especially useful for
employees who work mutually exclusive shifts.
Dynamic port pool
Dynamic port pooling is similar to a multi-user port except that the persons who
share ports in a dynamic pool are assigned to the next available port in the RLC
port pool. There is no correlation between the station and the port on the RLC.
This feature is especially useful in free-seated ACD environments where agents
log on to the host PBX using their agent IDs.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
35
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Station priority
You can define the priority of a station’s assigned RLC port as normal, high, IP
only, or circuit only.
Normal priority
When both the IP and PSTN networks are used to route calls, calls to and from
the station are routed primarily over the IP network. Calls transition between the
IP and PSTN networks whenever voice QoS levels change. (The voice QoS
levels are defined on the Quality of Service screen on the RLC for your Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.)
High priority
When you define an RLC port as high priority, the associated station has the
following benefits:
!
If allowed to use the IP network to process calls (this is transparent to the
user), an active call on that station is always one of the first to transition to
PSTN trunks when Voice over IP QoS degrades. (This transition is
accomplished using the QoS Transitioning Technology.)
!
Call blocking is reduced because bandwidth is always available to these
stations.
Note: If the reserved bandwidth is being used by other high priority
stations, then new calls are processed using unreserved bandwidth.
The number of stations that you can configure as high priority depends on the
amount of available bandwidth. Ensure that enough bandwidth is available to
process calls on normal priority stations.
IP only
Calls to and from the station are routed over the IP network only. QoS
transitioning is not available for stations that are defined as IP only.
Circuit only
Calls to and from the station are routed over the PSTN network only. Circuit
only stations never experience voice QoS degradation.
36
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Connection bandwidth
On the connection between the RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you
can configure the following:
!
when to open additional B-channels (referred to as extra bandwidth)
!
how much bandwidth to reserve for high priority stations (referred to as
priority reserved bandwidth)
For instructions, refer to “Configuring ports” in the Reach Line Card
Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210).
Extra bandwidth
When available bandwidth is no longer sufficient to process active calls,
additional B-channels are opened according to the extra bandwidth setting. For
example, if you configure the extra bandwidth setting as 16 Kbps, another
B-channel opens when existing bandwidth is reduced to 16 Kbps or less.
Priority reserved bandwidth
The priority reserved bandwidth setting defines how much bandwidth to reserve
for high priority stations. The reserved bandwidth cannot be used by stations
configured as normal, IP only, or circuit-only priority. High priority stations
consume priority reserved bandwidth before consuming unreserved bandwidth.
For example, if you configure the priority reserved setting as 16 Kbps, then only
high priority stations can use this reserved bandwidth. When the reserved
bandwidth is being used for active high priority calls, additional calls from high
priority stations are processed using unreserved bandwidth. If no bandwidth is
available, calls to or from high priority stations are blocked until bandwidth
becomes available.
Local calling
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit allows you to place calls to other extensions
within your office or to telephones in your local community. This is
accomplished through the use of up to two local call appearance keys. Refer to
Chapter 6, “Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations,” for a detailed description of
the local call appearance keys.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
37
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit discovers the DN numbers of the local digital
telephones either through DN Discovery or configuration. The Bridge Ports,
Local Calling, and Local SwitchOver features depend on this knowledge as
follows:
!
If a call has an appearance on a Local Calling key, the Remote Gateway
9150 unit first attempts to complete the operation (for example, call,
transfer, forward) using the local dialing plan.
!
If a call is placed from a Local Calling key to a number not found in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s local list, then a Bridge Port is used to place
the intended call to the host PBX.
Local extension calling
When you place a call to another telephone in your office using the local call
appearance key, it is handled by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, not the host
PBX.
Note: If the call is initiated from the host call appearance key, then the
station-to-station call requires transmission of signaling data through the host
PBX.
Local SwitchOver
Local SwitchOver is a mechanism that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses to
determine if a PBX-controlled call that originated on the Remote Gateway 9150
unit is destined for a DN on the same Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit.
Note: The DN Discovery feature is necessary for the Local SwitchOver feature
to work properly. Refer to the Reach Line Card Installation and Administration
Guide (NTP 555-8421-210) for more information.
In this situation, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit switches to a local 64K channel
and cross-connect the voice-paths of the phone without using wide area
bandwidth.
There are times, however, when the Remote Gateway 9150 unit does not know
that an incoming and outgoing call are part of the same call (for example, you
transfer/forward a call within the same PBX, or re-dial the last number).
Although the call still functions, it consumes Wide Area bandwidth.
Local SwitchOver is not available if the call is answered with the Handsfree
button on M39xx telephones.
38
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Local calls through PSTN
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit allows you to place outgoing and answer
incoming PSTN calls over the ISDN BRI connection.
Refer to Chapter 6, “Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations,” for a more detailed
description of local calling.
Bridge Port
Bridge Ports are proxy ports that represent local calls or inbound PSTN calls to
the PBX. When a local call on a Remote Gateway 9150 unit needs PBX
services, the Bridge Port obtains a PBX presence on behalf of the local call.
Call restrictions
To prevent outgoing calls to certain types of numbers (for example, 1-976), you
can disable outgoing calls to specific digit sequences.
Supported digital telephone features
Remote Gateway 9100 Series supports the following Meridian digital telephone
features for locally controlled calls:
!
Paging
!
Call Waiting
!
Hold for calls that appear on local call appearance keys
!
Call Transfer (blind and announced) for station-to-station calls only
!
Release
!
Handsfree
!
calling line identification (CLID) and calling party name display (CPND)
Unsupported telephone features
Remote Gateway 9100 Series does not support Distinctive ring functionality of
any kind.
Digital telephone features requiring Bridge Ports
You must configure Bridge Ports for Remote Gateway 9100 Series to support
the following Meridian digital telephone features for locally controlled calls:
!
Conference
!
Call Forward
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
39
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Online/offline table
The online/offline table is configured on the RLC and allows you to schedule
times
!
when the ISDN BRI connection to the host PBX is made available to the
Remote Gateway 9150 site
Note: When the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is in offline mode, users
cannot place or receive calls through the host PBX over the IP or PSTN.
!
when all telephones at the Remote Gateway 9150 site revert to normal
telephone service
This allows you to ensure that unwanted ISDN BRI telephone calls through the
host PBX are disabled after business hours.
How the table works
You can define up to eight entries per day, every day of the week, for each
remote site. You can define each entry as online, offline, or undefined for each
time period entered.
Users at the Remote Gateway 9150 site can override the settings of the online/
offline table, if the table attempts to suspend access to the host PBX in the
middle of a business call. Each user station at the remote site is alerted by a buzz
and a display message at 30, 20, and 10 seconds before the connection is
terminated. To override connection termination, the user must enter the online
SPRE (Special Prefix) code on the telephone.
Configuration
The online/offline table is configured for each remote site on the RLC. Refer to
the Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210) for configuration information.
For a description of how to go online or offline at the Remote Gateway 9150
site, refer to Chapter 6, “Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations.”
40
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Other supported features
In addition to the features described in the previous sections, the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit also supports the following features:
Fax support
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit contains one analog port that can be used to
send and receive faxes. You can send and receive faxes in both host- and locally
controlled call modes over the IP or PSTN.
To support faxing through the host PBX, the fax port on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit must be associated with a port on the RLC that is configured on the
host PBX with voice capability.
Emergency activation code
If your community has implemented an emergency service number (such as 911)
to call the police, fire department, or ambulance, you can configure that number
on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. This allows users in your office to dial the
emergency number and be connected directly to the local emergency dispatch
center through the PSTN. The call is automatically routed through the local
PSTN without having to dial a local trunk access code.
When you configure an emergency activation code on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit, you also prevent the call from being automatically routed through the
host PBX. This is because the PBX can be in a different city. An emergency call
that is routed through the host PBX can result in emergency support being
dispatched to the wrong location.
ATTENTION!
If you are using only the IP network to route calls, place
emergency service calls on a telephone that is directly
connected to a PSTN line. If you place an emergency
service call from a station that is connected to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit, the call is routed through the host PBX.
If the PBX is in a different city, the call contacts the wrong
emergency services.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
41
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Communications system and software requirements
The following table shows the software versions necessary to run Remote
Gateway 9150 units on compatible Nortel’s communications systems.
Remote Gateway 9150, Remote Gateway 911x series, and Digital
Telephone IP Adapter units
Communications systemi
System software version
Meridian 1 PBX
X11 release 23 or higher
CS 1000
Release 2 or higher
CS 2100
Release MSL12 or higher
i. Requires Remote Gateway 9100 Series software version 1.5 or higher.
Supported Codecs
The following tables show the Codecs supported by the Remote Gateway 9100
Series and Digital Telephone IP Adapter units, as well as the data stream, and
approximate peak bandwidth required by each.
Remote Gateway 9150 units
CODEC
42
Data stream only
Approximate total bandwidth, including IP
overhead (30 ms voice packets)
G.711
64 Kbps
78 Kbps
G.726
32 Kbps
44 Kbps
G.729A
8 Kbps
22 Kbps
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Administration software
Configuration and administration of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
performed with Configuration Manager software, a Windows-based application
that is installed on your PC.
The software is provided on the Remote Gateway 9100 Series Product CDROM. You can obtain the CD from your Nortel distributor or click on the
Support link at the following website:
www.nortel.com
Administration PC connection options
You can connect the administration PC to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
through the following:
!
an RS-232 connection to the administration PC’s serial port
!
a 10BaseT Ethernet interface connection
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager allows you to configure
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. It also provides the Configuration Wizard for
first-time configuration. The Configuration Wizard prompts you for the
minimum information that is needed to get the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
communicating with the RLC on the host PBX. After the initial configuration is
completed, use Configuration Manager to administer the Remote Gateway 9150
unit. Administration tasks include the following:
!
viewing the system status
!
performing upgrades, backups, or restores
!
making configuration changes
!
changing the administration password
Note: Configuration Manager alerts you when you must restart after you have
made a configuration change.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
43
Remote Gateway 9150 description
Standard 3.1
Command line interface
When the administration PC is connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
through the serial port, you can view the command line interface using an
application such as Telnet or HyperTerminal. However, the command line
interface is not documented in this guide. Configuration Manager is the
supported tool for administering the Remote Gateway 9150 unit over both the
serial port and Ethernet connections.
44
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 2
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150
unit installation
In this chapter
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation Checklist
46
Physical environment
50
Network considerations
55
Administration PC
59
Trunk connection management
64
Station configuration
66
Security
70
Planning for future growth
72
Deployment options
75
Planning the configuration
81
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
45
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Installation checklist
When you are preparing to install your Remote Gateway 9150 unit, use the
following checklist to ensure that you complete all the required processes
properly.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation Checklist
Page 1 of 4
✓
Task
For details, refer to
❒
Review the Release Notes for lastminute product updates.
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
and RLC Release Notes
(NTP 555-8421-102).
❒
Ensure you have the latest firmware
and software.
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
and RLC Release Notes
(NTP 555-8421-102)
❒
You can route calls over the IP
“Deployment options” on
network, the PSTN, or both.
page 75.
Determine, at a high level, what you
must do to implement these call routing
methods.
❒
If you want to use the IP network to
route calls, evaluate the IP network to
determine if the network infrastructure
can support voice traffic.
❒
If you want to use the PSTN to route
calls, order trunks from the central
office to the Remote Gateway 9150
unit site.
!
your data network
administrator
!
Remote Gateway 9100
Series Network
Engineering Guidelines
(555-8421-103)
“ISDN BRI information” on
page 82.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit
supports ISDN BRI trunks (S/T or U
interface).
46
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation Checklist
Page 2 of 4
✓
Task
For details, refer to
❒
Obtain the cables that you need to
establish the network connections.
“Cables you must supply
yourself” on page 53.
❒
Decide on the administration PC setup. “Administration PC” on page
59.
❒
Gather the configuration information
(network addresses, connection
numbers, online/offline schedule, QoS
thresholds, and so on).
!
“Deployment options” on
page 75
!
Appendix A, “Planning
forms”
❒
Install DSP application and trunk
interface modules into the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
“Installing trunk interface or
DSP application modules” on
page 93.
❒
Choose a suitable location for the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
“Choosing a suitable
location” on page 98.
❒
Install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
in the chosen location.
“Installing the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit” on page
98.
❒
Connect the Remote Gateway 9150
“Connecting the Remote
unit to the power source, administration Gateway 9150 unit” on page
PC, and network.
105.
❒
Power up the Remote Gateway 9150
unit and observe LED indicator
behavior.
“Powering up the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit” on page
111.
The Status LED indicator remains lit
when the power-up cycle completes
successfully.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
47
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation Checklist
Page 3 of 4
✓
48
Task
For details, refer to
❒
Install the software from the product
CD-ROM or the Nortel web site.
“Installing the Configuration
Manager software” on page
113.
❒
Configure the IP address, subnet mask, “Using the Configuration
and default gateway on the Remote
Wizard to perform initial
Gateway 9150 unit.
configuration” on page 115.
❒
Configure the following items, as
required, to create the communication
paths between the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and the RLC:
!
IP network: RLC’s IP address
!
PSTN:
— RLC’s telephone number
— primary trunk
!
security level and, if required,
security identifier
!
“Using the Configuration
Wizard to perform initial
configuration” on page
115
!
“Security level
configuration” on page
200
❒
PING the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and ensure that it is recognized as a
device on the network.
“Testing the network
connections” on page 129.
❒
Ensure that the Remote Gateway 9150
unit’s connection information is
completed on the RLC.
the Reach Line Card
Installation and
Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
❒
Configure user stations with
appropriate calling permissions and
features.
“9150 port configuration” on
page 207.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation Checklist
Page 4 of 4
✓
Task
For details, refer to
❒
Configure ports on the RLC.
the Reach Line Card
Installation and
Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
❒
Configure network devices
!
!
so that voice traffic is not
constrained or congested
your data network
administrator.
!
Remote Gateway 9100
Series Network
Engineering Guidelines
(555-8421-103)
to maximize network efficiency for
Voice over IP service
Ensure that voice calls can be sent or
received over the following:
❒
❒
!
!
IP network
!
PSTN
❒
Ensure that processing of voice and
data traffic over the IP network
performs as expected.
❒
Adjust QoS Transitioning Technology
settings, if required.
❒
Ensure that calls can be made and
received on each station.
❒
Plan for administration training and
technical support.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
your data network
administrator.
!
your data network
administrator
!
your telecom network
administrator
!
Remote Gateway 9100
Series Network
Engineering Guidelines
(555-8421-103)
“Testing the network
connections” on page 129.
!
Chapter 7,
“Administration”
!
Chapter 8,
“Troubleshooting”
49
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Physical environment
This section provides the space, temperature, cabling, and mounting information
you need to know before you install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Space
Ensure that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is installed in a location that is dry
and provides plenty of air circulation.
The chosen location must be no more than cable-length distance from the
following:
!
the administration PC (if the serial connection is used)
!
the Ethernet hub
!
trunk and telephone connection interfaces
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can be installed up to
!
1230.7 meters (4000 feet) from the digital telephones
!
307.7 meters (1000 feet) from the analog device
It is recommended that you install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in the same
room where your communications equipment is installed.
50
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Temperature and humidity
The following table describes the temperature and humidity conditions that the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit can withstand without any performance degradation
or damage.
Specification
Minimum
Maximum
Normal operation
Recommended:
!
Temperature (Ambient)
!
0°C (32°F)
!
40°C (104°F)
!
Relative humidity
!
5%
!
95% (noncondensing)
Storage
Recommended temperature
-40°C (-40°F)
70°C (158°F)
Relative humidity
5%
95% (non-condensing)
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
51
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Mounting options
You can place the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a desk or in a rack, or you can
mount it on the wall.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit dimensions are
!
42.5 cm (17 in.) wide (without rack-mounting brackets)
!
29.4 cm (11.75 in.) deep
!
4.4 cm (1.75 in.) high
Mounting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack
If you want to install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack, the rack slot must
!
be large enough to provide air circulation to keep the Remote Gateway
9150 unit cool
!
allow you to securely fasten the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the rack
using the rack-mount brackets
Mounting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall
If you want to install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall, you can mount
it so the cables from the rear panel are directed either right or left. Ensure that
the chosen location allows you to easily view the LED indicators on the front
panel.
ATTENTION!
You must complete wall installation using standard
telephony installation practices.
Connections
The following connections are made from the rear panel of the Remote Gateway
9150 unit to the telephone and data networks:
!
52
Two 25-pair connectors (labeled TELCO 1 and TELCO 2) provide tip and
ring connections to stations (telephones) and central office trunks (ISDN
BRI). These connections provide the interface to the telephone network and
the PSTN.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
!
An RJ-45 connector (labeled ETHERNET) provides a 10BaseT Ethernet
connection. This connection provides the ability to pass both voice and data
administration traffic over the existing Ethernet network.
!
A DB-9 connector (labeled ADMIN) provides an RS-232 serial port
connection. You can use this serial port connection to configure a Remote
Gateway 9150 unit that is directly connected to a PC.
Cables included with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit package includes the following cables:
!
power cord and power supply
Notes:
— In North America, the power cord and power supply are included inside
the Remote Gateway 9150 box. In all other regions, the power supply is
provided inside the box. However, the power cord for your region is
provided outside the box.
— When the North American power cord and power supply are connected
together, they are 3.2 meters (10.4 feet) in length.
— If you connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to an uninterruptible
power supply then the UPS must have a minimum of 100 Watts
available.
!
RS-232 serial cable
If the RS-232 cable is not long enough, you can supply your own cable, up
to 15.38 meters (50 feet) in length.
Cables you must supply yourself
The cables used to establish the telephone and Ethernet network connections are
industry-standard cables. They are not provided in the Remote Gateway 9150
package. You must obtain them from your local cable supplier.
Telephone network cables
The telephone network cables establish the telephone and trunk connections.
One end of the cable must provide a male 50-pin connector. (This end connects
to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.)
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
53
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Ensure that the other end of the cable matches the connectors needed to connect
to the telephones or trunks. (For example, if you are using a BIX block to
establish the telephone connections, you might need to cut off the connector to
expose the wires inside.)
Notes:
!
Two telephone cables may be required, based on how many telephones and
ISDN BRI lines you plan to connect. (Each telephone cable provides
support for up to 16 digital telephones, and two ISDN BRI lines providing
two B-channels each. The Telco 1 cable also provides support for one
analog station such as a fax machine.)
!
The Telco 1 and 2 connections are the opposite gender of the connections
for a Meridian 1 PBX IPE or Meridian 1 PBX 11 cabinet line card slot.
Therefore, you must use different cables when connecting to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit than those used to connect to Meridian 1 PBX line
cards.
!
Digital telephones must be located no farther than 1230.7 meters (4000
feet) from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
!
The analog device must be located no farther than 307.7 meters (1000 feet)
from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Ethernet cable
If you are connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a hub, you need a
standard CAT5 un-shielded twisted-pair (UTP) straight-through Ethernet cable.
The cable must be no longer than 100 meters (325 feet) in length.
54
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Network considerations
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit communicates through both the IP and
telecommunications network using a host PBX.
To use the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in these networks, you must consider the
issues described in this section.
IP addressing and routing
To place and receive calls over the IP network, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
must have:
!
a physical connection to the IP network
!
a unique IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask
Note: Similarly, you must assign a unique IP address, default gateway, and
subnet mask to the RLC on the host PBX.
In addition, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit must be able to send and receive
traffic to and from the RLC on the host PBX.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
55
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Network diagram
The following diagram shows the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s position in an IP
network.
Internal
network
Host
PBX
Ethernet
network
Router
Ethernet
network
Remote Gateway 9150
10.1.1.2
10.3.1.1
POWER
ETHERN
ET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODULE
L2
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
STATUS
TX
RX
10.2.1.10
10.3.1.2
Management
port (optional)
RLC
10.2.1.1
Network
10.4.1.1
Router
10.3.1.3
10.4.1.2
Router
10.1.1.10
10.2.1.3
G101418
Note: For placement of one or more administration PCs, refer to
“Administration PC” on page 59.
QoS
The routers used on your IP network must be capable of handling voice traffic,
with little or no congestion and few delays. If the network is congested or
subjected to many delays, voice quality is affected.
For more information, refer to the Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network
Engineering Guidelines (555-8421-103).
56
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Numbering plans
Each trunk group at the Remote Gateway 9150 unit site must be assigned a trunk
access code (that is, the number dialed to obtain an outgoing trunk). In addition,
special prefix (SPRE) codes must be defined for the following features if you
want to use them:
!
paging
!
local calling on ATA-equipped analog devices
!
to go online or offline (for more details, refer to “Online/offline table” on
page 40)
!
registration and deregistration for multi-user or dynamic ports
All trunk access and SPRE codes are automatically defined in Configuration
Manager with a pound prefix (# in North America) so that there are no conflicts
with host PBX dialing plans. For a list of the default trunk access and SPRE
codes, refer to the “Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Dialing
Plans” form on page 384.
Numbering plan for local stations
Consider the numbering plan on the host PBX when setting up the numbering
plan for local stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 unit site. This ensures that
station-to-station calls through the host PBX complete correctly.
Call blocking
Call blocking can occur when there are more users installed and more calls
being processed than can be supported by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s DSP
application and trunk interface modules.
The voice processing capacity of the remote system depends on the number of
DSP application and trunk interface modules installed in the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and the amount of bandwidth available to process calls. If bandwidth
is not available, additional calls are blocked. (This setting is configured on the
RLC for each site). This voice processing capacity defines how many calls can
be active at one time.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
57
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with the ability to support up to 32 users,
with up to 8 simultaneous calls (providing a 4:1 call blocking ratio). By adding
additional DSP application or trunk interface modules, you can reduce or
eliminate call blocking.
Reducing call blocking between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and
the host PBX
Each DSP application module provides the ability to support eight more
simultaneous calls when voice traffic is routed over the IP network. Up to three
more DSP application modules can be installed in the Remote Gateway 9150
unit, allowing 32 active calls at one time.
Note: If you add DSP capacity to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you must add
the same DSP capacity to the RLC on the host PBX.
Trunks are required for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to operate in PSTN mode
(that is, over the PSTN instead of the IP network). Trunks are used to route calls
between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the host PBX or the local PSTN.
By default, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with no trunks installed. Trunks
can be provided by installing trunk interface modules.
The number of trunks you can install depends on the type of trunk interface
modules used on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. For example, if ISDN BRI
trunks are used, each trunk interface module provides one BRI trunk (providing
two B-channels). You can install up to four trunk interface modules in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit supports only ISDN BRI S/T or U trunks.
Calculating system requirements
To determine how many DSP application or trunk interface modules are needed
to reduce or eliminate call blocking, use the “Remote Gateway 9150 System
expansion worksheet” on page 385.
58
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Administration PC
Install the Windows-based Remote Gateway 9150 administration software on a
PC in the Remote Gateway 9100 Series network. This section describes options
for connecting an administration PC to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. It also
describes the hardware and software requirements of the administration
software.
Connection options
The Remote Gateway 9150 product includes the Configuration Manager
software that enables you to configure, administer, and upgrade the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. Perform these tasks over one of the following connections:
!
RS-232 serial connection (required for first-time configuration only)
!
10BaseT Ethernet connection (for ongoing administration and upgrades)
Serial connection
Use the serial connection when you first install and configure the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. You must establish a serial connection to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to enter the IP interface information. Refer to the following
illustration:
Remote
Gateway 9150
POWE
RS-232 serial connection
(using Configuration
Manager software)
R
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODU
L2
2
LE
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
STAT
TX
RX
Administration
PC
US
G101417
You can continue using the serial connection for ongoing administration of the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit, if you prefer. However, if this is the only connection
option you use, you cannot administer the Remote Gateway 9150 unit remotely
or perform upgrades.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
59
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Note: When the administration PC is connected to the Remote Gateway 9150
unit through the serial port, you can view the command line interface using an
application such as Telnet or HyperTerminal. However, the command line
interface is not documented in this guide. Configuration Manager is the
supported tool for administering the Remote Gateway 9150 unit over the serial
port.
Ethernet connection
Once you configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with its IP interface
information, the following can happen:
!
Communication can be established between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and the RLC (that is, calls can be routed over the IP network).
!
You can administer and upgrade the Remote Gateway 9150 unit over the IP
network.
This means you do not have to install an administration PC in the same
location as the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Refer to the following
illustration:
Remote Gateway 9150
Ethernet
network
Router
POWER
ETHERN
ET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODUL
L2
2
E
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
STATUS
TX
RX
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.10
10.4.1.1
Network
Administration
PC
10.1.1.3
G101415
60
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Administering multiple nodes in the network
If you are responsible for administering one or more Remote Gateway 9150
units and the RLC on the host PBX, you can access the Remote Gateway 9150
unit and the RLC from anywhere on the network. The following diagram shows
an example of an assembled network with administration PCs.
Note: You do not have to install separate administration PCs for the RLC and
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. You can use one administration PC to
administer all units in the Remote Gateway 9100 Series network.
Host
Internal
administration network
PC
Host
PBX
Ethernet
network
Ethernet
network
Remote
Gateway
9150
Router
POWER
ETHERNE
T
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
MODULE
L2
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
10.3.1.1
4
L1
V.35
L2
STATUS
TX
RX
10.2.1.10
10.4.1.2
10.3.1.2
10.1.1.2
RLC
Management
port (optional)
10.2.1.1
Router
Network
10.3.1.3
10.2.1.3
RLC
Administration
PC
10.4.1.1
Router
Remote
Gateway 9150
Administration
PC
10.1.1.3
10.2.1.2
10.1.1.10
G101400
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
61
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Windows PC requirements
To use Configuration Manager, the administration PC must:
!
be an IBM-compatible PC
!
use a Windows 95, 98, NT Workstation 4.0, Millennium Edition (ME),
2000 Professional, or XP (Professional and Home Edition) operating
system with the Microsoft TCP/IP networking component installed
!
be equipped with a CD-ROM drive
!
be equipped with a 10BaseT Ethernet interface card (this provides access to
the Ethernet network)
!
have an available COM port if you wish to use the RS-232 serial port to
establish a direct serial connection
!
be equipped with a pointing device, such as a mouse
!
have 32 Mbytes of RAM for Windows 95, 98, and ME, or 64 Mbytes of
RAM for Windows NT Workstation 4.0, 2000 Professional, and XP
(Professional and Home Edition
!
have 48 Mbytes of available storage for Windows 95, 98 and ME, or 64
Mbytes of available storage for Windows NT Workstation 4.0, 2000
Professional, and XP (Professional and Home Edition)
Note: Configuration Manager does not support any of the Win32 Server
versions of Microsoft Windows.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server
Firmware upgrades and configuration uploads require that the administration PC
have a TFTP server application installed. The administrator must know the
TFTP server’s IP address in the network. In other words, the IP address of the
administration PC.
You can use any TFTP server application. These applications are available free
of charge on the Internet.
62
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Year 2000 compliance
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit and Configuration Manager software are Year
2000 compliant. However, ensure that the administration PC is Year 2000
compliant by verifying that the Windows operating system meets the
compliance requirement listed in the following table:
Operating system
Year 2000 compliance requirement
Windows 95
Version 95b
Windows 98
OK as is
Windows NT Workstation 4.0
Service Pack 5 or higher
Windows 2000
Ok as is
Windows ME
Ok as is
Windows XP
OK as is
Optivity Telephony Manager and Configuration Manager
Nortel does not guarantee that Optivity Telephony Manager (OTM) and the
Configuration Manager can operate simultaneously on the same administration
PC. Simultaneous running of these to applications has not been tested and is,
therefore, not supported.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
63
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Trunk connection management
You can manage trunk connections to the host PBX in several ways:
!
Put the Remote Gateway 9150 unit into offline mode, so that it cannot place
or receive calls through the host PBX when operating in PSTN mode.
!
Define call duration and idle timers, if the trunk connection is defined as
on-demand.
!
Define minimum and maximum bandwidth allocation settings.
!
Use QoS Transitioning Technology.
QoS Transitioning Technology
On IP networks, traffic congestion or delays can occur that result in poor voice
quality or lost connections. The RLC can be configured to transition call
processing from the IP network to the PSTN when the QoS degrades. When
QoS on the IP network returns to normal, call processing can be transitioned
back to the IP network.
The QoS thresholds (level and duration) defined on each RLC port determine
when the transitions occur. To determine appropriate thresholds for each site in
your network, consult your data network administrator. For more information,
refer to the Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines (5558421-103).
Online/offline schedule
You can configure an online/offline schedule on the RLC to control when the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit can place and receive calls through the host PBX.
When the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is in offline mode, calls cannot be made or
received through the host PBX over the IP or PSTN.
Configure offline entries:
!
64
for times when the connection to the host PBX is not normally active, such
as during evenings and weekends
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
!
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
to prevent the Remote Gateway 9150 unit from staying online permanently,
thereby eliminating unwanted ISDN BRI charges
When the RLC processes an offline entry, it instructs the Remote Gateway 9150
unit to go offline for a specified number of hours and minutes. The number of
hours and minutes the Remote Gateway 9150 unit stays offline is the difference
between the offline entry being processed and the next online entry.
For example, an offline entry is configured at 6:00 p.m. The next online entry is
configured at 9:00 a.m. the following day. When the RLC processes the 6:00
p.m. entry, it instructs the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to go offline for 15 hours.
When going offline, a timer is activated within the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
When the timer expires (in the example above, at 9:00 a.m.), the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit automatically initiates a “going online” request to the host
PBX. If the RLC successfully receives the request, the Remote Gateway 9150
unit and its connected telephones go online.
Changing the online/offline mode
Whether an online/offline schedule is used or not, you can put the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit into online or offline mode at any time by dialing the online
or offline SPRE code at any telephone set connected to the Remote Gateway
9150 unit. The SPRE codes are configured on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Trunk bandwidth allocation
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can dynamically allocate available trunk
bandwidth to active calls in PSTN mode. As calls are initiated and bandwidth
requirements increase, additional trunk connections are established. Similarly,
as calls terminate and bandwidth requirements drop, calls are aggregated and
idle trunks are shut down.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
65
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Station configuration
When planning the stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site, you must think
about the call capabilities required by each station.
Each station at the Remote Gateway 9150 site inherits settings such as voice
compression and priority from its associated RLC port. Configurations at the
Remote Gateway 9150 site determine each station’s ability to place locally
controlled calls, host-controlled calls, or both. For stations defined with local
control or local and host control, you can enable or disable specific features.
RLC settings
You must define the following on each RLC port:
!
port allocation as dedicated, multi-user, or dynamic
!
whether voice compression is used
!
priority level
Port allocation
Assign each user at the Remote Gateway 9150 site to one port on the RLC on the
host PBX. You can configure an RLC port in one of the following ways:
66
!
as a dedicated port (one port per remote user)
!
as a multi-user port (one port shared by multiple users)
Up to eight persons can share the same RLC port, but not at the same time.
All stations that use this type of port must respond to the same DN and have
identical telephone set configurations. This port type is especially useful for
employees who are working in mutually exclusive shifts.
!
as part of a dynamic pool
Dynamic port pooling is similar to a multi-user port except that the persons
who share ports in a dynamic pool are assigned to the next available port in
the RLC port pool. There is no correlation between the station and the port
on the RLC.
This feature is especially useful in free-seated ACD environments where
agents log on to the host PBX using their agent IDs.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Voice compression
If calls are to be routed over the IP network, you must select one of the
following voice compression algorithms on each RLC port:
!
G.711: Voice is transmitted at 64 Kbps (no compression).
!
G.726: Voice is compressed and transmitted at 32 Kbps.
!
G.729A: Voice is compressed and transmitted at 8 Kbps.
G.729A is the default voice compression algorithm used by the RLC. This
allows
— up to six simultaneous voice calls to be processed over the first ISDN
BRI B-channel (16 Kbps are reserved for signaling data)
— up to eight simultaneous voice calls to be processed over the remaining
ISDN BRI B-channels
Each Remote Gateway 9150 station inherits its compression algorithm from its
assigned RLC port.
Station priority
You can configure each RLC port that is assigned to each station as normal
priority, high priority, PSTN only, or IP only.
When the port is configured as high priority and the priority reserved setting is
configured on the connection between the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
you can ensure voice QoS for calls to and from those stations.
For more details, refer to “Station priority” on page 36 and “Connection
bandwidth” on page 37.
Notes:
1.
Each Remote Gateway 9150 station inherits its priority setting from its
assigned RLC port.
2.
The number of RLC ports that you can configure as high priority depends
on the amount of available bandwidth. The RLC administrator must ensure
that enough bandwidth is available to process calls on normal priority ports.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
67
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 unit settings
You can define the following settings for each Remote Gateway 9150 station:
!
port type as local, remote, or both
!
extension (directory) number (on local stations only)
!
key placement (on local stations only)
Port types
On the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you can define each station with one of the
following capabilities:
68
!
local control only (local)
You can use stations defined as local to place and receive calls through the
local PSTN. You can also place station-to-station calls at the Remote
Gateway 9150 site. Calls through the host PBX are not allowed.
!
host control only (remote)
If a particular station is not allowed to place or receive calls through the
local PSTN, that station is configured as remote only. All calls are routed
through the host PBX, except for emergency calls (such as 911). If the
emergency service number is configured on the Remote Gateway 9150
unit, calls made to the emergency number are routed through the local
PSTN so the emergency service receives the correct location information.
!
both local and remote control
You can use stations defined as local and remote to place and receive calls
through both the host PBX and the local PSTN. You can also place stationto-station calls at the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
Outgoing calls are routed according to the call appearance key used to
initiate the call. Calls initiated on the key defined as the primary or host call
appearance key are routed through the host PBX. Calls initiated on the key
defined as the local call appearance key are routed through the local PSTN,
if a trunk access code was dialed before the telephone number.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
When a station is configured with local control capability, further configuration
of the station is required to:
!
enable or disable certain features
!
disable outgoing calls or single-digit dialing, if required
!
define key placement on the telephone
User extension configuration
Each station is assigned a local directory number (DN). The Remote Gateway
9150 unit uses the DN to route the incoming call to the correct station.
Stations that are configured with host-controlled call capability are associated
with a port number on the RLC. The RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
use this port number to establish the communication path between the host PBX
and the station.
Placement of local call appearance and feature keys
When determining the placement of the local call appearance key on a station,
ensure that the key position is not already configured for a specific feature on the
host PBX. If you configure a PBX-configured feature key as a local call
appearance key, the user cannot use that feature.
If the station is configured with local control capability, you can also configure
the placement of other keys, such as Transfer, Call Waiting, and Make Set Busy.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
69
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Security
The RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit offer the following types of security:
!
security level and, if required, security identifier to prevent toll fraud on the
host PBX
!
two levels of administration passwords to secure node configurations
Toll fraud
You can minimize toll fraud on the PBX by implementing one of the following
levels of security:
!
Caller ID
When Caller ID is selected, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s calling line
identification (CLID) is compared with its PSTN number configured on the
RLC port when a connection to the host PBX is attempted. If they match,
the connection is established. If they do not match, the host PBX drops the
call.
Caller ID authentication cannot be performed over the IP network.
!
security identifier
You can use security identifier authentication over the IP or PSTN. If you
choose this level, you must configure a security identifier on both the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and its assigned RLC port. When an incoming
call attempts to initiate a connection between the host PBX and Remote
Gateway 9150 unit, Remote Gateway 9100 Series compares the security
identifiers. If they match, the attempted connection succeeds. If they do not
match, the host PBX drops the call and the connection fails.
Data network security
The Remote Gateway 9150 solution does not provide for data network security.
If security on the data network is an issue, security must be implemented on the
data network devices.
70
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
System configuration
The RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit configurations are protected by two
layers of security:
!
administration password
The administration password is required when starting the Configuration
Manager software. If the password is not known, the person attempting to
use the Configuration Manager cannot log on to any Remote Gateway 9100
Series node.
Note: A node is any RLC or remote site connected to the RLC.
!
node password
The node password is required before the configuration of a particular node
can be displayed or modified.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
71
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Planning for future growth
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can change or grow along with your
telecommunication needs. This section describes planning for accommodating
those needs.
Adding DSP modules
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with the ability to support up to 32
stations (you must assign all 32 to the same RLC). A Remote Gateway 9150 unit
supports up to eight simultaneous voice calls when over the IP network.
You can increase the voice processing capability of the Remote Gateway 9150
unit by installing up to three more DSP modules. Each DSP module adds
support for up to eight more simultaneous calls (to a maximum of 32).
To determine how many DSP application modules you need to install, use the
“Remote Gateway 9150 System expansion worksheet” on page 385. For
instructions on installing additional DSP modules, refer to “Installing trunk
interface or DSP application modules” on page 93.
Refer to “DSP configuration” on page 239 for configuration information.
Note: When installing additional DSP modules on the Remote Gateway 9150
unit, you must also increase voice processing capability on the RLC. The
number of modules that need to be added on the RLC depend on the
requirements of other remote units connecting to the same RLC. If only this
Remote Gateway 9150 unit is connecting to the RLC, then the same number of
DSP modules must be installed on both the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the
RLC. To calculate the RLC’s DSP refer to the expansion worksheet in the Reach
Line Card Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210).
72
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Adding trunk interface modules
Initially, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships with no trunks. As connection
needs change, you can add up to four ISDN BRI S/T or U trunk interface
modules.
To determine how many trunk interface modules you need to install, use the
“Remote Gateway 9150 System expansion worksheet” on page 385. For
instructions on installing or replacing existing trunk interface modules, refer to
“Installing trunk interface or DSP application modules” on page 93.
Maximum configurations
The following table identifies the maximum configurations for the Remote
Gateway 9150 solution:
Component
Maximum
RLC connections
1
Note: You must assign all users at the Remote
Gateway 9150 site to the same RLC.
DSP application modules
3
ISDN BRI modules
4
ISDN BRI lines
4
Note: Each line is associated with one ISDN BRI
module and provides two B-channels.
Trunk groups
10
Digital telephones
32
Analog telephone or fax
machine
1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
73
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Component
MCAs or ATAs
Standard 3.1
Maximum
!
4 if the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
connected to a 1-slot RLC (supporting 16
users).
!
7 if the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
connected to a 2-slot RLC (supporting 32
users).
Notes:
74
!
You can have eight MCAs or ATAs installed
if an analog telephone or fax machine is not
installed.
!
The total number of digital telephones and
ATAs cannot exceed 32.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Deployment options
You can install and configure the RLC on the host PBX and Remote Gateway
9150 unit with the following network capabilities:
!
only the IP network (Voice over IP)
!
only the PSTN (for example, ISDN BRI trunks)
!
both networks (required for QoS Transitioning Technology functionality)
If you choose not to use both networks initially, this section suggests how you
can gradually phase in Voice over IP and QoS Transitioning Technology
functionality.
ATTENTION!
Even if you plan to route calls over the PSTN only, you
must assign an IP address and gateway to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and RLC to allow remote
administration.
Port and station assignment
Regardless of which network you use initially to route calls, you must plan RLC
port and remote site user station assignments. Assign a single user at the Remote
Gateway 9150 site to one RLC port that you configure on the host PBX with
voice capability. This includes the analog port and the stations using ATAs.
Exception:.You must assign stations that use MCAs for data transmission to
ports that are configured on the host PBX with data capability.
If you plan to use the PSTN to route calls, one data port on the host PBX must be
dedicated to the Remote Gateway 9150 site to establish the call connections.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
75
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Use the following forms to plan port and station assignment:
!
“Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Stations” on page 376
!
“Reach Line Card Connection Information—16 ports” planning form in the
Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
!
“Reach Line Card Connection Information—32 ports” planning form in the
Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
Implementing PSTN mode
In a scenario involving the PSTN mode only, the PSTN processes all incoming
and outgoing calls as follows:
IF the call is to or from the
THEN the call is in
host PBX,
host-controlled mode.
other PSTN customers,
locally controlled mode.
To implement PSTN mode, you must complete the following steps:
1
Determine how many simultaneous calls you want to process over the
PSTN. This helps you determine how many trunk interface modules and
DSP application modules to install on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
To do this, complete the “Remote Gateway 9150 System expansion
worksheet” on page 385.
Similarly, you must calculate how many DSP application modules to install
on the RLC (if any), using the “Reach Line Card System expansion
worksheet” in the Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
76
2
Arrange for ISDN BRI lines from the PSTN to the Remote Gateway 9150
site, if they are not already present.
3
Install ISDN BRI trunk interface and DSP application modules on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit, if needed. Up to four ISDN BRI modules and
up to three DSP application modules can be installed.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Similarly, install DSP application modules on the RLC, if needed.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit does not ship with trunk interface
modules or DSP application modules installed. The RLC does not ship with
DSP application modules installed.
4
Obtain the ISDN BRI information for each line from the Remote Gateway
9150 site’s PSTN service provider. This information must be configured on
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
5
Identify the telephone number assigned to the B-channel that is to be the
primary trunk connection to the RLC on the host PBX. This telephone
number must be configured on the RLC, and is used by the RLC to
establish connections with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
6
Similarly, obtain the telephone number assigned to this Remote Gateway
9150 unit’s RLC port. This telephone number must be configured on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit, and is used by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
to establish connections with the RLC.
Implementing Voice over IP mode
In Voice over IP (VoIP) mode, the system processes all incoming and outgoing
calls across the IP network through the host PBX. The system routes calls made
to external parties to the PSTN using host PBX trunks. Calls processed through
the host PBX are referred to as host-controlled calls.
Note: Local PSTN calls at Remote Gateway 9150 sites require access to ISDN
BRI lines and the installation of ISDN BRI application modules in the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. All calls not routed through the host PBX, whether ISDN or
POTS, are referred to as locally controlled calls.
To implement Voice over IP mode in host-controlled mode:
1
Determine how many simultaneous calls you want to process. This helps
you determine how many DSP application modules to install on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. To do this, complete the “Remote Gateway 9150
System expansion worksheet” on page 385.
Similarly, you must calculate how many DSP application modules to install
on the RLC (if any), using the “Reach Line Card System expansion
worksheet” in the Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
77
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
2
Standard 3.1
Install DSP application modules on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, if
needed. Up to three DSP application modules can be installed.
Similarly, install DSP application modules on the RLC, if needed.
3
Obtain an IP address assigned for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. This IP
address must be configured on the RLC, and is used by the RLC to
establish connections with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
4
Similarly, obtain the IP address assigned to the RLC. This IP address must
be configured on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, and is used by the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit to establish connections with the RLC.
5
Run this stage with a small number of users at first. Before applying VoIP
mode to your entire remote network, you must ensure that one of the
following is true:
!
Your IP network can handle the addition of remote network traffic.
!
You can identify the kinds of configuration adjustments you need to
make to the IP network so that it can handle the additional traffic.
When you are satisfied with the IP network performance, continue with
QoS Transitioning Technology implementation
Implementing Remote Gateway 9150 units behind Network Address
Translation (NAT) routers
Some network routers run the NAT protocol to allow multiple devices in an
Ethernet network to share the same broadband Ethernet address. An alternative
to running the NAT protocol is to have the network administrator provide each
device with its own broadband Ethernet address.
Remote Gateway 9150 units support NAT functionality. You can only connect a
single Remote Gateway 9150 unit behind a NAT router. You can connect
multiple Remote Gateway 9150 units behind a Network Address and Port
Translation (NAPT) router. If you are not sure whether yours is a NAT router or
a NAPT router, check with your vendor.
For a Remote Gateway 9150 unit connected behind a NAT or NAPT router you
must:
78
!
configure a permanent IP signaling connection
!
assign a static IP address
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Refer to “RLC connection configuration” on page 198 for the correct
procedures.
Translation tables within NAT routers control the communication path from the
private network to the public network. Most NAT devices contain timers that
monitor the translation table entries. Each time the device uses a translation table
entry, the timer restarts. Individual table entries are deleted if the
communications path is not used and the timer expires.
It is possible, when using a Remote Gateway 9150 unit behind a NAT device,
that prolonged periods of silence cause the NAT translation table entries to clear
and drop the audio path. An example of this would be a remote user listening to
a conference call with the user’s digital telephone set on mute. After five
minutes (the default NAT translation table timer on many NAT routers) the
remote user would not be able to hear the conference. To restore the NAT table
entry and recover the audio path, the remote user could go off mute and speak
into the digital telephone set.
To prevent the NAT translation table from dropping the audio path:
!
configure the translation tables on the NAT router with a large timer value
(for example, two hours)
!
configure a static translation table entry for UDP port 20480
Implementing QoS Transitioning Technology
When the QoS Transitioning Technology is implemented, calls transition:
!
to the PSTN when IP QoS degrades
!
back to the IP network when IP QoS returns to normal
To implement QoS Transitioning Technology:
1
To implement the QoS Transitioning Technology, you must understand
what your IP network is doing, such as
!
when the busy times are on the network
!
how much traffic is processed (during normal and busy traffic periods)
!
how to evaluate and adjust your network’s QoS
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
79
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
For more details, consult with your data network administrator and refer to
the Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines
(555-8421-103).
2
Once you have this information and understand it, determine the
appropriate QoS settings and configure them on each RLC port.
For instructions, refer to the Reach Line Card Installation and
Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210).
80
3
If IP mode is the last stage in your network implementation, run this stage
with a minimal number of users until you are sure that your IP network’s
QoS is acceptable.
4
When you are satisfied with QoS transitioning performance, deploy QoS
Transitioning Technology to the rest of the network.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Planning the configuration
Before you configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, Nortel strongly
recommends that you complete the data entry forms provided in Appendix A,
“Planning forms.”
This section describes the information you can configure on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Data entry form completion sequence
Complete the data entry forms in the following sequence:
1.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Stations form
2.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
form
3.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Network Connections
form
4.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Dialing Plans form
For more details, refer to Appendix A, “Planning forms.”
Station assignments and configuration
You must assign each telephone in your office to one of the 32 ports provided by
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. You can configure stations with the ability to
place locally controlled calls (local), host-controlled calls (remote), or both
(local and remote).
If you want a station to be able to place host-controlled calls, then map that
station’s RLC port to telephone port configuration on the host PBX.
If you want a station to be able to place locally controlled calls, then you must
take into consideration the numbering plan on the host PBX. Locally controlled
calls include station-to-station calls. You must ensure that when users dial
another station in the same office in host-controlled mode, the call routes
correctly.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
81
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Stations used for locally controlled calls can be further configured with features
and their key locations.
ISDN BRI information
To ensure that you get the correct ISDN service for the Remote Gateway 9150
unit, tell your service provider how you want the ISDN line to be provisioned.
Request the following:
!
two B-channels providing voice and data capability
Both B-channels must be Circuit Switched Voice and Data.
!
Calling Line Identification (CLI) or Caller ID
CLI provides the caller’s telephone number when you receive a call. This
information is provided by the network and not the caller, so it can be used
as a security measure to identify calls to be accepted and rejected.
!
64 Kbps clear channel
Note: A 64 Kbps clear channel is also required on the ISDN PRI
connection between the host PBX and the PSTN. A 56 Kbps channel does
not provide enough bandwidth to process one call using G.711
compression.
In return for providing the ordering information, your service provider gives you
directory numbers and, if used in your area, Service Profile Identifiers (SPIDs).
SPIDs are not provided for the AT&T 5ESS Custom service.
A directory number is the address or ISDN telephone number for the ISDN line
assigned by the service provider. Each ISDN line receives at least one telephone
number, called the Primary Directory Number.
If used in your area, your service provider provides you with the SPIDs. These
are associated with the service you have ordered, and you must use these as part
of the configuration for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit before any ISDN
connections can be made (except for AT&T Custom). The SPID is similar to the
ISDN telephone number and its format is unimportant as long as the information
is entered correctly when configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
82
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
IP addresses
If you want to administer the Remote Gateway 9150 unit over the IP network,
the following information is required for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
!
IP address (it must be unique)
!
subnet mask
!
default gateway
If you want to route voice traffic over the IP network, you also need the RLC’s
IP address. The Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses these IP addresses to establish
the connection with each other.
Connection link between the RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
information
If you want to route voice traffic over the PSTN, the telephone numbers for each
end of the network are required. If security is being implemented, the security
authentication information (Caller ID or security identifier) is also needed.
Online/offline schedule
You can configure each port on the RLC with a schedule that identifies when a
remote site is online (connected to the corporate PBX) or offline. When the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit is in offline mode, calls cannot be made or received
through the host PBX over the IP or PSTN.
You can configure only one online/offline schedule for the RLC port. This
schedule affects all stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site. Create offline
entries:
!
for times when the connection to the host PBX is not normally active, such
as during evenings and weekends
!
to prevent the Remote Gateway 9150 unit from staying online permanently,
thereby eliminating unwanted ISDN BRI charges
To help you plan the online/offline schedule configuration on the RLC, use the
“Reach Line Card Online/Offline Table Configuration” form in the Reach Line
Card Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
83
Planning for Remote Gateway 9150 unit installation
Standard 3.1
Trunk configuration information
Trunk configuration on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit consists of defining the
ISDN BRI lines from the central office and assigning one or more B-channels, if
desired, to trunk groups.
Numbering plan
You must assign a trunk access code to each trunk group at the Remote Gateway
9150 unit site. A trunk access code is the number that must be dialed to obtain an
outgoing trunk. In addition, you must define special prefix (SPRE) codes for the
following features if you want to use them:
!
paging
!
to go online or offline (for more details, refer to “Online/offline table” on
page 40)
!
local calling
This allows analog or ATA-equipped station users to change the outgoing
call mode to locally controlled mode. (Host-controlled mode is the default
mode when users go offhook on analog or ATA-equipped stations.)
!
registration and deregistration
The registration SPRE code is used to register the station user with a multiuser or dynamic port.
The deregistration SPRE code disengages the user from the port so that
another user can use it. The user is put into not logged in mode.
All trunk access and SPRE codes are automatically defined in Configuration
Manager with a pound sign (# in North America) so that there are no conflicts
with host PBX dialing plans. The maximum length of each code is three digits in
addition to the pound sign. For a list of the default SPRE and trunk access codes,
refer to the “Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Dialing Plans”
form on page 384.
Note: You can change the defaults if you prefer.
84
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 3
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150
unit
In this chapter
General safety
86
Required installation tools
88
Unpacking and inspecting the equipment
89
Removing and replacing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit cover
90
Installing trunk interface or DSP application modules
93
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
98
Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
105
Powering up the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
111
Installing the Configuration Manager software
113
Using the Configuration Wizard to perform initial configuration
115
Testing the network connections
129
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
85
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
General safety
This section describes general safety guidelines recommended by Nortel, and
tools needed for installation. Follow the safety guidelines and recommendations
in this chapter whenever you perform installation or maintenance tasks on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
CAUTION
Risk of data loss or equipment damage
.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) affects the performance and
decreases the useful life of system components. It can seriously
damage component parts, such as trunk interface and DSP
application modules.
Implement the following precautions, as recommended by
computer and telephone equipment manufacturers:
!
Remove items that generate static charge from the installation
site.
!
Use antistatic spray if the site is carpeted.
!
Ground yourself before handling any equipment. (For example,
wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to any unpainted metal
surface that is connected to an electrical ground.)
Precautionary messages
This guide provides warnings related to hardware installation and handling, such
as the preceding caution. For a description of these warnings, refer to
“Conventions used in this guide” on page xxii.
86
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Safety precautions
To avoid damage or injury, follow these safety precautions at all times.
Plug the Remote Gateway 9150 unit into a properly grounded power source to
reduce the possibility of electric shock and damage to the unit or network.
DANGER
Risk of electric shock
.
Disconnect the power as well as the Telco 1 and Telco 2
cables before you perform any hardware troubleshooting or
add ISDN BRI or DSP application modules to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
If you do not disconnect the Telco 1 and Telco 2 cables from
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you can receive a lethal
shock if an external telco line is accidentally severed.
Ensure that nothing rests on connection cables, and that cables cannot be tripped
over or stepped on.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
87
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Required installation tools
This section describes the tools necessary for Remote Gateway 9150
installation.
Required tools for hardware installation
You need the following tools to install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, or to
install or replace DSP application or trunk interface modules:
!
antistatic ESD wrist strap (recommended)
!
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver
!
pen or pencil for
— noting the installation location (if mounting on a wall)
— noting cable lengths
— labeling cables
!
cable tie wraps
!
cable identification labels
!
tape measure
!
four wood screws if you want to mount the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on
the wall
Required tools for software installation or upgrade
You need the following items for software installation or upgrade:
88
!
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Product CD-ROM
!
PC with a CD-ROM drive or an Internet connection for obtaining software,
firmware, and documentation updates
!
TFTP server application installed on the PC
The TFTP server is required for performing firmware upgrades. If a TFTP
server is currently not installed, you can obtain one from the Internet.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Unpacking and inspecting the equipment
Before you unpack the equipment, ensure that your work area is safe from
electrostatic discharge. For more details, refer to “Implement the following
precautions, as recommended by computer and telephone equipment
manufacturers:” on page 86. Before you install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
ensure that the package contents are all present and are not damaged.
To inspect the package contents:
1
Inspect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s shipping box for damage.
2
Open the box and remove its contents.
3
Verify that, in addition to this guide, the following items are present:
✓
Item
❒
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
❒
Package containing rubber feet and rack-mounting brackets with
screws
❒
Power cord and power supply
Note: In North America, the power cord and power supply are
included inside the Remote Gateway 9150 box. In all other
regions, the power supply is provided inside the box and the
power cord for your region is provided outside the box.
4
❒
RS-232 serial cable
❒
Remote Gateway 9100 Series and RLC Release Notes
(NTP 555-8421-102)
❒
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Product CD-ROM
Visually inspect each item for obvious faults or damage.
If any component is damaged, report the damage immediately to your Nortel
distributor and the carrier who delivered the equipment.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
89
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Removing and replacing the Remote Gateway
9150 unit cover
As you increase or change the voice processing capability of the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit, you need to perform one or more of the following tasks:
!
Install additional trunk interface modules.
!
Install additional DSP application modules.
These tasks require you to remove the Remote Gateway 9150 unit cover.
DANGER
Risk of electric shock
.
DISCONNECT THE POWER AS WELL AS THE TELCO 1
AND TELCO 2 CABLES BEFORE YOU PERFORM ANY
HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTING OR ADD ISDN BRI
OR DSP APPLICATION MODULES TO THE REMOTE
GATEWAY 9150 UNIT.
If you do not disconnect the Telco 1 and Telco 2 cables from
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you can receive a lethal
shock if an external telco line is accidentally severed.
90
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
To remove the Remote Gateway 9150 unit cover:
1
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the following screws from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit cover:
!
two screws from the sides
!
four screws from the top
!
eight screws from the bottom
Refer to the following diagram.
Remote Gateway 9150
(Top view)
POWE
R
ETH
ERNE
T
TX
RX
COL
L
1
L1
L2
MODU
LE
2
L1
L2
3
Rem
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
ote G
STA
TUS
TX
RX
atew
ay 91
50
RX
TX
L2
L1
L2
L1
3
L2
4
V.35
Rem
STA
TUS
ote G
atew
ay 91
50
L1
L2
L1
2
MODU
LE
1
RX
COL
L
TX
ETH
ERNE
T
POWE
R
Remote Gateway 9150
(Bottom view)
G101406
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
91
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
2
Place the screws in a safe place where they cannot be lost.
3
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is placed top side up.
4
Remove the cover as follows:
Standard 3.1
a. Grasp both sides of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
b. Slide the cover toward you.
c. Lift the cover off the unit.
d. Put the cover aside.
5
Turn the Remote Gateway 9150 unit so the rear panel faces you.
Note: This allows you to read the labels on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
circuit board.
6
Perform module installation as required.
Note: For instructions, refer to “To install trunk interface or DSP application
modules:” on page 96.
7
8
92
Replace the cover as follows:
!
Carefully slide the top cover into position over the circuit board so that
the holes along the top edge of the rear panel are aligned.
!
Replace the four screws on the top.
!
Replace the two screws on the sides.
!
Turn the Remote Gateway 9150 unit over and replace the eight screws
on the bottom.
Continue with “Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on page 98.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Installing trunk interface or DSP application
modules
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships from Nortel with:
!
no trunk interface modules installed
!
one DSP built into the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s motherboard
Determining when to install trunk interface or DSP application
modules
Perform the procedures in this section when you:
!
need to expand the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s voice processing
capability and have ordered additional modules (up to four trunk interface
modules or three DSP application modules)
!
need to replace a module because it is faulty
Before you can install a trunk interface or DSP application module, you must
remove the cover from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. For instructions, refer to
“Removing and replacing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit cover” on page 90.
ATTENTION!
DSP application and trunk interface modules are sensitive
pieces of electronic equipment and must be handled as
such. Ensure that you follow the electrostatic discharge
safety precautions described on page 86.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
93
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Determining where to install the modules
Each module position is labeled on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit circuit board
as shown in the following table:
Module type
DSP application module
Trunk interface module
Trunk interface module
(continued)
Valid module positions
!
MOD 1
!
MOD 2
!
MOD 3
Telco 1 connector (phone lines 1 through 16):
!
MOD 4
!
MOD 5
Telco 2 connector (phone lines 17 through 32):
!
MOD 6
!
MOD 7
Note: Each Telco connector provides access to
two ISDN BRI lines (each with two B-channels).
94
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The following diagram shows where you can install the trunk interface and DSP
application modules on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit circuit board:
Trunk interface modules
Telco 2
6
3
Telco 1
7
2
4
5
1
DSP modules
G101408
Nortel recommends that you populate each module position in sequential order.
Install trunk interface modules according to the Telco 1 or Telco 2 connections
used.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit contains a dongle socket located in the
middle of the circuit board. This dongle is not being used.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
95
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Installing trunk interface or DSP application modules
To install trunk interface or DSP application modules:
1
Clear a flat, static-free work area with sufficient space to hold your Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and trunk interface or DSP application modules.
2
Place the trunk interface or DSP application modules in the work area.
Note: Keep the trunk interface or DSP application modules in their
antistatic bags.
3
Remove a trunk interface or DSP application module from its antistatic bag.
4
Compare the connectors on the module with the connectors in the location
where you want to install the module.
The connectors are keyed so that you can install a module in one way only.
Ensure you hold the module so that the orientation of the connector keys
match.
Refer to “Determining where to install the modules” on page 94, and the
diagram on page 97.
Removing trunk interface or DSP application modules
To remove trunk interface or DSP application modules:
Note: Perform this procedure only if you need to replace trunk interface or DSP
application modules.
1
Use one hand to firmly grasp the long sides of the module that you want to
remove.
2
Gently lift one side of the module up until it is free of the connectors on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit circuit board.
3
Lift the module up and away from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit circuit
board, and place it to one side.
Note: If you are replacing this module, put it inside the replacement
module’s antistatic bag for storage or to return it to Nortel for repair.
96
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Installing a module
Connector
on module
Connector
on motherboard
Dongle socket
(not used)
G101404
4
Align the connectors on the module with the connectors on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit circuit board.
5
Use both hands to grasp the module firmly and push down until it snaps
into place.
6
Visually inspect the module connectors to ensure there is no gap between
the module connectors and the Remote Gateway 9150 motherboard
connectors.
7
Ensure that the module is securely installed by placing one finger beneath
the module and tugging upward gently. When correctly installed, this action
does not move the module.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
97
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
You can install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in the following locations:
!
on a desk (refer to page 99)
!
on a wall (refer to page 100)
!
in a rack (refer to page 103)
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit package contains the following hardware:
!
rubber feet for installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a desk
!
brackets with screws for installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack
Note: If you want to mount the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a wall, you must
provide your own mounting hardware.
Choosing a suitable location
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit dimensions are:
!
42.5 cm (17 in.) wide (without rack-mounting brackets)
!
29.4 cm (11.75 in.) deep
!
4.4 cm (1.75 in.) high
For guidelines on where to install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, refer to
“Physical environment” on page 50.
Note: Nortel recommends that you install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in the
same room as your communications equipment. Locate the Remote Gateway
9150 unit no farther than:
98
!
1230.7 m (4000 ft) from the digital telephones
!
307.7 m (1000 ft) from the analog device
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a desk
To install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on a desk:
1
Turn the Remote Gateway 9150 unit bottom side up.
2
Affix the rubber feet to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit as shown in the
following diagram:
Peel off
each foot from
adhesive backing
and attach as indicated
RX
STAT
US
TX
L2
L1
L2
L1
4
V.35
Rem
ote G
atew
ay 91
50
3
L2
L1
L2
L1
2
MODU
LE
1
RX
COL
L
TX
ETHE
RNET
POWE
R
Remote Gateway 9150
(bottom view)
G101395
3
Ensure the rubber feet are securely fastened.
4
Place the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in the desired location.
5
Continue with “Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on page 105.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
99
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall
To install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall:
Do not affix the rubber feet to the bottom of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Otherwise, the unit cannot be mounted flush against the wall.
To mount the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall, you must provide your
own screws. You need suitable size screws that are long enough to ensure the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit is securely mounted.
When mounting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the wall, you must use
standard telephony installation practices. The unit must be mounted so that:
!
the cables are at right angles to the unit
!
the rear (connection) panel faces left or right
Ensure that:
!
the LED indicators on the front panel can be viewed easily
!
the chosen location provides enough space to accommodate the cables
when they are connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Refer to the diagram on page 101.
100
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Mounting the unit on the wall
To route cables
to the right
37.5 cm (15 in)
To route cables
to the left
OR
15 cm (6 in)
Cables must be connected and routed away from the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit at a right angle
G101396
1
Choose the location on the wall where you want to mount the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
101
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
2
Standard 3.1
Use the pre-drilled screw slots on the bottom of the Remote Gateway 9150
unit as a guide to measure and mark the location on the wall for each
mounting screw.
The measurements between the screw slots are as follows:
!
from front to back panels: 15 cm (6 in.)
!
from side to side: 37.5 cm (15 in.)
Note: Two sets of screw slots are provided. Each set allows you to route
the cables to the left or right when the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
correctly mounted. Ensure you use the same screw slot orientation for each
location that you mark on the wall.
3
Mount the screws.
Note: Do not screw the screws all the way in. Screw the heads to about
5 mm (1/8 in.) from the wall.
4
Mount the Remote Gateway 9150 unit on the screws, and then gently pull it
down so the screws slide into the narrow portion of the screw slots.
Do not let go yet!
5
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is securely mounted.
WARNING
Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
.
6
102
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is securely fastened to
the wall. Otherwise, it can fall, be damaged, and cause injury
to yourself or others.
When you are satisfied that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is securely
mounted, continue with “Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on
page 105.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack
The rack slot chosen for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit must:
!
be large enough to provide air circulation to keep the Remote Gateway
9150 unit cool
!
allow you to securely fasten the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the rack
using the rack-mount brackets
To install the Remote Gateway 9150 unit in a rack:
1
Attach the rack-mount brackets as shown in the following illustration.
TELC
O1
ET HE
RN ET
TE LC
O2
POW
ER
AD M
IN
G101537
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
103
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
2
Standard 3.1
Slide the Remote Gateway 9150 unit into the rack slot.
POWE
R
ETHE
RNET
TX
RX
COL
L
1
L1
L2
MODU
LE
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
STAT
US
G101398
104
3
Secure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the rack with nuts and bolts.
4
Continue with “Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on page 105
when you are satisfied that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is securely
installed.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
When you establish the cabling connections, you are connecting the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to the:
!
power source
!
telephones and ISDN BRI trunks
Note: If you are connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a Meridian 1
PBX in-building cross-connect system, you need a QCBIX1A BIX block.
!
Ethernet network
!
administration PC
Cables you must provide
Ensure that you have obtained the telephone and Ethernet cables for your
network. These cables are not supplied in the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
package.
The cables must meet the following requirements:
!
telephone cable: One end of the cable must provide a male 50-pin
connector. (This end connects to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.)
Ensure the other end of the cable matches the connectors needed to connect
to the telephones or trunks. (For example, if you are using a BIX block to
establish the telephone connections, the wires inside must be exposed.)
Notes:
— Two telephone cables are required, depending on how many telephones
and trunks are installed. (Each telephone cable provides support for up
to 16 digital telephones and two ISDN BRI lines providing two
B-channels each. The Telco 1 cable also provides support for one analog
station such as a fax machine.)
Nortel recommends that you use straight-through Amphenol cables
instead of side-entry Amphenol cables. (Refer to “Attaching the cables
to Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on page 108.)
— Digital telephones must be located no farther than 1230.7 meters (4000
feet) from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
105
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
— The analog device must be located no farther than 307.7 meters
(1000 feet) from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
!
Ethernet cable
If you are connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a hub, you need a
standard CAT5 un-shielded twisted-pair (UTP) straight-through Ethernet
cable. The cable must be no longer than 100 meters (325 feet) in length.
Connector and pin-out reference
The following table identifies where to find the pin-out table for each connector:
Connector
Connection type
For the pin-out table, refer to
TELCO 1
25 TIP and RING pairs
page 404.
TELCO 2
25 TIP and RING pairs
page 406.
ETHERNET
RJ-45
page 408.
ADMIN
DB-9
page 409.
Power
DIN
page 410.
More information
The following documents describe how to establish telephone and trunk
connections using the Meridian 1 PBX BIX in-building cross-connect system:
106
!
Meridian 1 PBX Installation planning (NTP 553-3001-120)
!
Telephone and attendant console installation (NTP 553-3001-215)
!
BIX* In-Building Cross-Connect System Material Installation and
Servicing (Wall-Mounted System) (NTP 631-4511-200)
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Remote Gateway 9150 unit connection panel
The following diagram shows the connectors on the back panel of the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit:
TELC
O1
ETH
ERN
ET
TEL
CO
2
P OW
ER
ADM
Telco 1
Ethernet
Telco 2
Power
IN
Admin
G101535
Note: If you want to connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), ensure the UPS has a minimum of 100
Watts available.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
107
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Attaching the cables to Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Nortel recommends that you use straight-through Amphenol cables instead of
side-entry Amphenol cables, as shown in the following diagram:
Cables must be connected and routed
away from the 9150 unit at a right angle
Telco 1
Ethernet
Telco 2
Power
Admin
G101399
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 Telco 1 and 2 connections provide the
opposite gender of the connections on Meridian 1 PBX IPE or Meridian 1 PBX
11 cabinet line card slots. Therefore, you must use different cables when
connecting to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit than the cables you use to connect
to Meridian 1 PBX line cards.
108
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the network
WARNING
Risk of electric shock or damage to equipment
.W
To reduce the risk of electric shock to yourself or damage to
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, ensure that the power source
to the unit is turned off until the Telco 1 and Telco 2
connections have been completed.
To connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the network:
1
Connect the male 50-pin connector of the telephone cable to the TELCO 1
connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Secure the cable connection by snapping the wire tabs into place or by
inserting screws.
2
Establish the connections to the telephones and trunks according to the
pin-out table in “TELCO 1 connector pin-out table” on page 404 (in
Appendix C).
3
Connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the Ethernet network if you want
to route calls over the IP network, or administer the Remote Gateway 9150
unit from another location, by doing the following:
a. Connect one end of the RJ-45 Ethernet cable to the ETHERNET
connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
b. Connect the other end to an Ethernet hub.
4
Connect the male 50-pin connector of the other telephone cable to the
TELCO 2 connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: Secure the cable connection by snapping the wire tabs into place or
by inserting screws.
5
Establish the connections to the telephones and trunks according to the
pin-out table in “TELCO 2 connector pin-out table” on page 406 (in
Appendix C).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
109
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
6
Standard 3.1
Connect the ADMIN connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the
administration PC as follows:
a. Connect the male 9-pin connector of the supplied RS-232 serial cable
to the ADMIN connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: You may need to provide an RS-232 adapter if the available
RS-232 port on your PC does not match the connector on the serial
cable.
b. Connect the other end to an available COM port on the PC.
7
Connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the power source as follows:
a. Connect the four-pin plug on the power transformer to the POWER
connector on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: Ensure the arrow on the four-pin plug faces up.
b. Connect the AC cord to the AC power receptacle on the power
transformer.
c. Plug the AC cord into a 110 V or 220 V uninterruptible power source
(UPS) or wall outlet.
8
110
Proceed with “Powering up the Remote Gateway 9150 unit” on page 111.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Powering up the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
As soon as you connect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to the power source, the
unit begins to power up.
Note: If you are connecting a Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a UPS
(uninterruptible power supply), ensure that the UPS has a minimum of 100
Watts available.
During power up, the following events occur:
!
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit performs a self-test that verifies all critical
functionality.
!
An LED indicator test sequence is performed.
Power-up self-test
During power-up, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit performs a self-test that
verifies all critical functionality, including:
!
RAM memory test
!
EPROM checksum validation
!
Flash checksum validation
!
DSP health
!
interface loopbacks
The power-up cycle also automatically detects if one or more trunk interface or
DSP application modules have been installed. You can configure trunk interface
and DSP application modules using Configuration Manager.
The power-up cycle takes about 60 seconds to complete.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
111
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
LED indicator test sequence
The following diagram shows the LED indicators on the front panel:
POW
ER
ETH
ERN
ET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MOD
2
ULE
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
Power Ethernet
Modules
V.35
Rem
STA
ote G
TUS
atew
ay 91
50
Status
Note: The V.35 LED indicators are present but are not functional.
G101402
During the power-up cycle, the LED indicators behave as follows:
1.
All LED indicators light for about 15 seconds.
2.
The Module LED indicators light individually in sequence (1 through 8).
3.
All LED indicators light.
4.
All LED indicators except the Status LED go out. The Status LED remains
lit.
Note: Steps 2 through 4 take about 4 to 5 seconds.
After this point, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is functional.
Notes:
112
!
The ETHERNET TX and RX and module (ISDN BRI) LED indicators
flash only when transmit and receive activity is present on those interfaces.
!
The ETHERNET COLL LED indicator flashes when a data collision
occurs on the line.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Installing the Configuration Manager software
Use the Configuration Manager software to configure and administer the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. This software is located on the CD-ROM provided
in the package. You must install this software on the administration PC to
configure and administer the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the Remote
Gateway 9100 Series system.
Note: Leave DLL files installed by the Configuration Manager InstallShield in
the Windows system directory. Do not move these files to any other directory.
To install the software:
1
Insert the CD-ROM in the applicable drive on your PC.
Result: If autorun is enabled on your PC, a Welcome screen displays
listing available options.
2
If autorun has started, select the Install option; otherwise, navigate to the
software directory, and then locate and double-click on the setup.exe icon.
Result: The InstallShield Wizard prepares for installation, and then the
Welcome screen displays, similar to the following:
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
113
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
3
Standard 3.1
Click on the Next button, and then follow the screen prompts.
Result: Once the software has been installed successfully, the InstallShield
Wizard Completed screen displays, similar to the following:
4
Click on the Finish button.
Result: The InstallShield closes.
114
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Using the Configuration Wizard to perform
initial configuration
The Configuration Wizard option in Configuration Manager allows you to
configure the minimum information needed for establishing communications
between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the RLC at the host site. The
Configuration Wizard does not provide all the configuration settings that are
available in Configuration Manager. By using the Configuration Wizard, the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit can be up and running within 10 minutes.
You can use the Configuration Wizard in offline mode or while connected and
logged on to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit (online mode).
What you can configure with the Configuration Wizard
The Configuration Wizard allows you to configure the following:
!
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway
This information must be valid for your IP network.
Note: If you are not planning to use the IP network to route calls, you must
enter this information for administrative purposes. If you do not have an IP
network in place, use the sample information provided on page 119.
!
for Voice over IP capability: the IP address for the RLC at the host site
!
for PSTN capability:
— the telephone number of the RLC at the host site
— information provided by your ISDN service provider for each ISDN
BRI trunk interface module (telephone numbers, SPIDs, and switch
type)
Ensure you have this information ready before you begin.
Note: If, after completing configuration with the Configuration Wizard, you
want to modify any settings, you must use Configuration Manager.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
115
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Starting Configuration Manager
To start Configuration Manager:
1
Click on Start → Programs → Remote Gateway 9100 Series →
Configuration Manager.
Result: Configuration Manager opens and displays the Local User
Authentication dialog box, similar to the following, prompting you for the
login name and password:
2
Enter admin into the Login Name field.
3
Enter root into the Password field.
4
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Configuration Manager dialog box displays informing you of a
successful log on.
5
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Configuration Manager dialog box closes.
116
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
6
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Do one of the following:
IF you want to
perform an
offline configuration,
THEN
a Choose View → Device Type →
9150.
b Continue with “Performing
configuration with the Configuration
Wizard” on page 119.
online configuration,
continue with “Establishing a serial
connection” below.
Establishing a serial connection
To establish a serial connection:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Logon Unit → Serial.
Result: The Serial Port Configuration dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Enter the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s associated COM port, and then
click on the OK button.
Result: The User Authentication for Serial Mode dialog box displays,
similar to the following:
3
Enter guest in the Login Name field.
4
Enter the default password, guest123, in the Password field.
Note: Nortel recommends that you do not change the password until your
system is up and running.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
117
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
5
Standard 3.1
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager initiates a connection attempt and displays
the following message:
Trying Connection
IF the logon attempt
THEN
fails,
the following message displays:
10060 SERIAL CONNECTION FAILED
Check the serial connection and ensure it is
good. Then, go back to step 1.
is successful,
the User Logged In dialog box displays.
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Startup Information dialog box
displays, similar to the following:
118
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
IF the logon attempt
THEN
successful,
(continued)
The following messages, similar to the
following, display above the progress bar at
the bottom of the dialog box:
!
Reading Hardware Information
!
Reading DSP Load Data
!
Reading Configuration Data
These messages indicate that Configuration
Manager is obtaining the unit’s configuration
information from Flash memory.
Click on the Close button.
Performing configuration with the Configuration Wizard
To perform configuration with the Configuration Wizard:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Configuration Wizard.
Result: The Configuration Wizard screen displays, similar to the following:
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
119
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
2
Standard 3.1
After reviewing the message, click on the Next button.
Result: The Configuration Wizard screen displays, similar to the following:
Ensure that
the Device
field shows
9150.
3
Verify that the Currently Logged in Device drop down box shows 9150. If it
does not show 9150, select 9150 from the drop down list.
4
Click on the Next button.
Result: The Local Unit Configuration dialog box displays. A completed
example is shown on page 122.
5
Complete the fields on this dialog box as described in the following table:
Field
Description
Set the unique Unit ID of the Enter the number from 1–255 that uniquely
unit
identifies the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
you are configuring for a particular RLC.
Note: Each unit connected to a RLC must
be given a unique unit ID. This implies that
Remote Gateway 9150 units that connect
to different RLCs in the network can have
the same unit ID.
120
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Enter a node name that
identifies the unit
Enter a name that uniquely identifies the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit you are
configuring.
Enter the local IP Address
of the unit
Enter the IP address assigned to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: If you do not have a valid IP address,
enter the sample IP address: 10.1.1.2.
Enter the Local IP Mask
of the unit
Enter the subnet mask.
Enter the Local IP Gateway
of the unit
Enter the IP address of the gateway
between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and the network.
Note: If you do not have a valid subnet
mask, enter the sample subnet mask:
255.255.0.0.
Note: If there is no router between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the
network, then the administration PC acts as
the gateway. Enter 10.1.1.10.:
!
as the IP address on the administration
PC
!
as the gateway on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
121
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
The following is a completed example:
The IP information
allows you to
administer the
Remote Gateway
9150 unit from any
location on the
network.
6
Click on the Next button.
Result: The Set the Configuration for the Remote Unit dialog box displays.
A completed example is shown on page 124.
7
Complete the fields on this dialog box as described in the following table:
Field
Description
Set the Unit ID of the RLC to Enter the RLC’s unit ID.
connect to
Wish to Enable IP Voice
Connection to Remote
!
Click on the Yes option button to enable
the Voice over IP connection to the
RLC.
Then enter the RLC's 32-bit, decimal
dot notation address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
This is not the URL's site name that
begins www.
!
122
Click on the No option button to disable
the Voice over IP connection to the
RLC. Clicking on the No option button
dims the IP Address fields.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Wish to Enable PSTN
Connection to Remote
Description
!
Click on the Yes option button to enable
the PSTN connection to the RLC. Then
enter the telephone number that must be
dialed to connect to the RLC.
The telephone number can include the
following digits or characters: 0
through 9, #, *, comma (,), period (.),
and dash (-).
Wish to configure Multiple
9150 Ports
!
Caller ID separator: “.” (period)
!
Caller ID separator and 1/2 second
delay: “,” (comma)
!
null separator: “-” (dash)
!
Click on the No option button to disable
the PSTN connection to the RLC.
Clicking on the No option button dims
the PSTN Number fields.
!
Click on the Yes option button if you
want to assign Remote Gateway 9150
ports to digital telephones now. Then,
do the following:
!
Enter the first RLC port number to
assign.
Note: Nortel recommends that ports
be configured so that the RLC port
number matches the Remote Gateway
9150 unit’s port number.
!
!
Enter the number of telephones
connected to the Remote Gateway
9150 unit.
Click on the No option button if you
want to complete port assignment at a
later time with Configuration Manager.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
123
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
The following is a completed example:
Click on the Yes
option button to
allow voice calls
over IP, then enter
the RLC’s IP
address.
Click on the Yes
option button to
allow voice calls
over the PSTN,
then enter the
RLC’s phone
number.
Click on the Yes
option button to automatically assign Remote Gateway 9150 unit ports to RLC
ports, then enter the information as described previously.
8
Click on the Next button.
Result: The Enter the BRI module data dialog box displays. A completed
example is shown on page 125.
9
Complete the fields on this dialog box as described in the following table:
Field
Description
Which module would you Click on the option button immediately to the
wish to configure
left of the number of the trunk interface
module that you are configuring.
The number you select must match the
position where the module has been installed
in the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Module Status
124
This field identifies whether a module has
been physically installed on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Select the Switch Type
Select the type of switch used by your ISDN
service provider.
Select the ISDN Line Type Select the ISDN variant used in your country.
Enter the PSTN Number
(B channel 1
and B channel 2)
Enter the telephone number provided by your
ISDN service provider for this B-channel.
Enter the SPID Number
(B channel 1
and B channel 2)
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID)
provided by your ISDN service provider for
this B-channel.
B Channel Usage
(B channel 1
and B channel 2)
Select one of the following connection types:
!
Local: This trunk is used for local PSTN
calls only.
!
Remote: This trunk is used only for calls to
and from the host PBX.
!
Local & Remote: This trunk can route both
types of calls.
The following is a completed example.
Select the module that
you want to configure.
Specify the switch and
ISDN line type. (Get
this information from
your service provider.)
Enter the DN and SPID
for each B-channel.
Specify whether each
B-channel is to be used
to process locally
controlled calls, host-controlled calls, or both.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
125
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
10
Repeat step 9 for each ISDN BRI module you want to configure.
11
Click on the Next button.
Result: The following screen displays:
126
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
12
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Do one of the following:
IF you are performing an THEN
offline configuration,
1 Click on the Save to File button.
Result: Configuration Manager
prompts you to specify the directory
path and file name for the
configuration file.
2 Specify the directory path and file
name for this configuration.
Note: The file name automatically
defaults with the name you entered as
the node name.
3 Ensure the Files of type field shows
Text File(*.TXT).
4 Click on the Save button to complete
the Save to File.
Result: The file is saved, then you are
asked if you want to configure another
board. If you do, click on the Yes
button, and continue with step 3 on
page 120.
5 You can open the information in this
file in Configuration Manager, then
send and save the file in the RLC’s
Flash memory at another time. For
instructions, refer to “Working with
configuration files” on page 153.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
127
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
IF you are performing an THEN
online configuration,
1 Click on the Save to Flash button.
Result: Configuration Manager writes
the information entered to the Flash
memory of the Remote Gateway 9150
unit you are configuring.
If successful, Configuration Manager
displays the following message:
Data Sent Successfully
Note: Nortel recommends that you
also save the configuration to a file.
2 Restart the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
128
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Testing the network connections
After you have installed the hardware and performed initial configuration, use
the following methods to test the network connectivity:
!
Test the Ethernet connection between the administration PC and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. To perform this test, the following must be
true:
— You must be physically connected to the network.
— You must be logged on to Configuration Manager.
Refer to “Using Configuration Manager PING” on page 362 for complete
details on performing a Configuration Manager PING.
!
Check your telephone network connections.
!
Perform a PSTN connectivity test. Refer to the Reach Line Card
Installation and Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210) for complete
details.
!
Perform a syslog test.
Refer to “Syslog testing” on page 365 for complete details on performing a
syslog test.
Verifying telephone network connectivity
To verify the telephone network connectivity:
1
Look at the digital telephone display.
Does it display the correct time and date? If yes, then the connection paths
between the digital telephone, Remote Gateway 9150 unit, and the RLC
are working.
2
Lift the telephone handset, or press the host call appearance key to go off
hook.
Did you receive a dial tone? If yes, then the connection path between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the RLC is working.
3
Initiate an outgoing call through the host PBX.
Did the call proceed as expected? If yes, then the connection path between
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the RLC is working.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
129
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
4
Standard 3.1
Press the local call appearance key to go off hook.
Did you receive a dial tone? If yes, then the connection path between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the digital telephone is working.
5
Initiate an outgoing call through the PSTN.
Did the call proceed as expected? If yes, then the ISDN BRI lines to the
PSTN are working.
What to do if the telephone connection tests do not work
1
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit completed its power-up cycle
successfully. If it did, the Status LED indicator remains lit.
2
Verify the connections between the telephone network and the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
3
Ensure that the placement of ISDN BRI modules within the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit correspond with the Telco 1 and Telco 2 cable
connections.
Note: Refer to the Telco 1 and Telco 2 cable pin-out tables in Appendix C,
“Pin-out tables for connections.”
4
Use Configuration Manager to verify that the following configuration is
correct on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, as appropriate:
!
IP addresses (Remote Gateway 9150 unit, subnet mask, and default
gateway, as well as the RLC’s IP address, if the IP network is being
used to route calls)
!
the telephone number used to establish connections to the RLC, if the
PSTN is being used to route calls
!
the security IDs of both the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the RLC, if a
security ID is required to authenticate connection attempts
!
DNs and SPIDs assigned to the ISDN BRI modules installed in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
!
station configuration, to ensure that the telephone you are using has the
calling capabilities needed to complete the tests (that is, verify that the
station is correctly configured as local only, remote only, or both local
and remote)
Note: For instructions on using Configuration Manager, refer to Chapter 5,
“Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit”.
130
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
5
6
7
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Work with the administrator at the host PBX site to ensure that
!
the RLC is enabled and working in its PBX slot (restart the RLC, if
necessary)
!
the configuration of the IP address, telephone number, and security ID
on the RLC port are correct (if these items are used)
Verify that both the telecom and data networks are routing voice calls as
expected (that is, calls are not being blocked in any way).
Use Configuration Manager to examine the display logs for errors.
Note: Refer to the Configuration Manager Help application for a
complete listing of all display logs and the condition indicated by
each.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
131
Installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
132
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 4
Using Configuration Manager
In this chapter
What is Configuration Manager?
134
Starting and viewing Configuration Manager
135
Configuration Manager description
137
Using online Help
144
Configuration files description
145
Working with configuration files
153
Selecting the device type for offline configuration
156
Logging on to a unit
157
Logging off of the unit
166
Using the Remote Connection command
167
Performing a system restart or shutdown
169
Closing Configuration Manager
171
Uninstalling the Configuration Manager software
172
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
133
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
What is Configuration Manager?
Configuration Manager is a Windows-based software application that you install
on your PC. Configuration Manager allows you to configure, administer, and
upgrade the RLC. These tasks can be performed over either of the following
connection types:
!
10BaseT Ethernet
!
RS-232 serial
Note: It is not possible to use Configuration Manager to configure a
Remote Gateway 9150 unit over a modem connection.
The CD shipped in the RLC package includes the Configuration Manager
software. You can obtain the CD from your Nortel distributor or click on the
Software Downloads link at the following website:
www.nortel.com
For the required characteristics of the Meridian administration PC, refer to
“Windows PC requirements” on page 62.
To install the Configuration Manager software on your administration PC, refer
to “Installing the Configuration Manager software” on page 113.
ATTENTION!
134
Complete all Remote Gateway 9150 unit configuration
using Configuration Manager. Only use the man-machine
interface (MMI) with the assistance of technical support
personnel for troubleshooting and diagnostic testing.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Starting and viewing Configuration Manager
The Configuration Manager software application is best viewed when your
monitor settings are configured as 1024 by 768 pixels using Small Fonts at 96
dpi. If you use larger fonts, some fields and buttons might be hidden. You must
use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view the hidden fields or buttons.
For instructions on changing your display settings, refer to the Windows online
help on your PC.
To start and log on to a Configuration Manager session:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Start → Programs → Remote Gateway 9100
Series → Configuration Manager.
Result: The Configuration Manager opens prompts you for the logon name
and password.
2
Enter admin in the Login Name field.
3
Enter root in the Password field.
Note: This is the default password. You can change the password after
installation, though Nortel recommends that you do not change the
password until your Remote Gateway 9100 Series system is up and
running.
4
Click on the OK button.
Result: The system informs you of a successful logon. In the event of an
unsuccessful logon, the system informs you of the need to re-enter the
information.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
135
Using Configuration Manager
5
Standard 3.1
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Local User Authentication dialog box closes.
6
7
Proceed as follows:
To perform an
refer to
online configuration,
“Logging on to a unit” on page 157.
offline configuration,
“Selecting the device type for offline
configuration” on page 156.
To view the system tree, click on the plus sign (+) beside Configuration
Manager in the left pane.
Result: Based on the system type you are working with, the system tree
expands, showing you the types of configuration you can work with. An
example is shown on page 136.
Note: When you first logon to Configuration Manager, the default system
tree shows RLC configuration property sheets.
136
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager description
This section describes each part of the Configuration Manager screens.
Parts of the Configuration Manager screen
The Configuration Manager is divided into three parts— a menu and two panes.
!
The menu across the top of the screen lists various administrative tasks you
can perform. These tasks are common to all Remote Gateway 9100 Series
units.
!
The pane on the left lists the property sheets you can work with. In this
guide, the left pane is called the system tree.
!
The pane on the right displays the screen associated with an item you
selected from the system tree. In this guide, the right pane is called the
property sheet.
Menu Bar
The Menu Bar across the top of the screen provides access to system display and
reporting options.
When you click on an option on the Menu Bar, a drop-down list displays. When
you select an option from the drop-down list, the screen associated with that
option displays.
Note: Dimmed options cannot be used for the unit you are working with, or if
you are working offline (that is, when you are not logged on to any unit).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
137
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
System tree
The left pane of the Configuration Manager lists property sheets you can work
with. To view a list of all the property sheets associated with a system, click on
the plus sign (+) to expand the list. (To hide the list, click on the minus sign [-].)
With the System Tree expanded, click on a configuration to display the
associated property sheet in the right pane, similar to the following:
System tree
Property
sheet
Command
buttons
To hide the system tree, choose View → Tree Bar from the Menu Bar. The
screen redraws itself showing only the right pane and displaying the selected
property sheet. To display the system tree again, choose View → Tree Bar.
138
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Property sheets
When you are logged on to a particular Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit (that
is, a Remote Gateway 9150 unit or RLC), Configuration Manager displays a
system tree specific to the logged-on unit.
When you click an item in the system tree, the associated property sheet displays
in the right pane. For instructions on selecting a device type when not logged on,
refer to “Selecting the device type for offline configuration” on page 156.
Drop down boxes
Boxes that provide a limited list of values are called drop down boxes. To view
the values available for a drop down box, click on the down arrow for that box.
To select an item from the list, move the cursor until the desired item is
highlighted, and then click on the item. The item you select displays in the drop
down box.
In some cases, selecting a particular list item causes the property sheet contents
to change as follows:
!
Dimmed (disabled) fields cannot be configured in the context of the list
item you selected.
!
Other fields are re-enabled (no longer dimmed).
!
One or more values on the property sheet are replaced with values that are
specific to the item you selected.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
139
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Check boxes
Fields that contain a blank box beside them are called check boxes. These check
boxes are used to enable or disable the feature associated with that field. To
enable the feature, click on the check box. A check mark displays. When you
click on the check box again, the check box clears (thereby disabling the
feature).
Option buttons
Some fields have multiple options. There is a circle beside each option that is
called an option button. For these fields, you can only select one option.
To enable an option, click on its associated option button. If you change a
previously selected option, the previously selected option button clears.
In some cases, selecting a particular option button causes the property sheet
contents to change as follows:
140
!
When a field is dimmed (disabled), it cannot be configured in the context of
the option you selected.
!
Other fields are re-enabled (no longer dimmed).
!
One or more values on the property sheet are replaced with values that are
specific to the option you selected.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Scroll boxes
Boxes that contain data with up and down arrows beside them are called scroll
boxes. When you click on the data, and then the up arrow, the selected data
increases in value. When you click on the down arrow, the selected data
decreases in value.
You can also change the data by manually entering it. To do so, highlight the
data you want to change, and then type over it.
The following screen is an example of a scroll box:
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
141
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Scroll bars
If your monitor’s display settings are configured so that not all the information
can be displayed at once, horizontal and vertical scroll bars might display in
Configuration Manager. Some fields and buttons might be hidden. An example
is shown on the next page.
The Configuration Manager software application is best viewed when your
monitor settings are configured as 1024 by 768 pixels using Small Fonts at
96 dpi. This ensures that all fields and buttons are visible.
For instructions on changing your display settings, refer to the Windows online
Help on your PC.
You can prevent these scroll
bars from displaying by
changing the screen area
pixel and font sizes in the
Windows Control Panel
display settings on your PC.
142
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Command buttons
The following buttons display on every property sheet listed in the first level of
the 9150 Configuration Manager system tree (left pane):
!
OK
Click on this button to accept any changes you have made to the displayed
property sheet. This command stores these values in a temporary file on
your PC until you are ready to update the unit’s Flash memory. For more
details, refer to “OK” on page 148.
!
Default
Click on this button to insert default values into every field in the displayed
property sheet.
!
Send
Click on this button to update the buffer of the unit you are logged on to
with the values currently on the displayed property sheet. For more details,
refer to “Send” on page 149.
!
Retrieve
Click on this button to display the saved configuration value for every field
on the displayed property sheet from the unit’s local buffer. The unit’s local
buffer contains the last sent data. For more details, refer to “Retrieve” on
page 150.
!
Help
Click on this button to display online Help for the property sheet you are
working with. For other methods of displaying Help, refer to “Using online
Help” on page 144.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
143
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Using online Help
While using Configuration Manager, you might have questions about what
certain boxes and buttons do, as well as how to complete certain tasks. Online
Help provides brief answers to such questions.
To access Help:
1
Use one of the following methods:
!
2
144
Method 1: Click on the Help button to get information concerning the
active property sheet.
!
Method 2: From the Menu Bar, choose Help → Help Topics.
!
Method 3: Click on the ? in the toolbar.
!
Method 4: Press F1 on the keyboard.
If you selected methods 2, 3, or 4, go to one of the following tabs, based on
how you want to search for a topic:
!
To refer to a list of Help topics, click on the Contents tab.
!
To look up a subject alphabetically, click on the Index tab.
!
To do a full-text search to find topics that contain the words you enter,
click on the Find tab.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Configuration files description
This section describes configuration files and the ways that you can work with
them.
Configuration Manager: File operations diagram
The following diagram shows how configuration information is stored. A
detailed description of each file type and operation follows.
Remote Gateway
9100 Series folder
Backup and restore operations
Download (.TXT)
configuration file 1
configuration file 2
RLC
or unit at
remote site
Upload (.TXT)
configuration file 3
configuration file 4
File Open (.TXT)
Administration PC
Configuration Wizard or
Configuration Manager
File Save As or
Save to File (.TXT)
Telnet or serial
connection
(Node logon
session)
OK
Send, followed by Save to Flash
Event .dat
file on PC
Retrieve
Configuration operations
G101411
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
145
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Types of files
You can work with three types of files in Configuration Manager. Each file is
identified by one of the file name extensions described in the following table:
File name
File type
When it is created and used
event.dat
Log file
The log (event.dat) file records all activities (and
messages associated with those activities) that
you perform while running Configuration
Manager, such as:
!
logging on to Configuration Manager
!
logging on to a unit (by serial or Telnet
connection)
!
logging off of the unit
!
performing configuration changes
!
performing firmware upgrades
This file can be very useful when troubleshooting
system problems. Technical support personnel
may ask for this file.
Note: Information is appended to this file each
time you start a new Configuration Manager
session.
*.txt
Text
The text (.txt) file is created when you do one of
the following:
!
!
!
146
Click on the Save to File button while running
the Configuration Wizard.
Choose File → Save As from the Menu Bar
while working in Configuration Manager.
Choose Upload/Download → Download
Configuration from the Menu Bar to save a
unit’s configuration in a text file on the
administration PC.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
File name
File type
When it is created and used
*.txt
(continued)
Text
To view or make changes to the text file (while in
online or offline mode), do one of the following
to open the file:
!
!
!
Click on the Open button while running the
Configuration Wizard.
Choose File → Open from the Menu Bar
while running Configuration Manager.
Choose Upload/Download → Upload
Configuration from the Menu Bar to load the
configuration file to the unit’s buffer.
For more details about these tasks, refer to
!
“Working with configuration files” on page
153
!
“Creating a backup configuration file” on page
282
!
“Restoring the configuration” on page 285
Note: You can view or edit the contents of the
text file by opening it in a word processing
application, such as WordPad.
*.upg
Upgrade
Use the upgrade (.upg) file when performing
firmware upgrades. For more details, refer to
“Performing a firmware upgrade” on page 338.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
147
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Configuration Manager: File operations description
The following table describes each operation shown in the “Configuration
Manager: File operations diagram” on page 145.
Operation
Description
OK
When you click on the OK button, the following occurs:
!
Configuration Manager checks any changes you made
for errors that, if found, produce an error dialog box.
If Configuration Manager displays an error dialog box,
make the necessary changes, and then click on the OK
button again.
!
The changes you make are stored in the event.dat file on
your PC. For more information about the event.dat file,
refer to “Types of files” on page 146.
Note: You must click on the OK button after making
changes to a property sheet. However, your changes are not
yet saved
After clicking on the OK button, you can send the changes
to the logged on unit’s buffer using a Send or Send All
command. You can now update the Flash memory of the
logged on unit by performing an Upload/Download → Save
to Flash operation from the Menu Bar. For more details,
refer to “Send” on page 149.
Note: If you do not click on the OK button on a property
sheet before displaying another property sheet, you lose all
of the changes made on the first property sheet. To regain
lost changes, you must reenter them.
File → Open
When you choose File → Open from the Menu Bar, you can
open a previously saved configuration file. This is useful for
preparing and storing configuration files in a central location
before they are deployed to the network.
Note: To open a file, the file type must be text (.txt).
148
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Operation
Description
File → Save As
When you choose File → Save As from the Menu Bar,
Configuration Manager saves the unit’s configuration to a
file on your PC. You must specify the file name and
directory location.
After saving the file, you can open and modify it at a later
time.
Notes:
Send
!
Configuration Manager saves the file as a text (.txt) file.
!
If you close Configuration Manager without choosing
File → Save As, you lose all of the changes you made.
When you click on the Send button, Configuration Manager
sends any changes made on the displayed property sheet to
the buffer of the logged-on unit. If the send is successful, the
following message displays:
Data Sent Successfully
(Nortel recommends that you click on the OK button before
clicking on the Send button.)
Note: You must choose Upload/Download → Save to Flash
from the Menu Bar to save the changes to the unit’s Flash
memory. For more details, refer to “Save to Flash” on page
150.
Send All
When you choose Upload/Download → Send All on any
property sheet, changes for all property sheets pertaining to
the logged-on unit are sent to the buffer on the unit you are
connected to. If the send is successful, the following
message displays:
Data Sent Successfully
Note: You must choose Upload/Download → Save to Flash
from the Menu Bar to save the changes to the unit’s Flash
memory. For more details, refer to “Save to Flash” on page
150.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
149
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Operation
Description
Retrieve
When you click on the Retrieve button on a property sheet,
the configuration stored in the buffer of the unit that you are
connected to (the latest configuration information) displays
in Configuration Manager.
If the retrieval is successful, the following message displays:
Data Received Successfully
Save to Flash
When you choose Upload/Download → Save to Flash from
the Menu Bar, the information stored in the logged-on unit’s
buffer is saved to Flash memory. This prevents the
configuration from being lost if the unit loses power.
While in progress, the following message displays in the
status bar at the bottom of the screen:
Save to Flash
When the Save to Flash is completed, the Data Stored to
Flash dialog box displays.
Some changes require a restart of the unit after saving the
changes. If a restart is necessary, Configuration Manager
prompts you to do so.
Notes:
!
You must click on the Send button or choose Upload/
Download → Send All from the Menu Bar before you
choose Upload/Download → Save to Flash. Perform a
Save to Flash as often as you think it is necessary, to keep
your configuration information safe.
Note: Do not ignore error messages in the Save to Flash
process. If Save to Flash fails, retry uploading and saving to
Flash. If the problem persists, check the file being uploaded
and report the problem to Nortel.
150
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Operation
Description
Upload
Configuration
When you choose Upload/Download → Upload
Configuration from the Configuration Manager menu, the
configuration file you specify is uploaded and written to the
buffer on the active unit.
Use this option if you need to restore or replace an entire
configuration.
You must perform a Save to Flash from the Upload/
Download Menu to save the changes in the unit’s Flash
memory. If you do not perform a Save to Flash and a power
loss occurs on the unit, the changes are lost.
While in progress, Save to Flash in Progress
displays in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.
When the Save to Flash is completed, the Data Stored to
Flash dialog box displays.
Notes:
!
To upload a configuration file, the file type must be text
(.txt).
!
To perform a configuration upload over the IP network, a
TFTP server application must be running on your PC.
Uploads over the serial port are not supported.
!
The upload operation does not affect the event.dat file on
the PC.
!
The new configuration does not take effect until you
restart the unit. For instructions on how to restart the
unit, refer to “Performing a system restart or shutdown”
on page 169.
!
If the upload fails or aborts, confirm that you are
uploading the correct file. If the problem persists, contact
Nortel technical support for assistance.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
151
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Operation
Description
Download
Configuration
When you choose Upload/Download → Download
Configuration from the Menu Bar, Configuration Manager
saves the configuration stored on the logged-on unit to a file
on the PC.
Use this option if you want to create a backup of the unit’s
configuration.
Notes:
152
!
The downloaded file is saved as a text file (.txt).
!
The download operation does not affect the event.dat file
on the PC. If you make changes and do not save them,
you lose those changes.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Working with configuration files
This section explains how to:
!
create a configuration file (refer to page 154)
!
open a configuration file in Configuration Manager (refer to page 154)
!
perform a configuration upload (refer to page 155)
!
perform a configuration download (refer to page 155)
When to use the Configuration Manager file operations
You can use
When you are
OK, File → Open, and working in offline mode
File → Save As
or
connected and logged on to a unit.
Note: When working in offline mode, you must save
the configuration to a file. However, when you are
logged on to a unit, the file save operation is optional.
To save the configuration to Flash, first update the
unit’s local buffer by clicking on the Send button or
choosing Upload/Download → Send All from the
Menu Bar. Then, use Upload/Download → Save to
Flash to complete the operation.
one of the following:
!
Send
!
Send All
!
Retrieve
!
Upload
Configuration
!
Download
Configuration
connected and logged on to a unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
153
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Creating a configuration file on the PC
To create a configuration file on the PC:
1
Start Configuration Manager.
2
Make the required changes on each property sheet.
Note: You do not have to be logged on to a unit to make configuration
changes. When you are not logged on to a unit, you can perform an offline
configuration.
3
From the Menu Bar, choose File → Save As.
Result: The Save As dialog box displays.
4
Enter a descriptive name for the file.
Use the file name to identify the type of configuration it contains.
Example 1: If the file contains a basic configuration that is to be used for a
specific type of unit, enter template as the file name.
Example 2: If the file contains a configuration that is unique to a specific
unit, enter the unit’s name or number as the file name.
5
Ensure the Save as type drop down box shows Text Files(*.txt).
6
Specify the folder where you want to save the file.
7
Click on the OK button.
Result: The file is saved.
Note: Nortel strongly recommends that you do not manually edit this file.
Opening a configuration file
To open a configuration file:
1
Start Configuration Manager.
2
If you want to work in online mode, log on to the unit. Otherwise, ensure
that you have selected the device type.
3
From the Menu Bar, choose File → Open.
Result: The Open dialog box displays.
154
4
Ensure the Files of type drop down box shows Text Files(*.txt).
5
Navigate to the folder containing the file you need.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
6
Using Configuration Manager
Select the file, and then click on the Open button.
Result: The contents of the configuration file are loaded into Configuration
Manager.
7
View the configuration details by clicking on each item in the system tree to
display the associated property sheet.
8
Make changes as necessary, complete the following actions:
a. Save the file by choosing File → Save from the Menu Bar. If you want
to change the file name, choose File → Save As from the Menu Bar.
b. Click on the Send button to update the unit, then choose Upload/
Download → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
Uploading a configuration to a unit
For complete instructions on uploading a configuration to a unit, refer to
“Restoring the configuration” on page 285.
Downloading a configuration from a unit
For complete instructions on downloading a configuration to a unit, refer to
“Creating a backup configuration file” on page 282.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
155
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Selecting the device type for offline
configuration
If you are not logged on to a Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit (that is, an RLC
or a Remote Gateway 9150 unit), then you must select the device type you want
to work with. Configuration Manager reorganizes the system tree with the
property sheets associated with that device type.
To select the device type for offline configuration:
1
Start Configuration Manager as described in “What is Configuration
Manager?” on page 134.
2
From the Menu Bar, choose View → Device Type, and the type of device
(for example, RLC or 9150).
3
Click on the plus sign (+) beside Configuration Manager in the left pane.
Result: The system tree expands in the right pane, similar to the following:
156
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Logging on to a unit
If you want to update the Flash memory on a unit as you make configuration
changes, or view statistics and logs, you must log on to the unit. Each unit has its
own administration ID and password.
You can log on to the unit by using one of the following connection methods:
!
Telnet (over the IP network)
!
serial port
Connection types
If the RLC or Remote Gateway 9150 unit is connected to the administration PC
by the RS-232 cable, you can establish a connection through the serial port.
If Ethernet connectivity has been established between the administration PC and
the RLC or Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you can establish an IP connection with
Telnet.
Default logon ID and password
The default logon ID is guest. You cannot change the logon ID.
The default password is guest123. The password can be changed and, therefore,
can be different if this is not a first time installation. Nortel recommends that you
do not change the password until your 9150 system is up and running smoothly.
Connection history
Configuration Manager maintains a record of past unit connections. You can
select, and then connect to a unit from the history list that displays in the
Connect menu.
Note: Upgrading the Configuration Manager software deletes the connection
history list.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
157
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Auto logoff
If the connection remains open with no activity for 15 minutes, then
Configuration Manager automatically logs off the connection and the Session
Timed Out message displays. This helps to secure the configuration in the event
that you walk away from the administration PC while logged on to a unit.
Logging on to a unit using the connection history
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (IP address
of the unit you want to log on to).
Result: If no one else logged on to the unit before you and if IP connectivity
exists to this unit, the User Authentication for Telnet Mode dialog box
displays. It is similar to the following:
158
2
Enter your logon name in the Login Name field. If you have not yet
customized this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page
157 for the default logon ID.
3
Enter your password in the Password field. If you have not yet customized
this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page 157 for the
default password.
4
Click on the OK button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
5
Using Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager initiates a connection attempt. The Connection
Status message box displays. It is similar to the following:
Note: The connection speed can be too fast for this message to be seen in
a successful logon attempt.
If you do not enter any logon information, after two minutes Configuration
Manager displays a reminder dialog box similar to the following:
Click on the OK button to return to Step 2 on page 158.
IF the logon attempt
THEN
fails,
a message box similar to the following displays:
Complete the following actions:
1 Click on the OK button.
2 Go back to Step 1 on page 158 to try again.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
159
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
IF the logon attempt
is successful,
THEN
the User Logged In dialog box displays.
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Startup Information dialog box
displays. It is similar to the following:
Messages display above the progress bar at the
bottom of the dialog box, similar to the following:
!
Reading Hardware Information
!
Reading DSP Load Data
!
Reading Configuration Data
These messages mean that Configuration
Manager is obtaining the unit’s configuration
information from Flash memory.
When initialization is complete, the
Configuration Data Read Successfully
message displays above the progress bar.
Click on the Close button.
160
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Logging on to a unit using Telnet
To log on to a unit using Telnet:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Logon Unit → Telnet.
Result: The Telnet Configuration dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Enter the IP Address of the unit you want to connect to.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: If no one else logged on to the unit before you, and if IP
connectivity exists to this unit, the User Authentication for Telnet Mode
dialog box displays, similar to the following:
4
Enter your logon name in the Login Name field. If you have not yet
customized this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page
157 for the default logon ID.
5
Enter your password in the Password field. If you have not yet customized
this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page 157 for the
default password.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
161
Using Configuration Manager
6
Standard 3.1
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager initiates a connection attempt. The
Connection Status message box displays. It is similar to the following:
Note: The connection speed can be too fast for this message to be seen in
a successful logon attempt.
If you do not enter any logon information, after two minutes Configuration
Manager displays a reminder dialog box similar to the following:
Click on the OK button to return to Step 4 on page 161.
IF the logon attempt
THEN
fails,
a message box similar to the following displays:
Complete the following actions:
1 Click on the OK button.
2 Go back to Step 1 on page 161 to try again.
162
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
IF the logon attempt
is successful,
THEN
the User Logged In dialog box displays.
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Startup Information dialog box
displays. It is similar to the following:
Messages display above the progress bar at the
bottom of the dialog box, similar to the following:
!
Reading Hardware Information
!
Reading DSP Load Data
!
Reading Configuration Data
These messages mean that Configuration
Manager is obtaining the unit’s configuration
information from Flash memory.
When initialization is complete, the
Configuration Data Read Successfully
message displays above the progress bar.
Click on the Close button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
163
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Logging on to a unit using the serial port
To log on to a unit using the serial port:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Logon Unit → Serial.
Result: The Serial Port Configuration dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Enter the COM port number the unit is connected to in the Port Number
field.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: If no one else logged on to the unit before and if your PC is
connected with a serial cable to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, the User
Authentication for Serial Mode dialog box displays. It is similar to the
following:
164
4
Enter your logon name in the Login Name field. Refer to “Default logon ID
and password” on page 157 for the default logon ID if you have not yet
customized this setting.
5
Enter your password in the Password field. Refer to “Default logon ID and
password” on page 157 for the default password if you have not yet
customized this setting.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
6
Using Configuration Manager
Click on the OK button.
Result: The connection attempt is initiated. The following message might
display:
Trying to Connect via Serial Port <port number>
IF the logon attempt
THEN
fails,
the following message displays:
SERIAL CONNECTION FAILED
Check the serial port connection and ensure it is
good. Then, go back to step 1.
is successful,
the User Logged In dialog box displays.
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Startup Information dialog box
displays.
Messages display above the progress bar at the
bottom of the dialog box, similar to the following:
!
Reading Hardware Information
!
Reading DSP Load Data
!
Reading Configuration Data
These messages mean that Configuration
Manager is obtaining the unit’s configuration
information from Flash memory.
When initialization is complete, the
Configuration Data Read Successfully
message displays above the progress bar.
Click on the Close button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
165
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Logging off of the unit
When you are finished using Configuration Manager to make configuration
changes, or to view logs and statistics, log off of the unit. Logging off secures
the unit’s configuration.
To log off of a unit:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Logoff Unit.
Result: The Log off dialog box displays, similar to the following:
2
Click on the Yes button.
Result: The Configuration Manager: User Logged off dialog box displays,
similar to the following:
3
166
Click on the OK button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Using the Remote Connection command
Use the Remote Connection command to log on to multiple Remote Gateway
9100 Series units during a single Configuration Manager session.
Note: Configuration Manager does not allow multiple users to log on to the
same Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit simultaneously. To allow subsequent
users to log on at a later time, you must log off of all Remote Gateway 9100
Series units that you have accessed before ending your Configuration Manager
session.
The Remote Connection command allows you to move between Remote
Gateway 9100 Series units without logging off from the current unit before
logging on to another unit. After you log on to one unit using the Connect →
Logon Unit command, log on to another unit using the following procedure:
1
From the menu, choose Connect → Remote Connection.
Result: The Remote Connection dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Do one of the following:
!
Click on the IP Address option button if you want to connect to the unit
through the IP address.
Note: This option is available when you are logged on to any Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit.
!
Click on the Unit ID option button if you want to connect to the unit
through the Unit ID.
Note: This option is only available when you are logged on to an RLC.
Use this option when accessing a Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
located behind a NAT router or Firewall device.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
167
Using Configuration Manager
3
Standard 3.1
Do one of the following:
!
Enter the IP address of the unit that you want to connect to in the IP
Address fields.
Note: This option is available when you are logged on to any Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit.
!
Enter the unit ID of the unit that you want to connect to in the Unit ID
field.
Note: This option is only available when you are logged on to an RLC.
Use this option when accessing a Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
located behind a NAT router or Firewall device.
4
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager initiates a connection attempt. The
following message can appear:
Trying to Connect to <IP address> or <unit ID>
Refer to “Logging on to a unit” on page 157 for more information.
When you complete your work on a unit, you must log off from that unit.
Execute a Connect → Logoff Unit command for each unit that you logged on to
before ending your Configuration Manager session.
168
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Performing a system restart or shutdown
Configuration Manager allows you to perform a controlled system restart or
shutdown.
When to perform a restart or shutdown
Each time that you make a configuration change, perform a Save to Flash. You
must also restart the unit if Configuration Manager prompts you to do so.
Note: When you save configuration changes to Flash, the system suspends new
call processing for approximately 30 seconds. Some configuration changes do
not take effect until the unit has been re-started.
You can perform a system shutdown when you need to power the system down.
Performing a system restart
To perform a system restart:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → System Reset → Restart.
Result: The System Restart dialog box displays, similar to the following:
2
Click on the Yes button.
Result: The following status dialog box displays:
The following message also displays in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen:
Restarting the System
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
169
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
The status continues to show Online. When the system restart is complete,
a dialog box displays informing you that the system restart was successful,
and that you are logged off, similar to the following:
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager prompts you to log back on using the
previous connection method (Serial or Telnet).
Performing a system shutdown
ATTENTION
Do not perform this procedure if you do not have physical
access to the unit. To recover from the system shutdown,
you must power the unit off, and then power it back on.
To perform a system shutdown:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → System Reset → Shutdown.
Result: The System Shutdown dialog box displays, similar to the following:
2
Click on the Yes button.
Result: Configuration Manager disconnects your logon session and the
following message displays in the status bar at the bottom of the screen:
Shutting Down the System
The status shows Offline.
3
Turn the power on the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit off.
Note: You must turn the power off before you can power the unit back up.
170
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Configuration Manager
Closing Configuration Manager
When you have completed all the configuration modifications you want to
make, or are done viewing unit logs and statistics, log off and close the
Configuration Manager application. This secures the configuration, preventing
others from accessing it if you walk away from the administration PC while
logged on to a unit.
CAUTION
Risk of configuration loss
If you close Configuration Manager without saving the changes
you made to a file on your PC, or without updating the Flash
memory of the unit you were working on, all changes are lost. You
must reenter any changes you made.
.
To close Configuration Manager:
1
Ensure that you have saved all configuration changes by doing one or more
of the following:
!
!
From the Menu Bar, choose File → Save As, then specify the name for
the configuration file. The file is saved on the administration PC hard
disk.
Update the Flash memory of the unit you are connected to by doing one
of the following:
—
—
—
Click on the Send button on any property sheet, then choose
Upload/Download → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
Click on the Send All button on any property sheet, then choose
Upload/Download → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
If you have saved the changes to a file, choose
Upload/Download → Upload Configuration from the Menu Bar.
For instructions, refer to “Restoring the configuration” on page
285.
2
Log off by choosing Connect → Logoff Unit from the Menu Bar.
3
Choose File → Exit from the Menu Bar.
Result: Configuration Manager closes.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
171
Using Configuration Manager
Standard 3.1
Uninstalling the Configuration Manager
software
To remove the Configuration Manager software from your administration PC:
1
Choose Start → Settings → Control Panel.
2
Double-click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3
Select Remote Gateway 9100 Series from the list, and then click on the
Remove button.
Result: The Add/Remove Programs dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
4
Click on the Yes button.
Result: The Remote Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager is
removed from the PC.
172
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 5
Configuring the Remote Gateway
9150 unit
In this chapter
9150 System configuration
174
International tones support
186
IP configuration
192
RLC connection configuration
198
9150 port configuration
207
BRI configuration
225
Trunk group configuration
232
DSP configuration
239
Auto upgrade configuration
243
Syslog configuration
247
Station configuration
250
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
173
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
9150 System configuration
This section describes the settings that apply to the system rather than to the
RLC port or Remote Gateway 9150 trunks or stations.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → 9150 System Configuration
9150 System Configuration property sheet
174
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
NLP
The Non-Linear Processor (NLP) works with the Remote Gateway 9100 Series
echo canceller to reduce echo. Echo occurs in a telephone call when the
transmitted signal reflects and is received by the transmitting device. To cancel
the echo, the Remote Gateway 9100 Series system monitors the audio stream
looking for echo. When echo is identified it is digitally (mathematically)
removed. If the echo is very strong, a small amount of echo may remain called
“residual” echo. The aggressiveness of the NLP determines how quickly and
how effectively the Remote Gateway 9100 Series NLP reduces the residual
echo.
The operation of the NLP can affect how the audio sounds during double-talk
situations - when both parties are speaking. Cultural differences also change
how often double-talk occurs during a conversation.
Nortel recommends the following settings as a starting point:
!
RLC: NLP Enabled - Less Aggressive (default)
!
9150: NLP Enabled - More Aggressive (default)
If the Remote Gateway 9150 unit user hears echo during conversations, adjust
the settings, as follows:
!
RLC: NLP Enabled - More Aggressive
!
9150: NLP Enabled - Less Aggressive
If the party on the PBX side hears echo during conversations, adjust the settings,
as follows:
!
RLC: NLP Enabled - More Aggressive
!
9150: NLP Enabled - More Aggressive
The NLP does not have to operate aggressively if echo is not present. If echo is
not present but double-talk is present, even with Less Aggressive settings, try
disabling the NLP on the RLC.
Upgrades
When you perform a Remote Gateway 9150 firmware upgrade from release
1.3.4 or earlier, NLP settings return to their default values.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
175
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Emergency service programmability
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit can serve the emergency needs of telephones in
multiple locations having different dialing plans. To access the Emergency
Activation Code dialog box, click on the Emergency Feature button. You can
configure up to three separate numbers to reach local emergency services
regardless of which call appearance key you use to dial the number. The
particular emergency activation code dialed by the user determines the digits
sent to the host PBX and the telephone number sent to the Central Office (CO).
Also, in their haste to reach an emergency service, some users can forget to dial
trunk access digits. You can configure your Remote Gateway 9150 unit to send
the emergency telephone number to the CO whether or not the user dials trunk
access digits.
Note: If you must contact emergency personnel with consecutive calls, you must
press the digits of the Emergency Access Code each time. Do not use last
number re-dial or the auto-dial keys.
Refer to the “Emergency Feature” on page 180 for further configuration details.
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 system settings
To configure the Remote Gateway 9150 system settings:
176
1
Complete the fields as described in “9150 System Configuration field
descriptions” on page 178.
2
Click on the OK button to save the information in the temporary work file.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
3
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
To update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the new information, click on
the Send button.
IF you are
THEN
logged on to the
Remote Gateway 9150
unit,
the changes are written into the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit’s buffer.
not logged on to the
Remote Gateway 9150
unit,
To save the changes in Flash memory,
choose Upload/Download → Save to
Flash from the Menu Bar.
the Connection not Established dialog
box displays:
Do one of the following:
!
Log on to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
and then click on the Send button again.
!
Save the changes to a file on your
administration PC.
Note: When you change System configuration parameters and Save to
Flash, calls can be dropped. Ensure that there are no active calls when you
make changes to these parameters.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
177
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
9150 System Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
Unit ID
Enter a unique number from 1 through 20 to identify this
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and differentiate it between the
RLC and all remote units connected to the same RLC.
Note: This is the same number that you enter in the Unit
ID field of the RLC's Remote Connection Configuration
property sheet for this Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
The default is 1.
Node Name
Enter your site name.
The node name uniquely identifies this Remote Gateway
9150 site in the RLC network.
The default is 9150.
DSP Gain
Configure the DSP Gain if the voice levels at the distant
site are too loud or quiet and cannot be resolved using the
volume control on the telephone set. Positive values for
the gain boosts the voice level for all remote calls to the
distant site. Negative values for the gain reduce the voice
level at the distant site for all remote calls.
Select the number of decibels (dB) that you want to add to,
or subtract from, the strength of the transmitted signal
before the DSP processes it.
Valid options are 9, 6, 3, 0, -3, -6, -9, -12, and -15.
The default is 0 dB.
178
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Field
NLP
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Description
!
Click in the Enable checkbox to enable non-linear
processing, or echo cancellation.
The default is selected.
!
Click on the Less Aggressive option button if you
choose to enable the NLP and echo is a significant
problem on calls supported by your Remote Gateway
9100 Series unit.
!
Click on the More Aggressive option button if you
choose to enable the NLP but echo is not a significant
problem on calls supported by your Remote Gateway
9100 Series unit.
The default is Less Aggressive.
Refer to “NLP” on page 175 for information on the proper
configuration of NLP settings.
Ring Frequency
Certain devices-most notably, some European fax
machines-only recognize a ring frequency of 25 Hertz
(Hz). Some telephones use a 20 Hz ring frequency.
Remote Gateway 9150 units connected to fax machines
that only recognize a 25 Hz ring frequency can require a
different Ring Frequency setting. To change this setting,
select 25 from this drop down list box.
Valid options are 20 and 25.
The default is 20.
Time Offset
Click on the up or down arrow to change the time zone
difference between this Remote Gateway 9150 unit and
the RLC.
Note: Time Offset is in 15-minute intervals to a maximum
of, plus or minus, 24 hours.
The default is 0.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
179
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Emergency Feature
Click on the Emergency Feature button to configure
emergency activation codes.
Result: The Emergency Activation Code dialog box
displays.
!
Emergency Code
Enter the number that the user must dial to tell the PBX
to send to the CO the emergency service telephone
number in the Dialed Number field immediately to the
right.
The first default is 911. Subsequent defaults are NC
(Not Configured).
!
Dialed Number
Enter the DN of the emergency service that you want
the PBX to send to the CO when the user dials the
Emergency Code in the field immediately to the left.
The first default is 911. Subsequent defaults are NC
(Not Configured).
Note: Enter only the Emergency Activation Code (for
example, 911 in North America). Do not include the trunk
access code because the Emergency Activation code dials
out directly on the PSTN.
If you are using only the IP network to route calls, leave
this field blank.
Click on the OK button.
Refer to “Emergency service programmability” on page
176 for further details on this feature.
180
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Enable PBX Alarms
Click on the Enable PBX Alarms checkbox if you want
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to notify the host PBX to
produce alarms and alerts. If you don't want the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to notify the host PBX to produce
alarms and alerts, ensure that the Enable PBX Alarms
checkbox is not selected.
Refer to “Display logs” on page 412 to determine which
alarms and alerts the PBX generates.
SPRE Codes: Online
Enter the SPRE code that is to be used to put your site into
online mode, or accept the default code. The default code
is #99.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with the
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when going into online mode.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
Refer to “Online/offline table” on page 40 for more
information.
SPRE Codes: Paging
Enter the SPRE code that is used to announce pages to
other stations in your office, or accept the default code.
The default is #05.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with a
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when initiating a page.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
181
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Standard 3.1
Description
SPRE Codes: Registration Enter the SPRE code that allows a multi-user or port-
sharing participant to begin a session, or accept the default
code. The default is #97.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with a
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when registering for a port.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
SPRE Codes: Offline
Enter the SPRE code that is used to put your site into
offline mode, or accept the default code. The default is
#98.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with the
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when going into offline mode.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
SPRE Codes: Local
Calling
Enter the SPRE code that allows analog or ATA-equipped
station users to change the outgoing call mode to locally
controlled mode. The default is #8.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with a
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when initiating a local call on an analog or
ATA-equipped station.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
SPRE Codes:
DeRegistration
Enter the SPRE code that will allow a multi-user or port
sharing participant to end a session, or accept the default
code. The default is #96.
Note: The SPRE code is automatically prefixed with a
pound sign (#). This means users must dial # before the
SPRE code when disengaging from a port.
Maximum length: 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
182
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Trunk support
Choose 56K if you know that your Remote Gateway 9150
unit is in a PSTN network that can only transport at 56
Kbps.
Choose 64K if you know that your Remote Gateway 9150
unit is in a PSTN network that can only transport at 64
Kbps.
Choose Dynamic if you know that your Remote Gateway
9150 unit is in a PSTN network that supports speeds that
vary from 64 Kbps to 56 Kbps. The Remote Gateway 9100
Series system dynamically adapts and downgrades a call to
56 Kbps if 64 Kbps is not available.
Note: You must configure the same BRI speed (such as
56K, 64K, or dynamic) on both the RLC and the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
The default is 64K.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
183
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Local SwitchOver
Standard 3.1
Description
!
Click on the Enable option button to automatically
route the voice path for local station-to-station calls
(calls from one Remote Gateway 9150 station to
another station on the same Remote Gateway 9150
unit) through the Remote Gateway 9150 unit when
such calls are made on the host calling key.
The signaling data is routed through the host PBX.
However, the voice path is routed through the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to:
— prevent tromboning between the RLC and Remote
Gateway 9150 unit
— save connection bandwidth
!
Click on the Disable option button to route the voice
path for these calls through the PBX.
The signaling data is routed through the host PBX.
The default is Disable.
Note: You must enable the DN Discovery feature in order
for the Local SwitchOver feature to work. Refer to the
Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210) to enable DN Discovery.
184
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Companding Algorithm
A Companding Algorithm, or coding law, is a PCM
standard for encoding an analog voice signal into a digital
bit stream. There are two main coding laws in common use
around the world, A-law and µ-law (Mu-law). A-law is the
standard in Europe and most areas outside of North
American influence, while the North American and
Japanese standard is Mu-law.
Select A-law or Mu-law if you want the Remote Gateway
9150 unit to override the Automatic default coding law.
Valid options are Automatic, Mu-law, and A-law.
Note: Automatic (coding law) is the default setting. When
you choose Automatic, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
uses the coding law configured for the ISDN BRI module
in use.
For a listing of line types and their respective default
coding laws, refer to “ISDN Line Type” on page 226.
Multiple Subscriber
Number
Remote Gateway 9100 Series supports Multiple
Subscriber Numbering (MSN), allowing you to configure
each B-channel with a unique DN. If you do not have a
unique DN for each B-channel, then the first B-channel
you configure defines the number for both B-channels.
!
Click on the Enable option button if the Central Office
provides a unique DN for each individual B-channel.
!
Click on the Disable option button if the Central Office
provides one DN to be used for both B-channels.
The default is Enable.
International Tones
Click on the International Tones button to configure
tones corresponding to your country on your Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. Refer to “International tones support”
on page 186 for a detailed description of the tones that you
can configure using this setting.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
185
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
International tones support
International Tones support allows users to integrate Remote Gateway 9100
Series seamlessly into their existing telecommunications networks in countries
that use tones different from North American tones, which are the defaults.
Determine existing tone configurations for each field in the International Tone
Support dialog box by accessing LD 56 through the switch administration
terminal. The exact procedure for accessing LD 56 is available in documentation
for your specific PBX.
The Tone Code field on the International Tones Support dialog box specifies the
frequency and levels for the NT8D17 TDS card.
When configuring International Tones, consider the following:
!
International Tone configuration uses NT8D17 card Tone Codes. These
codes are valid for all countries and Meridian 1 PBX 11 or IPE Controller
cards.
!
To configure the four international tones, you need to obtain the following
FTC values for DIAL, RGBK, BUSY and OVFL from LD 56 of your PBX:
>ld 56
REQ prt
TYPE FTC
…
DIAL
XTON 129
XCAD 000
RGBK
XTON 132
XCAD 32
BUSY
XTON 130
XCAD 30
OVFL
XTON 130
XCAD 0
186
Look for the DIAL,RGBK, BUSY and OVFL values.
Enter the XTON value as the “Tone Code” value for this
tone. XC AD is used below to determine the Repeat, No.
of Cycles and Cadence Tim e.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
In the following example there are three different values for XCAD. Collect the
LD 56 WCAD details for each different XCAD value.
>ld 56
REQ prt
TYPE FCAD
for XCAD 0
WCAD 0
CDNC 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 0000 00000
END OFF
WTON NO
REQ prt
WCAD 30
CDNC 100 50 00000 …
END REPT
CYCS 1
WTON NO
REQ prt
WCAD 32
CDNC 102 102 205 819 00000 ….
END REPT
CYCS 1 2
WTON NO
Note the values printed for CDNC, END, and CYCS.
If END = REPT, then the value entered into the End Repeat field is “Repeat”.
CYCS usually has “1” or “1 2”. Enter the largest number as the No. of Cycles.
Enter the non-zero CDNC values into the Cadence Time fields.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → 9150 System Configuration
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
187
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
International Tones Support property sheet
Configuring International Tones
To configure International Tones:
1
Click on the International Tones button in the 9150 System Configuration
property sheet.
2
Complete the fields as described in “International Tones field descriptions”
on page 189.
3
Click on the OK button to save the information in the temporary work file.
Note: Refer to the Configuration Manager Help file for more information
about International Tones.
188
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
International Tones field descriptions
Field
Description
Tone Type
Tones inform users as to call status. Select the tone that
you want to configure.
Valid options are DIAL, RGBK, BUSY, and OVFL.
DIAL – Dial tone signifies that the telephone is ready to
receive dialed digits.
RGBK – Ringback signifies that the dialed line is ringing.
BUSY – Busy signal signifies that the dialed line is not
ready to receive calls.
OVFL – Overflow (congestion) tone signifies that there
are no channels available.
End Repeat
!
Click on the Off option button if you want the tone type
you selected to be a constant tone.
Note: If you chose End Repeat: Off, then the No of
Cycles and Cadence Time fields are dimmed.
!
Click on the Repeat option button if you want the
selected tone type to have on and off phases.
The default is Off.
Tone Code
Enter the four-letter LD 56 Tone Code that you want this
Remote Gateway 9150 unit to use for the tone type you
selected.
The default is 4.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
189
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
No of Cycles
Enter the number of cycles that you want in the tone type
you selected.
Two fields in the Cadence Time field become active for
each cycle you request. That is, they are no longer
dimmed. The boxes turn white, signifying that you can
enter information into that box. For example, if you choose
1 cycle, two boxes turn white. If you choose 3 cycles, six
boxes turn white, and so on.
Valid options are 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Cadence Time
Tones include on and off phases. One or more cycles of on
and off phases make up a tone's cadence. For example, the
default cadence for normal North American ringing is 2
seconds on, 4 seconds off, 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, and
so on. In the Cadence Time fields, enter the length, in
milliseconds, of the phases of the cadence that you want to
configure for the tone type you selected.
Find the proper entries for the Cadence Time fields in the
FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block in the
Prompts and Responses section of the X11 Administration
Guide (NTP 553-3001-311).
You can also calculate these entries using the formula in
the following example, which calculates a phase of 2
seconds (2000 milliseconds [ms]):
For 96 ms cadence increments:
2000/96 = 20.83 = 21 (always round up)
21 * 96 = 2016
multiple of 5 closest to 2016 = 2015
2015 / 5 = 403
190
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Field
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Description
Cadence Time (continued) For 128 ms cadence increments:
2000/128 = 15.625 = 16
16 * 128 = 2048
multiple of 5 closest to 2048 = 2050
2050 / 5 = 410
The shortcut is dividing the time by 5 (2000 ms / 5 = 400).
To reverse the calculation, multiply the CDNC number by
5 (410 * 5 = 2050, 403 * 5 = 2015). This removes the need
to know the actual software cadence increment value.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
191
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
IP configuration
This section explains how to enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: Even if you plan to route calls over the PSTN only, you must assign an IP
address and gateway to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and RLC to allow remote
administration.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → IP Configuration
IP Configuration property sheet
192
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Configuring the IP addresses
To configure the IP addresses:
1
Complete the fields as described in “IP Configuration field descriptions” on
page 193.
2
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
3
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Notes:
a. When you change IP configuration parameters and Save to Flash, calls
can be dropped. Ensure that there are no active calls when you make
changes to these parameters.
b. To save changes to Flash memory, select Upload → Save to Flash
from the Menu Bar.
IP Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
IP Network Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the currently logged-on Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. The subnet mask identifies to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit which portion of the IP address represents
the network and which portion represents the host.
IP Gateway
Enter the IP address of the IP gateway serving the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. A gateway is a device that functions as a
node on two networks, forwarding packets from one network to
addresses on the other networks. In Remote Gateway 9100
Series context, the gateway is the device on the network that
directs traffic to and from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
193
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
DiffServ CodePoint
This setting modifies the IP Header and is applicable across the
entire WAN. If enabled, this feature allows you to set the
DiffServ CodePoint value. Refer to the "DiffServ CodePoint:
Value" for a list of values.
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to allow
prioritization of voice packets sent from this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over WAN portions of the network.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want to
allow prioritization of voice packets sent from this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over WAN portions of the network.
The default is Disable.
DiffServ CodePoint:
Value
Select the DiffServ CodePoint value from the drop down box.
Valid options and their value (in hexadecimal) are:
!
CS7 (Precedence 7 - Network Control) - 0x38
!
CS6 (Precedence 6 - Inter-network Control) - 0x30
!
EF (Expedited Forwarding) - 0x2E
!
AF41 (Assured Forwarding Class 4, Delay = Normal,
Throughput = High, Reliability = Normal) - 0x22
!
AF31 (Assured Forwarding Class 3, Delay = Normal,
Throughput = High, Reliability = Normal) - 0x1A
!
AF21 (Assured Forwarding Class 2, Delay = Normal,
Throughput = High, Reliability = Normal) - 0x12
!
AF11 (Assured Forwarding Class 1, Delay = Normal,
Throughput = High, Reliability = Normal) - 0x0A
!
DE (Default) - 0x00
The default is EF.
194
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
802.1Q Mapping
This setting inserts an additional tag at the Media Access
Control (MAC) layer of IEEE 802.3 and therefore ends at the
first router. Refer to RFC 2474.
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to allow
prioritization of voice packets sent from this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over LAN portions of the network.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want to
allow prioritization of voice packets sent from this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over LAN portions of the network.
The default is Disable.
802.1Q Mapping:
VLAN ID
Enter the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) ID for 802.1Q
Mapping.
Valid entries are 0 through 4094 (0xFFE) and NC (Not
Configured).
The default is NC.
802.1Q Mapping:
Priority
Select the priority value for 802.1Q Mapping from the Priority
scroll box.
Valid options are 0 through 7.
The default is 6.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
195
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Full Duplex Ethernet
This setting configures Ethernet support on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit vintages AD, BD, CD, and later to allow
simultaneous transmission and reception of Ethernet packets.
When you enable full-duplex Ethernet, you must also set the
corresponding port on the connected switch, hub, or router to 10
FULL Duplex. With full-duplex Ethernet enabled, the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit's Ethernet collision LED remains on solid
(constantly lit). Remote Gateway 9100 Series products do not
support Auto negotiation of the Ethernet interface.
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to allow 10Megabyte transmission in both directions, send and receive.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want to
allow 10-Megabyte transmission in both directions, send
and receive.
Note: When you configure a full-duplex Ethernet connection,
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit's Ethernet collision LED
remains on solid (constantly lit).
The default is Disable.
196
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Prioritizing voice traffic over shared networks
Prioritizing voice traffic on shared networks can improve QoS on LAN and
WAN segments of the network that support prioritization. Achieving the desired
QoS through prioritization over LAN connections requires you to enable 802.1Q
Mapping. Achieving the desired QoS through prioritization over WAN
connections requires you to enable the DiffServ CodePoint.
For more information on DiffServ, 802.1Q, and quality of service in general,
refer to “Evaluating your network”, and “Quality of service issues” in the
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network Engineering Guidelines (NTP 555-8421103).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
197
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
RLC connection configuration
This section describes how to configure information needed by the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to establish connections with the RLC on the host PBX.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → RLC Connection Configuration
RLC Connection Configuration property sheet
198
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Configuring the RLC connection information
To configure the RLC connection information:
1
Complete the fields as described in “RLC Connection Configuration field
descriptions” on page 203.
2
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
3
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
PSTN connection configuration
The PSTN number configured on this property sheet corresponds to the
dedicated network port on the RLC for your Remote Gateway 9150 unit. The
PSTN number to connect to the RLC must be configured in a specific manner. If
you select Caller ID as the security level, then the PSTN number that you enter
for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to connect to the RLC is compared with the
telephone number configured on the RLC for your site. If the two numbers do
not match, the call is dropped.
Note: Enter the PSTN number to connect to RLC exactly as it must be dialed by
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, including 1 for long distance and 9 for Centrex
trunk access.
Permanent PSTN connection
When using multiple Remote Gateway 9100 Series units, you must only
configure the permanent PSTN connections for the RLC’s primary network
ports. If you only use one Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit, you can use
additional permanent PSTN connections.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
199
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring the PSTN number
To configure the PSTN number:
1
Enable the PSTN Connection option.
2
Enter the telephone that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit will dial to connect
to the RLC in the PSTN Number to Connect to RLC field.
3
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
4
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
Security level configuration
It is recommended that you implement a security authentication method on both
the RLC and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to prevent toll fraud.
The security level defines what type of security authentication is used between
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the host PBX. The information used to
perform security authentication depends on the security level chosen. There are
three levels of security:
!
No security (default setting)
!
Caller ID
!
Provision ID
For a detailed description of these security levels refer to “System security” on
page 12.
200
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Configuring the security level
To configure the security level:
1
2
Select one of the following security level settings from the Security Level list
box:
!
No Security
!
Caller ID
!
Provision ID
If you selected Caller ID or Provision ID security levels, do one of the
following:
IF you selected
THEN
Caller ID,
click on the CallerID button.
Result: The List of Caller IDs dialog box
displays.
In the Caller ID field, enter the telephone
number that is permitted to call the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Ensure that
the telephone number you enter matches
the Caller ID actually presented by the
RLC.
Click on the OK button, and then click on
the Add button from the pop-up menu
that displays.
Result: The telephone number displays in
the blank field.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
201
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
IF you selected
THEN
Provision ID,
the Security ID fields are enabled.
Do the following:
!
Enter the RLC’s security identifier (must
be a 10 digit password) in the Inbound
Security ID field.
!
Enter the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
security identifier (must be a 10 digit
password) in the Outbound Security ID
field.
Note: You must configure the same
security identifiers in reverse on the RLC
port associated with this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
3
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
4
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
202
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
RLC Connection Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
Unit ID
The RLC’s non-configurable Unit ID is 254.
IP Connection
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to route
calls over your IP network.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want
to route calls over your IP network.
The default is Disable.
PSTN Connection
Click on the Enable option button if you want to route
calls over the PSTN.
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want to
route calls over the PSTN.
The default is Disable.
IP Address
Enter the RLC’s IP address.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses this IP address to
connect to the RLC over the IP network.
Note: If you disable the IP connection, these fields are
dimmed.
PSTN Number to Connect
to RLC
If you enabled the PSTN connection, enter the telephone
number used to connect to the RLC.
If you want, you can also include the following characters
in the telephone number:
!
a period (.) for a caller ID separator
!
a comma (,) for a delay of 1/2 second
!
a dash (-) for a null separator
Note: Enter the PSTN number to connect to RLC exactly
as it must be dialed by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
including 1 for long distance and 9 for Centrex trunk
access.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
203
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
IP Signaling
Standard 3.1
Description
!
Click on the Permanent option button if you want the
signaling link to the Remote Unit to never close.
Note: This is useful in times when the Remote unit is
behind a NAT router.
!
Click on the On Demand option button if you want the
signaling link to close once there are no active calls
between the RLC and the Remote unit.
The default is On Demand.
Note: If you disable the IP connection, these option
buttons are dimmed.
Refer to “Deployment options” on page 75 for more
information.
Block Incoming Local Call
on Primary B Channel
!
Click on the Enable option button if the primary Bchannel (trunk) should not receive incoming local calls.
!
Click on the Disable option button if the primary Bchannel (trunk) should receive incoming local calls.
The default is Enable.
204
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Security Level
Select the security level that you want to assign to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit according to the following
table:
Level
Description
No Security
When set to security level 1, the
Remote Gateway 9150 permits all
incoming calls regardless of
source.
Note: No security is the default
security level.
Caller ID
When you select Caller ID, you can
define the valid Caller IDs that the
Remote Gateway 9150 can
receive. If the Caller ID on the
incoming call matches what is
configured on the remote unit, the
connection is established. If it does
not match, the RLC drops the call.
Note: Caller ID authentication
cannot be performed over the IP
network. Caller ID authentication
can be used only on the PSTN.
Provision ID
If you select Provision ID, security
identifiers must be configured on
both the Remote Gateway 9150
and the RLC port that the unit is
assigned to. When a connection to
or from the host PBX is attempted,
the security identifiers are
compared. If they match, the
connection is established. If they
do not match, the call is dropped.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
205
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Security Id: Inbound
Security ID
If you selected Provision ID as the security level, enter the
Security ID for incoming calls.
This ID must be a 10-digit password. The Remote
Gateway 9150 unit compares the security ID of the
incoming call to the Inbound Security ID that is configured
in this field. If the security IDs do not match, the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit rejects the call.
Security Id: Outbound
Security ID
If you selected Provision ID as the security level, enter the
Security ID for outgoing calls.
This ID must be a 10-digit password. The Remote
Gateway 9150 unit sends the outbound security ID to the
RLC. The RLC compares this ID to the configured
Outbound Security ID that it has for this remote unit. If the
security IDs do not match, the RLC rejects the call.
Caller ID
206
Click on the Caller ID button to configure the DN of the
network port dedicated for connections to this Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. When the RLC calls the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit, it sends its Caller ID to the 9150 unit.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit compares the caller ID
with the list of Caller IDs configured, and, if it does not
find a match, it rejects the call.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
9150 port configuration
To place and receive calls, you must use Configuration Manager to configure
each station (telephone or other device such as a fax machine) in your office.
Note: To ensure that digital telephones, ATAs, and MCAs operate as expected,
you must specify the Phone Type when configuring a station as Local or
Remote.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → 9150 Port Configuration
9150 Port Configuration property sheet
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
207
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring stations
To configure stations:
1
Locate the port that you want to configure by clicking on the appropriate
port range tab, and then scrolling down the list.
The following table describes port number ranges and how they can be
configured:
Ports
Can be assigned to
0–15 and 32–47
digital telephones.
Note: The associated ports on the host PBX
must be configured with voice capability.
16–31 and 48–63
stations equipped with ATAs or MCAs.
Note: The associated ports on the host PBX
must be configured with data capability.
64
a fax machine or other analog device
(without an ATA).
Note: The associated port on the host PBX
must be configured with voice capability.
Note: You can use ports 32 through 47 and 48 through 63 only if this
Remote Gateway 9150 unit connects to a 2-slot RLC on the host PBX.
2
3
Under Port Type, click on the option button of the call processing capability
that this station is to have:
!
Local: if only calls through the local PSTN are allowed. This option
enables the Configure button for this port.
!
Remote: if only calls through the host PBX are allowed.
!
Local and Remote: if both local and remote calls and local station-tostation calling are allowed. This option enables the Configure button for
this port so you can configure local station features and keys.
Note: Choose Local and Remote if you want to define a Bridge Port.
Accept the default RLC Port associated with this station, or enter a new
RLC port number.
Exception: Do not associate a local-only port with an RLC port.
208
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Notes:
4
!
Generally, choosing matching Remote Gateway 9150 and RLC port
numbers simplifies configuration and administration.
!
If the station is equipped with an MCA or ATA for data transmission, the
RLC port must be configured on the host PBX with data capability.
If you selected Local or Local & Remote, click on the Configure button for
the port you are configuring.
Result: The Local Profile Configuration dialog box displays.
5
Complete the fields as described in “Local Profile Configuration field
descriptions” on page 210.
6
Once you have completed the Local Profile Configuration, click on the OK
button.
Result: The 9150 Device Configuration property sheet re-displays. The
configurations you set are displayed in the port’s Description field.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
209
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Local Profile Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
CPND
Enter the Calling Party Name Display (CPND) for the user
assigned to the station.
The default is NC (Not Configured).
DN
Enter the user’s local extension number.
Note: If Auto DN Discovery is enabled on the RLC, then this field
is configured to be the same DN as the primary DN configured on
the host PBX for this station.
Phone Type
Select the telephone model type connected to the port.
Valid options are M2006, M2008, M2216, M2616, M2616CT,
M3110, M3310, M3820, M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904,
M3905, MCA, ATA, and Other.
The default is M2616.
Add on Module
Type
Select the applicable Add on Module for the M3904 and M3905
telephones.
Valid options are Not Configured, KBA, and DBA.
The default is Not Configured.
Auto Hold
!
Click on the Enable option button if active calls are to be
automatically put on hold when another call appearance key is
pressed.
!
Click on the Disable option button if active calls are to be
disconnected when another call appearance key is pressed.
The default is Enable.
Paging
!
Click on the Enable option button if this station is to be
allowed to announce pages.
!
Click on the Disable option button if this station is not to be
allowed to announce pages.
The default is Enable.
210
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Field
Bridge Port
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Description
!
Click on the Enable option button to give inbound PSTN calls
access to certain PBX features.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you want to support a
telephone on this port.
The default is Disable.
Notes:
Forward Busy/No
Answer
!
When configuring Local-only ports on a Remote Gateway
9150 unit, the Bridge Port setting is not available.
!
If a Remote Gateway 9150 unit port is configured with Bridge
Port enabled, do not attach a telephone set to this port.
!
For a telephone set connected to a Remote Gateway 9150 unit
with Local and Remote capability, the Bridge Port does not
need to be enabled to allow you to have access to Bridge Port
features.
!
Click on the Enable option button to allow incoming calls to
this station to be forwarded if they are not answered by the
number of rings configured in the Number of Rings before
transfer field or if the station is busy.
!
Click on the Disable option button if calls are not to be
forwarded.
The default is Disable.
Forward Busy/No
Answer: Number of
Rings before
transfer
Enter the number of times this station rings before transferring the
call to the configured DN.
Note: You must Enable Forward Busy/No Answer to configure
this setting.
The default is four rings.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
211
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Forward Busy/No
Answer: Transfer
to DN
Enter the DN where calls to this station are to be transferred if not
answered before the configured number of rings.
Note: This DN may be for a voicemail service or the DN of
another station. You must Enable Forward Busy/No Answer to
configure this setting.
Disabled Outbound Click on the Not Configured checkbox to enable these fields.
Digit Sequence
This allows you to prevent this station from making certain type of
calls. To prevent these types of calls, enter the digits that normally
allow the calls to proceed.
Example: Enter 1976 to prevent calls to 1-976 numbers.
Note: You can configure five digit sequences. In order for calls to
be restricted, the dialed number must contain a matching string at
the beginning of the number.
Local Call Keys
(Key 1 and Key 2)
The number selected identifies the feature key position on the
telephone. Select the feature key you want to use for each local
call appearance key.
Note: If the port is configured as local and remote, Nortel
recommends that you use keys 8 and 9 and that you do not use
Key 0. You can select Key 0 if the port is configured as local only.
Valid options are 0 through 75, and NC (Not Configured).
The default is NC.
212
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Optional Feature
Keys
If you configured the port as Local, click on the Optional Feature
Keys button to assign local features to specific keys.
Result: The Key Feature Configuration dialog box displays.
Note: Ensure that the selected key does not already have a feature
assigned to it through the PBX.
!
Key Feature
Select the name of the feature you want to configure on this
key.
Valid options are Call Transfer, Call Forward, Auto Dial, Make
Set Busy, and Not Configured.
!
Key Number:
The key number identifies the feature key position on the
telephone. Select the key you want for the feature you are
configuring.
Note: If the station is configured as Local and Remote, the key
number selected for the feature must match the feature key
position defined in the PBX voice port configuration.
Valid options are 0 through 15.
!
Key Data
Enter the DN to be used by the feature, if applicable.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
213
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Bridge Ports
Bridge Ports provide integration between the host PBX dialing plan and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit local dialing plan. To determine the correct Bridge
Port configuration for your particular Remote Gateway 9100 Series network,
you must first consider the resource usage of both the Remote Gateway 9150
unit and RLC. The examples on pages 216 through 219 illustrate the most
common resource usage scenarios in a Remote Gateway 9100 Series network.
Configure a Bridge Port TN on the host PBX as a voice port. For further
information, refer to the Reach Line Card Installation and Administration Guide
(NTP 555-8421-210).
Terminology
In the following configuration examples, a local call is defined as a call that
terminates on a Local Calling key of a digital telephone set connected to a
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. This call can be from another local user, or an
inbound call from the PSTN through the BRI circuits on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit. The primary DN is the first key on the digital telephone set connected
to Remote Gateway 9150 unit that has a DN provided by the host PBX.
Notes:
214
1.
Bridge Ports use the remote PBX DNs of Local and Remote digital
telephone sets connected to Remote Gateway 9150 units to transfer local
calls to the host PBX or to conference host PBX calls to local calls. At least
one remote PBX line key must be idle for the Bridge Port to function
properly.
2.
You must ensure that both sides of the connection release when the calling
party terminates a call on a Bridge Port in order for the Bridge Port to
release.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Configuration scenarios
The following configuration scenarios show options for enabling conference and
voice mail functionality at remote locations through Remote Gateway 9100
Series’ Bridge Port feature.
Local inbound calls ring on digital telephone sets connected to a Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and can be forwarded or conferenced to the host PBX
through the following configuration:
1
Configure and enable DN Discovery on the RLC.
Note: DN Discovery replaces the DN configured on the Local Calling key of
each digital telephone set connected to a Remote Gateway 9150 unit with
the DN configured for the first call-capable key programmed for that digital
telephone set on the host PBX, such as Key 0 or Key 1.
2
Configure the Local Calling keys of each digital telephone set connected to a
Remote Gateway 9150 unit as required.
Note: One MADN can only appear as a local key on one digital telephone
set connected to a given Remote Gateway 9150 unit. All other appearances
of this MADN on digital telephone sets connected to that same Remote
Gateway 9150 unit must be as host keys.
3
Configure the BRI trunk groups to alert the required local DNs when inbound
calls are received on the BRI lines.
4
Configure enough Bridge Ports to provide the level of call blocking desired.
For example, if four inbound BRI calls are forwarded to the host PBX then
you require four Bridge Ports.
5
Review the DSP channel requirements. Each Bridge Port call requires a
DSP channel and the associated bandwidth.
When a local call is presented and answered on a digital telephone set connected
to a Remote Gateway 9150 unit, you can then press the Transfer (or Conference)
key. The call indicator of the primary DN key then lights, you hear a host PBX
dialtone, and you can proceed to dial.
Note: Your primary DN is used to conference a local call. The Bridge Port
connects the local user to the host PBX, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit connects
your primary DN to the host PBX, and the Conference feature on the host PBX
ties it all together.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
215
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Scenario 1
1
BRI circuits alert local
key L2000 on
reception telephone
PSTN caller gets voice
mail greeting from
mailbox 5000
3
9150
Bridge
Port(s)
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
Bandwidth Connectivity
RLC
Voice
Mail
(8000)
WAN or PSTN
9150
4
Reception - DN 2000 with local key
L2000, call forward-no answers to
Phantom DN 5000 on PBX through
Bridge Port. Telephone also has an
Extended Message Waiting Key
(XMWK) of 5000.
Build a Phantom TN
on in the PBX
6
Voice Mail
System
host PBX
2
7
5
For example: DN=5000
forward 1 ring to voice
mail DN (8000)
The reception digital telephone set (L2000) answers all local BRI calls. Calls
that are not answered use a Bridge Port to transfer to a dedicated remote site
voice mailbox for the entire Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
!
Local BRI calls ring the local key(s) of a reception telephone (L2000).
!
These calls, when unanswered, call forward-no answer according to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s 9150 Port Configuration property sheet
settings to a PBX Phantom TN (5000).
!
This PBX Phantom TN forwards after one ring to the voice mail target DN
(8000).
!
A designated mailbox, such as mailbox number 5000, is built in voice mail.
!
An Extended Message Waiting Key (XMWK) of 5000 on the reception
telephone notifies the user of voice mail messages left from Remote
Gateway 9150 unit BRI calls.
Note: An XMWK can be added to any or all digital telephone sets attached
to a Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
216
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Scenario 2
1
BRI circuits alert local
key L2000 on
reception telephone
9150
Bridge
Port(s)
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
Bandwidth Connectivity
RLC
Voice
Mail
(8000)
WAN or PSTN
9150
4
5
2
Reception - DN 2000 with local key
L2000, call forward-no answers to
Phantom DN 5000 on the PBX through
a Bridge Port.
7
PSTN caller receives
voice mail greeting
from mailbox 2000
3
host PBX
Build a Phantom TN on
in the PBX
For example: DN=5000
forward 1 ring to voice
mail DN (8000)
Voice Mail
System
6
In voice mail,
build an
associated DN
or Alias for the
users prime DN
(2000)
All calls alert the reception telephone local key (L2000). Unanswered calls
transfer to the receptionists personal voice mailbox (2000).
!
Local BRI calls ring the local keys of a reception telephone (4000).
!
These calls, when unanswered, call forward-no answer according to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s 9150 Port Configuration property sheet
settings to a PBX Phantom TN (5000).
!
This PBX Phantom TN forwards after one ring to the voice mail target DN
(8000).
!
The voice mail system has a mailbox for DN 2000. You must add an
“Alias” (Octel Terminology) or “Associated/Extension DN” (Meridian
Terminology) of 5000 to the DN mailbox for 2000.
!
Once this call arrives in voice mail, the “Alias” or “Associated/Extension
DN” sends this PSTN call to the personal voice mailbox for DN 2000.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
217
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Scenario 3
1
BRI circuits alert local
key L2000 on
reception telephone
PSTN caller gets voice 7
mail greeting from
mailbox 3000
3
9150
Bridge
Port(s)
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
Bandwidth Connectivity
RLC
Voice
Mail
(8000)
WAN or PSTN
9150
4
5
DN 3000
host PBX
Build a Phantom TN
on in the PBX
2
Reception-DN 2000 with local key
L2000, transfers call to DN 3000. DN
3000 does not answer the call. Call
forward no-answer in the 9150 port for
DN 3000 call forwards to a Phantom
DN of 6000 through a Bridge Port.
For example: DN =
6000 forward 1 ring to
voice mail DN (8000)
Voice Mail
System
6
In voice mail,
build an
associated DN
or Alias for the
users prime DN
(3000)
All calls alert the reception telephone local key (L2000). The receptionist
answers these calls and then transfers them to other DNs on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. If the calls are not answered after the transfer, the calls are
placed in that users personal voice mailbox.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
218
Local BRI calls ring the local keys of a reception telephone (L2000).
When answered, these calls transfer to other DNs on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit (3000).
The user at DN 3000 is away and this call transfers to the user’s personal
voice mailbox.
This port in 9150 Port Configuration or DN 3000 is enabled to call forwardno answer to a Phantom DN (6000) configured in the PBX.
This PBX Phantom TN forwards after one ring to the voice mail target DN
(8000).
The voice mail system has a mailbox for DN 3000. You must add an
“Alias” (Octel Terminology) or “Associated/Extension DN” (Meridian
Terminology) of 6000 to the DN mailbox for 3000.
Once this call arrives in voice mail, the “Alias” or “Associated/Extension
DN” sends this PSTN call to DN 3000 personal voice mailbox.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Scenario 4
1
BRI circuits alert
prime PBX DN 9150
telephone(s)
6
2
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
Bandwidth Connectivity
9150
Bridge
Port(s)
RLC
Voice
Mail
(8000)
WAN or PSTN
9150
3
Tromboned call (Bridge
Port uses double
resources)
DN 3000
4 The call is
Local Configuration
on the 9150 ports
are set to non-PBX
dialing plan DNs.
PSTN caller gets voice
mail greeting from users
PBX DN mailbox
presented to the
9150 users primary
PBX DN key.
Voice Mail
System
host PBX
5
If the call is not answered
on the PBX, it receives
the same treatment as
any other call to that key.
All local inbound calls pass immediately to the host PBX and then are
“trombone” re-directed to the Remote Gateway 9150 units user’s primary PBX
DN key.
ATTENTION!
This scenario creates tromboning on every call and uses
double DSP and bandwidth resources. Not only does this
trombone add additional delay but you MUST also ensure
that the DSP and bandwidth resources allow for this
situation. The duel encoding of voice calls causes further
degradation of voice quality, which can be unacceptable to
some users. Additionally, with DN Discovery disabled,
Local Switchover cannot be used. Therefore, all calls
within the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s local office require
DSP and bandwidth resources.
!
Disable DN Discovery. This forces the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to use
local DNs (non-PBX DNs) and does not replace the local DN with the
primary PBX DN.
!
Configure enough Bridge Ports to provide the desired level of call
blocking. For example, four inbound BRI calls forwarded to the host PBX
require four Bridge Ports.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
219
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
!
Ensure that the DNs configured for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s local
ports are not the same as any host PBX DNs.
!
On Configuration Manager’s Trunk Group Configuration property sheet,
configure the user's primary PBX DN in one of the Local DN to Alert
fields.
Note: This configuration provides a local presence for a Remote Gateway 9150
unit user while maintaining full usage of the host PBX voice mail resources. For
example, an office can publish one of the BRI DNs (such as, 555-1212) as a
direct number. Calls to this DN alert the user’s Remote Gateway 9150 unit
digital telephone set. They pass from the BRI to the Bridge Port, trombone to the
host PBX, then to the primary DN on the user’s digital telephone set. If the
digital telephone set is busy, regular call treatment occurs, including directing
the call to the user's voice mailbox.
Analog port
The analog port (port 64) on a Remote Gateway 9150 unit is intended to provide
intra-office support according to these conditions:
!
The port provides the basic functionality of a POTS line, such as:
— dial tone
— DTMF tones
— local ringback
— other standard tones
— ring trip voltage for ringing a telephone or a fax machine
!
The port does not provide the following functionalities:
— disconnect supervision
— hook switch flash
— Message Waiting functionality
To make and receive local calls on the analog port or an ATA configured to a
Local and Remote port, configure a local DN to that port. You must then include
that port in a trunk group for it to receive inbound voice or fax calls. To place an
outbound voice or fax call on this port, you must enter the Local Calling SPRE
Code to obtain a local dial tone.
220
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Because an analog port does not have disconnect supervision, a user must place
the device connected to that port on-hook to end a call. If the user does not place
the device connected to the analog port on-hook to end a call, it does not ring for
subsequent calls.
Configuring a fax station
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit provides the ability to connect and use a fax
machine. You can define port 64 as the fax machine on the Remote Gateway
9150 unit in one of the following ways:
TO allow all fax calls to be
made or received through
the local PSTN only,
define the fax machine as a local device.
the host PBX,
define the fax machine as a remote device.
both the local PSTN and
the host PBX,
define the fax machine as a local and remote
device.
To place a local fax call on a Local and
Remote port, you must first enter the Local
Calling SPRE Code. The default Local
Calling SPRE Code is #8.
Note: When faxes are sent and received through the host PBX, they are sent
uncompressed (that is, they require 64 Kbps of bandwidth).
For instructions on configuring the fax port, refer to “Configuring the fax port”
on page 222.
For instructions on configuring a trunk group that rings only on the fax machine,
refer to “To configure trunk groups:” on page 236.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
221
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring the fax port
To configure the fax port:
1
Locate port 64.
2
On port 64, under Port Type, click on the option button of the call
processing capability the fax machine is to have:
3
!
Local: if only faxes through the local PSTN are allowed. This option
enables the Configure button for this port.
!
Remote: if only faxes through the host PBX are allowed.
!
Local and Remote: if both local and remote faxing are allowed. This
option enables the Configure button for this port so you can configure
local station features and keys.
Accept the default RLC Port assigned to this station, or enter a new RLC
port number.
Notes:
222
!
Generally, choosing matching Remote Gateway 9150 and RLC port
numbers simplifies configuration and administration.
!
For fax transmissions, the RLC port must be configured on the host PBX
with voice capability.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
4
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
If you selected Local or Local & Remote, click the Configure button for the
port you are configuring.
Result: The Local Profile Configuration dialog box displays.
5
In the Local Features: CPND field, enter a description (for example, FAX).
6
Enter the number used to ring the fax machine in the Local Features: DN
field.
7
Click on the Disable option button under Local Features for the following:
!
Auto Hold
!
Forward Busy/No Answer
!
Paging
!
Bridge Port (Local and Remote only)
8
If applicable, enter the digits that prevent a certain type of call from
proceeding in the Disabled Outbound Digit Sequence field.
9
Specify the positions of the Local Call Keys.
Note: Key 0 is not recommended for ports defined as Local and Remote.
Keys 8 and 9 are recommended. You can select Key 0 if the port is
configured as local only.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
223
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
10
Standard 3.1
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
11
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
224
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
BRI configuration
This topic shows you how to configure the BRI trunks. Refer to “Trunk group
configuration” on page 232 for a detailed explanation of BRI configuration
settings.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → BRI Configuration
BRI Configuration property sheet
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
225
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 ISDN BRI Interface information—
for Norway and Sweden only
EN 60950:1992 Annex ZB, Special National conditions, Clause 6.2.1.2 states
that in Norway and Sweden, supplementary insulation for a primary circuit is
required between a Telecommunications Network Voltage (TNV) circuit and
any circuit that has a connection to a protective earthing terminal.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit has the ability to support up to four ISDN BRI
circuits. To comply with the specification for supplemental insulation, an
isolation adapter must be placed between each of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
BRI inputs and the BRI lines from the service provider.
Isolation adapters are available from local vendors. You can also order the
adapters from Nortel as a merchandise item. The Nortel part number is
P0935714.
ISDN Line Type
The line type you select determines the options available in the Switch Type list
box and the Automatic default coding law (Companding Algorithm) used by the
ISDN BRI module being configured. To select a different coding law setting,
click on the Coding Law on the 9150 System Configuration property sheet.
Refer to “Companding Algorithm” on page 181 for further details.
Choose the ISDN line type according to the following table:
226
Line Type
Default Coding Law
Proprietary Switch
µ-law
National ISDN – 1
µ-law
National ISDN – 2
µ-law
National ISDN – 3
µ-law
National ISDN – 4
µ-law
Japan NTT
µ-law
France
A-law
Germany
A-law
ETSI EuroISDN
A-law
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Line Type
Default Coding Law
United Kingdom
A-law
Australia
A-law
DPNSS 1
µ-law
DASS 2
µ-law
Automatic TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifiers)
BRI modules must be used in a point-to-point configuration if using automatic
TEI assignments. They cannot be used in a multi-point configuration. Also,
make sure that no other ISDN devices are on the line.
Entering the BRI settings
To enter the BRI settings:
1
Complete the fields as described in “BRI Configuration field descriptions”
on page 228.
2
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
3
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
227
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
BRI Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
Module #
Select the number identifying the trunk interface module
that you are configuring.
Note: The number you select must match the module
position where the module has been installed.
Valid options are 4 through 7.
The default is four.
TEI Dropped
When the layer 2 drops, the TEI also drops and must be reacquired.
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want the TEI
to drop when the layer 2 drops.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want
the TEI to drop when the layer 2 drops.
The default is Disable.
Note: This is a CO implementation dependent
configuration.
228
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
ISDN Line Type
Select the type of ISDN line used in your country. The line
type you select determines the options available in the
Switch Type drop down list box and the Automatic default
coding law (Companding Algorithm) used by the ISDN
BRI module being configured. To select a different coding
law setting, select the Companding Algorithm on the 9150
System Configuration property sheet. For more
information on this setting, refer to “Companding
Algorithm” on page 185.
Choose the ISDN line type according to the following:
Line Type
Default Coding Law
Proprietary Switch
µ-law
National ISDN - 1
µ-law
National ISDN - 2
µ-law
National ISDN - 3
µ-law
National ISDN - 4
µ-law
Japan NTT
µ-law
France
A-law
Germany
A-law
ETSI EuroISDN
A-law
United Kingdom
A-law
Australia
A-law
DPNSS
µ-law
DASS
µ-law
The default is Proprietary Switch.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
229
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Switch Type
Select the type of ISDN switch used by your ISDN service
provider.
Valid options are Unknown, AT&T, Northern Telecom,
and Siemens.
The default is Unknown.
Note: Obtain this information from your ISDN service
provider.
Status (B channel 1
and B channel 2)
!
Click on the Enable option button to activate the ISDN
BRI channel.
!
Click on the Disable option button to deactivate the
ISDN BRI channel.
The default is Disable.
Type (B channel 1
and B channel 2)
Click on the type of connection option button—Local,
Remote, or Local & Remote.
!
Local: This trunk is used for local PSTN calls only.
!
Remote: This trunk creates a PSTN connection path to
the host PBX.
!
Local & Remote: This trunk can route local PSTN calls
and host PBX calls.
The default is Local & Remote.
Notes:
1. If your Remote Gateway 9150 unit has multiple BRI
modules, configure a maximum of one BRI module as
Remote Only if PSTN connections are required.
Configure all other BRI modules as Local only.
2. If your Remote Gateway 9150 unit has just one BRI
module, the BRI module can be configured as Local
only or Remote only. If local ISDN calls and remote
calls over PSTN are required, then MSN must be
enabled.
230
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
PSTN Number
(B channel 1 and
B channel 2)
Enter the full telephone number provided to you by your
ISDN service provider for this B-channel. Include access
codes, dialing prefix, and area code if necessary.
When entering the area code, always enter it directly
before the main telephone number. Do not use a
hyphen (-) as a separator because hyphens are reserved for
subaddressing.
The default is NC (Not Configured).
SPID (B channel 1
and B channel 2)
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) provided to you
by your ISDN service provider for this B-channel.
The default is NC (Not Configured).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
231
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Trunk group configuration
This section explains how to enable and create trunk groups for use with the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and how to configure your trunks to either connect
with the RLC at the host site or to place calls through the local PSTN. For more
information, refer to “Trunk groups” on page 234 and “Trunk access codes” on
page 234.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → Trunk Group Configuration
Trunk Group Configuration property sheet
232
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Trunks
A trunk is the straight connection between the PSTN and the Remote Gateway
9150 unit. Each ISDN BRI line (up to four are supported by the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit) provides two B-channels. In Remote Gateway 9150 unit
context, each B-channel equals one trunk.
Each B-channel can be defined as a local trunk, remote trunk, or both.
Note: Remote Gateway 9150 unit support MSN. If each B-channel has a unique
DN then the configuration of the first B-channel defines both B-channels. For
more information on MSN, refer to “Multiple Subscriber Numbering (MSN)” on
page 13.
Local trunk
The trunk is used to place local calls over the PSTN.
Remote trunk
A remote trunk is used to establish a connection to the RLC from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Local and remote trunk
A B-channel that is defined as both local and remote can be used to place calls
through both the local PSTN, and the RLC on the host PBX.
Primary trunk on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The primary trunk on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is one of the following:
!
the lowest-numbered B-channel defined as Remote only
!
the lowest-numbered B-channel defined as Local and Remote
A local call can cause blocking of an incoming host-controlled call on a Bchannel defined as Local and Remote, or prevent QoS transitions from
occurring. Therefore, Nortel recommends that you configure the primary trunk
as Remote only. For example, Module 4 first B channel.
Do not include the primary trunk in any trunk groups.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
233
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Trunk groups
A trunk group consists of one or more B-channels that are logically grouped.
You can configure up to eight trunk groups. For example, you can configure:
!
each B-channel as a different trunk group
!
two or more B-channels as a trunk group
A B-channel can be a member of more than one trunk group.
Trunk access codes
Trunk access codes are numbers that are used by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
to determine which trunk group to use when routing the call. You must define a
trunk access code for each trunk group.
For example, you can assign trunk access codes #61 and #62, as shown below:
Group 1
Group 2
Trunk 1
Trunk 3
Trunk 2
Trunk 4
Trunk access code: #61
Trunk access code: #62
If a user dials trunk access code #61, the call is routed (or processed) using
trunks 1 or 2. If trunks 1 and 2 are both busy, the user’s call is blocked (the user
receives a fast busy signal).
Note: All trunk access codes are automatically prefixed in Configuration
Manager with a pound sign (#) so that there are no conflicts with host PBX
dialing plans. Trunk access codes must be between one and three digits in length
in addition to the pound sign.
For a list of the default trunk access codes, refer to the “Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Dialing Plans on page 384.
234
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
ISDN configuration
In order to configure European ISDN, the PSTN must support the following
features:
!
Multiple Subscriber Numbering (MSN)
!
Two directory numbers (one per B channel)
The default configuration setting for BRI SPIDs is NC (Not Configured). Ensure
that no supplemental ISDN services, (for example, Call Waiting) are provided as
this may disrupt the data path and drop calls.
European ISDN
When configuring EuroISDN and ETSI variants, the BRI Configuration SPIDs
must be set to NC (not configured).
To change EuroISDN SPID values, complete the following procedure:
1
Go to Configuration Manager > 9150 > BRI Configuration.
2
Click on the Default button.
3
Configure the DNs, SPIDs, and ISDN line type.
Note: Only A-Law configuration is fully supported with ETSI configurations.
National ISDN
If you select National ISDN as the line type, there are minor protocol differences
between National ISDN -1, -2, -3, and -4. The Proprietary Switch line type is
more general and is an acceptable alternative if you encounter problems.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
235
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring trunk groups
To configure trunk groups:
1
Complete the fields as described in “Trunk Group Configuration field
descriptions” below.
2
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
3
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
236
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Trunk Group Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
Group No
Select a group number.
Valid options are 1 through 8.
The default is 1.
Status
!
Click on the Enable option button to activate the trunk
group.
!
Click on the Disable option button to deactivate the trunk
group.
The default is Disable.
Trunk Access Code
Enter the trunk access code that you want to assign to the
trunk group, or accept the default.
Note: The trunk access code is automatically prefixed with a
pound sign (#). This means users must dial the # before the
trunk access code when making an outgoing local call.
Maximum length: 1 to 3 digits in addition to the pound sign
The default is 61.
Local DNs to Alert: Not
Configured
Ensure that the Not Configured check box is cleared if you
wish to have incoming calls ring only on specific stations.
Enter the applicable extensions in the fields below the check
box. You can enter up to five extensions.
Note: You can create a private line by dedicating a trunk
group to one station only.
If you leave the fields blank, incoming calls received by this
trunk group rings on all telephones.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
237
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Field
Description
Trunk Group
B Channels
Click on the Trunk Group B Channels button.
Standard 3.1
Result: The Trunk Group B-Channel dialog box displays.
Complete the fields as follows:
!
Module: This field displays trunk interface module
numbers.
!
Device: This field displays the internal device number
for each B-channel provided by the module.
!
B Channel: This field displays B-channel numbers.
!
Check boxes: Click on the check box for each B-channel
you want to be part of this trunk group.
Note: A B-channel can be a member of more than one trunk
group.
Click on the OK button.
238
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
DSP configuration
This section shows you how to configure DSP resources on your Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. The Remote Gateway 9150 unit must provide the same
number of voice DSP channels as the maximum number of simultaneous calls
your remote services network supports. Each DSP module holds two DSP
devices. Currently, each DSP device holds four DSP channels. To add eight DSP
channels to your Remote Gateway 9100 Series system’s voice processing
capability, add one DSP application module.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → DSP Configuration
DSP Configuration property sheet
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
239
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Module identification
The upper portion of the DSP configuration property sheet displays fields that
identify the module you are currently configuring. In the Module Number drop
down box, choose the module position on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit that
the DSP module occupies. Module 0 represents the built-in DSP resources on
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit–the equivalent of one DSP application module.
Device configuration
The middle portion of the property sheet displays information describing the
DSP loads, and corresponding compression algorithms that you can select for
each DSP device.
Configuring DSPs
To configure DSPs on your Remote Gateway 9150 unit, complete the following
steps:
1
Access the DSP Configuration property sheet.
2
Complete the fields as described in “DSP Configuration field descriptions”
on page 241.
3
Click on the OK button
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
4
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
240
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
DSP Configuration field descriptions
Field
Description
Module Number
Select the number of the module that the DSP devices that
you want to choose compression algorithms for are located
on.
Note: Module 0 represents the main board (RLC or
Remote Gateway 9150 unit). Modules 1 and higher
represent plug-in modules.
The default is 0.
No of Devices
This is a read-only window displaying the number of DSP
devices on the DSP module you selected in the Module
Number field. Refer to “Configuring DSPs” on page 240
for an explanation of DSP devices versus DSP modules
and DSP channels.
Device Number 1 or 2
DSP Load
Select the DSP Load providing the collection of
compression algorithms that you would like loaded on the
Note: This description
selected DSP according to the compression algorithms
applies to both appearances displayed in the Compression Algorithms window.
of this field.
Valid options are G.729A, 911X, G.723_CONF, and
AUTO.
The default is AUTO.
Notes:
1. G.723_CONF allows you to record telephone calls using
IDVR. For more information regarding IDVR, contact
your TelStrat representative.
2. Selecting AUTO instructs the Remote Gateway 9150
unit to choose a default DSP load. This default load is
G.729A, depending on DSP channel availability.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
241
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Compression Algorithms
This read-only window displays the combination of
compression algorithms that are available in the DSP load
selected in the DSP Load drop down list.
Note: This description
applies to both appearances
The compression algorithm (G.711, G.726, or G.729A)
of this field.
used on calls to or from the Remote Gateway 9100 Series
unit stations is dictated by the compression setting
configured for the remote port that the call is processed
over.
242
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Auto upgrade configuration
Use the Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet to automatically or on a
scheduled basis query a predefined TFTP server and upgrade the firmware for
Remote Gateway 9100 Series units.
Getting there RLC → Configuration Manager → Auto Upgrade Configuration
Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
243
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring automatic upgrade
To configure automatic upgrade of your Remote Gateway 9150 unit, complete
the following steps:
1
Access the Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet.
2
Complete the fields as described in “Auto Upgrade Configuration field
descriptions” on page 245.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
4
Click on the Send button to update the Remote Gateway 9150 unit with the
new information.
Note: To save changes to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory,
select Upload → Save to Flash from the Menu Bar.
244
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Auto Upgrade Configuration field descriptions
Field
Status
Description
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to
automatically or on a scheduled basis query a
predefined TFTP server and upgrade the firmware for
Remote Gateway 9100 Series units.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want
to automatically or on a scheduled basis upgrade the
firmware for Remote Gateway 9100 Series units.
The default is Disable.
TFTP Server: IP Address
Enter the IP address of the TFTP server you want to query
for the upgrade.
Start Auto Upgrade
Click on the Start Auto Upgrade button to force the auto
upgrade process to begin regardless of the mode and time
configuration in the auto upgrade configuration.
Note: Use caution when forcing the auto upgrade process
as the system performs a self-reset on all units to make the
new firmware active once the download of new firmware
is complete.
Frequency
Click on the option button that identifies how often you
want the unit to perform the auto upgrade process:
!
Once a Day
!
Once a Week
!
Once a Month
Time
Select the time of day that you want the unit to perform the
auto upgrade process.
Day
Select the day when you want the auto upgrade process to
be performed (if you selected "Once a Week" in the
Frequency field).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
245
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Field
Description
Date
Select the date when you want the auto upgrade process to
be performed (if you selected "Once a Month" in the
Frequency field).
246
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Syslog configuration
Use the Syslog Configuration property sheet to enable syslog functionality and
configure up to three syslog server IP addresses for logging all events (display
logs) to the syslog server(s) you configure. This feature allows event logs
(display logs) to be retained if you reboot or restart the Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit. Remote Gateway 9100 Series supports the following syslog
collector software:
!
Kiwi Syslog Daemon - www.kiwisyslog.com
!
WinSyslog - www.winsyslog.com
!
tftp32d server - http://tftpd32.jounin.net
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager → Syslog Configuration
Syslog Configuration property sheet
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
247
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Configuring syslog functionality
To configure syslog functionality on your RLC, complete the following steps:
1
Access the Syslog Configuration property sheet.
2
Complete the fields as described in “Syslog Configuration field
descriptions” on page 249.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: Configuration Manager writes the changes to a temporary file on
the administration PC.
4
Click on the Send button to update the RLC with the new information.
Note: To save changes to the RLC’s Flash memory, select Upload → Save
to Flash from the Menu Bar.
248
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Syslog Configuration field descriptions
Field
Status
Description
!
Click on the Enable option button if you want to enable
the syslog functionality.
!
Click on the Disable option button if you do not want
to enable the syslog functionality.
The default is Disable.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the syslog server. Then, press the
Enter key or click on the -> button to add the IP address to
the Syslog Servers window. You can enter up to three
syslog server IP addresses.
Result: The IP address of the syslog server displays in the
Syslog Servers window.
Delete
To delete a syslog server IP address from the Syslog
Servers window, click on the specific IP address that you
want to delete and then click on the Delete button.
Facility Indicator
Select the facility indicator from the drop down box.
Valid options are Local Use 0 through 7.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
249
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Station configuration
This section explains how to configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit so that it
can:
!
route calls between the stations at your site and the host PBX
Each station is associated with a port on the RLC, and can be configured
with different capabilities.
!
place calls through the local PSTN or to other stations at the Remote
Gateway 9150 site
If resources on the RLC on the host PBX allow, you can configure up to
32 telephone stations plus one analog device (such as an analog telephone or fax
machine). This configuration assumes that none of the stations are equipped
with Analog Telephone Adapters (ATAs) or Meridian Communication Adapters
(MCAs).
Bridge Ports
Bridge Ports are proxy ports that represent local calls or inbound PSTN calls to
the PBX. When a local call on a Remote Gateway 9150 unit needs PBX
services, the Bridge Port obtains a PBX presence on behalf of the local call.
When configuring Bridge Ports:
!
Consider the number of simultaneous remote service telephone calls and
the number of bridge ports in use when determining PSTN or IP bandwidth
needs.
!
Remember that every local ISDN call reduces the PSTN bandwidth
available for remote service telephone calls and bridge ports when
determining needed PSTN bandwidth.
Notes: You can configure a maximum of sixteen (16) Bridge Ports. You must
configure at least one SCR key on the set for the Bridge Port feature to work.
250
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
You must configure Bridge Port parameters on both the host PBX and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. For every Bridge Port defined on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit you must configure an SCR key with voice capability on key
0 for that port on the host PBX. For more information on configuring SCR keys
on a host PBX refer to your PBX documentation.
Note: Local Only digital telephone sets do not support conference calls to a
local Remote Gateway 9150 unit or to a host PBX. Local Only digital telephone
sets can dial host PBX DNs using an enabled Bridge Port.
Configuring Bridge Ports reduces the total number of ports available from the
RLC.
Call processing capabilities and station settings
Each station can be defined as a telephone that can process:
!
local calls only
!
remote calls only
!
local and remote calls
Stations defined with local call capability are further defined with telephone
features and local call appearance keys. Stations that are defined with remote
call capability do not need to be further configured because they inherit their
features and call appearance keys from their associated port configurations on
the host PBX.
Local call capability
Stations defined as local can place and receive calls through the local PSTN or
to other stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site. Calls through the host PBX
are not allowed.
Local stations are not associated with RLC ports.
Remote call capability
Stations defined as remote are associated with RLC ports, and can place and
receive calls through the host PBX only. Calls through the local PSTN are not
allowed.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
251
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Local and remote call capability
Stations defined as Local and Remote are associated with RLC ports, and can
!
place and receive calls through both the host PBX and the local PSTN
!
place calls to other stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site
Outgoing calls are routed according to the call appearance key used to initiate
the call.
!
Calls initiated on the key defined as the host call appearance key (also
referred to as the primary DN key) are routed through the host PBX.
!
External calls initiated on the key defined as the local call appearance key
are routed through the local PSTN.
!
Internal calls initiated on the local call appearance key are routed to other
stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit distinguishes an incoming call by its calling line
identification, and rings it as follows:
!
on the host call appearance key if the call was routed through the host PBX
!
on the local call appearance key if the call was routed through the local
PSTN or if the call was a station-to-station call
Local station settings
When a station is defined with local capability, you can further configure the
station to:
!
enable or disable certain features (for more details, refer to “9150 port
configuration” on page 207)
!
disable outgoing dialing digit sequences (refer to “Disabled Outbound Digit
Sequence” on page 212)
!
identify local call appearance and feature key positions (refer to “Optional
Feature Keys” on page 213)
Remote station settings
When the station is defined with remote capability, you can assign it to a
specific port on the RLC (refer to “9150 port configuration” on page 207).
252
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Call appearance keys
The host call appearance key is defined for each station on the host PBX. It is
not defined for each station on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
The local call appearance keys, on the other hand, must be defined for each
station connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to allow:
!
users to place outgoing calls using Remote Gateway 9150 trunks
!
users to place station-to-station calls without host PBX control
!
incoming calls on Remote Gateway 9150 trunks to ring specific stations
The local call appearance keys must be left undefined in the host PBX
configuration to avoid indicator conflicts between the host PBX and the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. Only indicators defined as local call appearances are
blocked from the host PBX.
Any active Single Call Ringing (SCR)/Single Call No-ringing (SCN) key causes
the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit to allocate DSP and WAN bandwidth for
that port. This supports a privacy over-ride feature available with the SCR/SCN
key. To avoid using unnecessary bandwidth, Nortel recommends that you use
Multiple Call Ringing (MCR)/Multiple Call No-ringing (MCN) keys for
Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN) appearances at remote sites.
When to configure the local call appearance keys
The local call appearance key positions must be defined when a new station is
being configured with local capability, or when a request to change feature key
positions has been initiated.
Dial tone delay
Telephone sets connected to Remote Gateway 9150 units can experience
unexpectedly long dial tone delay. Specific delays depend on the number of
associated MADN appearances and the system activity at the time the call is
attempted. If you configure more than five to six MADNs on a single Remote
Gateway 9100 Series system, the signaling can become delayed and result in
sporadic ringing.
Note: This applies to all SCR, SCN, MCR, and MCN keys.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
253
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
When placing a telephone call, the dial tone is delayed from the time that the
user goes off-hook. The duration of this delay depends on the number of
simultaneous calls actually being set up. With Remote Gateway 9100 Series, the
dial tone delay is equal to the number of appearances, or calls, multiplied by
approximately 300 milliseconds (ms), or 0.30 seconds (s).
Therefore, when placing a call from a Remote Gateway 9100 Series MADN
with 10 appearances, expect a dial tone delay of approximately 3000 ms, or 3 s:
10 appearances x 300 ms = 3000 ms
The following table calculates approximate Remote Gateway 9100 Series dial
tone delay for three different scenarios:
Number of appearances
1
Call set-up duration
300 ms (0.30 s)
Remote Gateway 9100
Series dial tone delay
300 ms (0.30 s)
5
“
1500 ms (1.50 s)
10
“
3000 ms (3.00 s)
Note: If you start from an idle state, include time for ISDN line set-up, which
can be as much as an additional 4–6 seconds.
Associating trunk groups with local stations
Each trunk group can be defined to ring only specific stations. This feature
allows you to route certain types of calls (such as incoming calls on a 1-800
number) to specific stations.
MCR keys increase DSP requirements
In determining the DSP requirements of your Remote Gateway 9100 Series
system, your calculations must consider the number of ports containing MCR
keys. The over-riding concept to keep in mind when determining DSP
requirements is that each ringing or answered telephone call requires one DSP
channel.
254
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
The following example assumes one 16-port RLC with no additional DSP
Application Modules, for an RLC with eight DSP channels.
Example: While one telephone call is active, which uses one DSP channel, a
call to an MCR key assigned to eight Terminal Numbers (TNs) produces a DSP
allocation error. The seven available DSP channels are insufficient for this call.
A non-blocking configuration must include one DSP channel for each
simultaneously ringing or active digital telephone set that you want to support.
Private lines
A private line is a telephone line that is used by one person only. Calls that are
routed to the private line do not ring on any other station in your office. To
dedicate a private line to a station, configure a trunk group to ring incoming calls
only on that station.
If you are connecting a fax machine to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, then
configure a private line to the fax. Incoming calls on this line are routed directly
to the fax.
For instructions, refer to “Trunk group configuration” on page 232.
Calling permissions and restrictions
You can consider the ability to place certain types of calls from a station to be a
calling permission. Similarly, a certain type of call that is not allowed is a calling
restriction.
You can define both permissions and restrictions for each station.
Local and remote calling permissions
When you define a station as a local station, you are granting the station with
local calling permission. Calls can be made or received through the local PSTN
or to and from other stations. Calls through the host PBX are not allowed.
When you define a station as a remote station, you are granting the station with
remote calling permission. Calls can be made or received through the host PBX
only. Calls through the local PSTN are not allowed.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
255
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Standard 3.1
Exception: If the emergency service number is configured on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and you are using the PSTN to route calls, the dialed
emergency service number is routed through the local PSTN to the emergency
service. This ensures that the emergency service receives the correct calling
location information.
When you define a station as a local and remote station, you are granting the
station with the ability to place or receive calls through both the local PSTN and
the host PBX. Station-to-station calls are also allowed.
Call restriction
You can prevent certain types of calls from being made at a station by disabling
the digits that normally allow the call to proceed. This option is available for
stations designated as Local or both Local and Remote.
For example, if you want to prevent someone from calling a 1-976 number, enter
1976 as the digits to disable. For more information refer to “Disabled Outbound
Digit Sequence” on page 212, in the Local Profile Configuration field
description section.
256
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
ATA- and MCA-equipped stations and bandwidth requirements
Each station equipped with an MCA requires a full 64 Kbps of bandwidth to the
host PBX.
For stations equipped with ATA devices, the bandwidth used by calls processed
on those stations is as follows:
IF using
THEN
G.729A compression and the call the voice call is sent as 8 Kbps to the
is a voice call,
host PBX.
G.729A/Fax compression and the the fax call is sent as 9600 bps.
call is a fax call,
G.711 compression
(uncompressed) and the call is a
fax call
the fax call is sent as 64 Kbps.
the call is a local call,
the voice call is not compressed. It is
sent as 64 Kbps of data across the
ISDN BRI B-channel.
The following table identifies the number of MCAs or ATAs that can be
connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
IF the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is connected to
THEN you can connect
a 1-slot RLC
(supporting 16 users),
four MCAs or ATAs to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
a 2-slot RLC
(supporting 32 users),
seven MCAs or ATAs to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Notes:
!
You can have eight MCAs or ATAs installed if an analog telephone or fax
machine is not installed.
!
You can have up to 32 digital telephone sets, one fax machine, and seven
ATA/MCAs installed. However, only 32 simultaneous calls can be made.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
257
Configuring the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
258
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 6
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
In this chapter
Modes of operation
260
Placing and receiving calls
264
Indicator updates
268
Display messages
270
Telephone features operation
273
Going online and offline
277
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
259
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Modes of operation
Digital telephones at your Remote Gateway 9150 site can operate in the
following modes:
!
host-controlled
!
locally controlled
!
online to host PBX
!
offline from host PBX
Host-controlled mode
Host-controlled mode means that the host PBX controls the following:
!
some display messages that display on your telephone
!
indicator updates such as the message waiting indicator
!
calls that you receive from or place to someone at the host PBX site
In host-controlled mode, a voice path is established to the host PBX and
signaling messages are passed between the host PBX and the Remote Gateway
9150 unit.
Exception: If Local Switchover is enabled, and the station-to-station call is
completed through the host PBX, signaling messages are passed between the
host PBX and Remote Gateway 9150 unit normally. However, the voice path is
established by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit without consuming host
connection bandwidth. The host PBX is aware that the call is active and tracks
the status of the telephone set.
If the call cannot be completed through the host PBX, you hear a reorder dial
tone.
260
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Locally controlled mode
Locally controlled mode means that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit at your site
controls the following:
!
calls to other stations at this site
!
calls that are made to or received from your community through your local
telephone service provider
Local calling at the Remote Gateway 9150 unit always results in a call’s being
placed to the first port with the dialed number. Remote Gateway 9100 Series
does not support multiple DN appearances for local calling on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. Therefore, you cannot configure the same DN to local
calling keys on multiple digital telephone sets connected to one Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Refer to “DN Discovery” in the Reach Line Card Installation and
Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210) for further details.
In addition, local trunk numbers cannot be pre-dialed. You must wait for the
local trunk dial tone before dialing the number.
Relationship between host-controlled and locally controlled modes
Both the host-controlled and locally controlled modes can be used at the same
time. When placing or receiving calls, the call modes are controlled by the
following telephone keys:
!
the host call appearance key (also known as the primary DN key)
!
the local call appearance key (can sometimes be referred to as the
secondary DN key)
Host call appearance key
The host call appearance key is the main key you use to place and receive calls.
For example, if someone from Finance at Head Office calls you, the call rings on
this key. Similarly, if you need to call someone in Payroll at Head Office, you
place the call on this key.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
261
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Local call appearance key
The local call appearance key is the key you use to place and receive local calls.
For example, if your office is working overtime and everyone wants pizza, you
call the pizza delivery place on the local call appearance key. Similarly, you use
this key if you want to call one of your customers or suppliers or someone else at
your site.
Your telephone can have up to two local call appearance keys. Your system
administrator can tell you where these keys are and how they are labeled.
Online mode
When in online mode, calls initiated on the host call appearance key are directed
through the host PBX. Any long distance charges associated with calls placed
through the PBX over the PSTN are charged to the host PBX site. The display
on all digital telephones shows “Online Mode.”
Offline mode
When in offline mode, you cannot place calls through the host PBX over either
the IP network or PSTN. You can only place calls through your local telephone
service provider if your station has been granted locally controlled call
capability. The display on all digital telephones show “Offline Mode.”
Why offline mode is important
Your organization is concerned about telephone costs and, as such, wants to
ensure that the ISDN BRI line at your site is used for host-controlled calls during
business hours only. This is especially important when the ISDN BRI
connection between the host PBX and your site is defined as permanent (always
on) rather than on demand. A permanent ISDN BRI connection means the line
remains active all the time and incurs charges unless it is put into offline mode.
262
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
What controls the online and offline modes
The online and offline modes can be controlled by one or both of the following:
!
the online/offline schedule configured for your site on the RLC at the host
PBX
!
special prefix (SPRE) codes configured on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
at your site
Online/offline schedule at host PBX
If telephone service costs are an issue, your telecom network administrator
defines an online/offline schedule on the RLC port assigned to your site. The
times that your site is scheduled to be put into online or offline mode are
processed by the host PBX.
For example, if your normal business day is from 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. from
Monday to Friday, the schedule for your site instructs the host PBX to put all
stations at your site into online mode during those times. For all other time
periods, all stations are in offline mode and, therefore, disconnected from the
host PBX.
Note: If you initiate a call on a host call appearance key on any station, then full
functionality is allowed even if the time period is outside the automatic offline
periods defined on the RLC.
SPRE codes used at your site
If SPRE codes have been defined on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit at your site,
your site can control the times that stations are put into online or offline modes.
You do this by entering one of the following codes on any digital telephone at
your site:
!
Online SPRE code
!
Offline SPRE code
It is recommended that one person at your site be designated as the person
responsible for putting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit (and all stations) into
online mode at the beginning of the business day, and into offline mode at the
end of the day.
For information about going online or offline, refer to “Going online and
offline”, on page 277.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
263
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Placing and receiving calls
The way that you place outgoing calls depends on the call appearance key you
use to place the call.
The call appearance key used to receive calls depends on the source of the call.
Receiving incoming calls
The calling line identification (CLID) of an incoming call determines which call
appearance key accepts the call.
IF the call
THEN the call
information contains a Called
Party Number Display (CPND)
that matches a telephone number
assigned to one of the ISDN BRI
B-channels from your telephone
service provider,
is routed to the station based on the DNs to
Alert configuration on the trunk group that
includes the B-channel. If the DNs to Alert
fields are blank, the call rings on all
stations.
The call rings on the first local call
appearance key on all stations that have
been designated to receive calls from this
trunk.
Note: If the first call appearance key is
already busy with a call, the call is
presented on the second call appearance as
a call waiting. The indicator flashes and an
alert tone sounds.
comes in on the communication
is routed to the station based on the
path between the RLC and Remote Remote Gateway 9150 station to RLC port
Gateway 9150 unit,
assignment in the Remote Gateway 9150
unit’s ports configuration.
The call rings on the host call appearance
key.
information contains the DN of
another station at this site,
264
rings on the local call appearance key.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Methods for placing outgoing calls
You can place an outbound call from a Remote Gateway 9150 station in one of
the following ways:
!
Method 1: Pick up the handset.
This method automatically initiates a host-controlled call.
Note: If you then press the local call appearance key, the dial tone from the
host PBX is changed to locally controlled mode, and the host PBX
connection is released.
!
Method 2: Press a call appearance key.
When you press the host call appearance key, a host-controlled call is
initiated. When you press the local call appearance key, a locally controlled
call is initiated.
Placing host-controlled calls
To place host-controlled calls:
1
Pick up the handset or press the host call appearance key.
Result: A connection is established with the host PBX and you hear dial
tone.
Note: If a connection to the host PBX cannot be established within a timeout period or no resources are available to carry the call, you hear a reorder dial tone (a fast busy signal), and the following message displays on
the telephone display:
Release and Try Again
2
Dial the number of the party you want to call.
Result: The host PBX receives and processes the dialed digits and rings
the called party.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
265
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Placing outgoing locally controlled calls
To place outgoing locally controlled calls:
Note: You cannot use this procedure to place calls to the host PBX site. If you
try, you hear a reorder dial tone (a fast busy signal) and the following message
displays on your telephone display:
Release and Try Again
1
Do one of the following:
IF you are using
THEN
an analog or ATA-equipped
station,
do the following:
a Pick up the handset.
Result: A connection is
established with the host PBX and
you hear a dial tone.
b Dial the Local Calling SPRE code.
Result: The connection is
switched to the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and you hear a dial tone.
a digital telephone,
pick up the handset, and then press a
local call appearance key.
Result: A connection is established with
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and you
hear a dial tone.
2
Dial a trunk access code, if required.
Result: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit obtains a free trunk and you hear
another dial tone.
Note: If a trunk is not available, you hear a reorder dial tone (a fast busy
signal) and the following message displays on the telephone display:
Release and Try Again
3
Dial the number of the party you want to call.
Result: Your local telephone service provider receives and processes the
dialed digits and rings the called party.
266
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Calling another station at your site
To call another station at your site:
Place station-to-station calls through the host PBX. This allows all stations
configured as multiple appearance DNs (MADNs) to ring and provide access to
voice mail if the call is not answered.
If a connection cannot be established through the host PBX, then you can use the
local call appearance key to place the station-to-station call.
1
Pick up the handset or press the host call appearance key.
Result: A connection is established with the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and you hear a dial tone. The indicator beside the host call appearance key
lights.
2
Dial the extension of the party you want to call.
Result: The host PBX receives and processes the dialed digits, and rings
the station as well as any other stations that include the dialed DN as an
MADN appearance.
Note: The MADN stations could be located at another site (such as the
host PBX site).
IF the call is answered by
THEN
an MADN station at another
site,
a voice path to the host PBX is
established and the call proceeds.
a station at this site,
all signaling continues to be processed
by the host PBX. However, the actual
voice path is connected between the two
stations and the Remote Gateway 9150
unit. No trunk bandwidth back to the host
PBX is used for the voice path. Trunk
bandwidth previously reserved for the
call is released and made available to
other calls.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
267
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Indicator updates
Digital telephone indicators reflect the current status of the telephone. For
example, they identify when calls are waiting, active, or on hold, or, if your
office has voice mail, that messages have been received.
Indicators are updated as follows:
!
by the host PBX when a connection between the host PBX and Remote
Gateway 9150 unit is active
!
by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit for feature keys defined on stations with
local call capability
Host-controlled indicator updates
Indicators for host-controlled features are updated automatically by the host
PBX each time:
!
an incoming call is received by your site from the host PBX
!
an outgoing call is made from your site through the host PBX
!
a message waiting indicator (MWI) update is received by someone at your
site
Note: If the PSTN is being used and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
configured with a permanent (always on) connection to the host PBX, the ISDN
BRI service is active and telephone indicators are always updated.
If the IP network is being used to route calls, indicators are always updated.
268
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Locally controlled indicator updates
The following indicators are updated by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit (that is,
these indicator updates are locally controlled):
!
host and local call appearance key indicators
The indicator lights when the handset is taken off-hook, or when you press
the call appearance key to go off-hook.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit passes key presses and the on- or
off-hook status for the host call appearance key to the host PBX.
!
Handsfree
!
Mute
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
269
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Display messages
This section describes the messages that can display on your digital telephone.
Message descriptions
Message
Description
Going Offline in
30 Secs
This message warns you that all digital telephones at
this site are about to go offline in the number of
seconds indicated.
Going Offline in
20 Secs
Going Offline in
10 Secs
Hostless Mode
If any calls are active, they are disconnected when
the offline mode is activated.
To override, enter the Online SPRE code.
The connection to the host PBX cannot be
established. The host PBX might be temporarily
unavailable.
You can still place local calls by using one of the
local call appearance keys.
Note: If Hostless Mode persists, contact your system
administrator.
Logged In
If this message displays on your station, then your
station is associated with a multi-user or dynamic
pool port on the RLC, and it is in logged on status.
Note: This message displays for approximately ten
seconds.
270
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Message
Description
Offline Mode
You cannot place calls through the host PBX over
either the IP network or the PSTN.
Note: If you need to place a call through the host
PBX while in offline mode, press the host call
appearance key. This establishes a connection to the
host PBX and puts all digital telephones at your site
into online mode.
Online Mode
You can place and receive calls through the host
PBX.
Port Already in
Use
If this message displays on your station, then your
station is associated with a multi-user or dynamic
pool port on the RLC.
This message displays if the port that you are
attempting to use is already being used by someone
else.
Port Not Logged
In
If this message displays on your station, then your
station is associated with a multi-user or dynamic
pool port on the RLC, but it is in logged off status.
QoS Recovery
The Quality of Service (QoS) has returned to normal
on the IP network and your active call is being
automatically moved to the IP network.
QoS Transition
The QoS has degraded on the IP network and your
active call is being automatically moved to the
PSTN.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
271
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Message
Description
Release and Try
Again
All Remote Gateway 9150 trunks are busy or there
are not enough DSP resources to process the call.
Try again at a later time.
Note: Ensure the call you are placing is initiated
from the appropriate call appearance key:
Bandwidth Limit
!
host call appearance key: to call someone at the
host PBX site
!
local call appearance key: to place a local PSTN
call or to call another station at your site
If this message displays on your station and you hear
a fast busy signal when you attempt to place a call,
then there is insufficient PSTN bandwidth.
Wait a moment, and then try your call again.
DSP Limit
If you see this message and hear a fast busy signal
when you attempt to place a call, then Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) resources are all busy.
Wait a moment, and then try your call again.
Call Failure
If you see this message and hear a fast busy signal
when you attempt to place a call, then the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit failed to establish the PSTN
connection to the RLC.
Wait a moment, and then try your call again.
272
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Telephone features operation
This section describes how to use the following digital telephone features in
host- or locally controlled modes:
!
emergency service calls
!
Conference
!
Hold
!
Call Forward
!
Call Waiting
!
Paging
!
Call Transfer
Note: The Conference and Call Forward features are supported for
host-controlled calls only.
Emergency service calls
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit allows an emergency number (for example, 911
in North America) to be programmed by your system administrator.
If the PSTN is used to route calls, and someone dials this emergency service
number on any station that is connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, the
call is processed by your local telephone service provider.
You can initiate the emergency service call on either the host call appearance
(primary DN) key or local call appearance key. You do not have to dial a trunk
access code first.
ATTENTION!
If only the IP network is being used to route calls, you must
use a telephone that is directly connected to the PSTN to
place an emergency service call. If you place the call on a
station that is connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
the call is routed through the host PBX, which can in a
different city.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
273
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Hold
How Hold works in host-controlled mode
When you press Hold on a host-controlled call, the holding party receives the
Hold treatment defined on the host PBX. For example, if the host PBX is
configured to play music to holding parties, then the holding party hears music.
You can press any available call appearance key to place a new call.
How Hold works in locally controlled mode
Normally, you put a call on hold by pressing Hold. However, you can also put a
locally controlled call automatically on hold by pressing the other local call
appearance key. To use this feature, Auto Hold must be enabled on your station.
If Auto Hold is not enabled, and you press a local call appearance key while a
call is active on the other local call appearance key, that call is disconnected.
When you press Hold on a locally controlled call, the holding party hears
silence. You can press any available call appearance key to place a new call.
Call Waiting
Since the Remote Gateway 9150 unit does not use host-controlled indicators and
the locally controlled indicators are not defined on the host PBX, there are never
any indicator conflicts when a call is presented to the station.
However, since the host PBX is not aware when locally controlled calls are
active, the host PBX might try to present a call and ring your station while you
are busy with a locally controlled call. The Remote Gateway 9150 unit always
checks the status of your station before ringing it. If your station is busy with a
call, the alert tone is sounded instead.
How Call Waiting works in host-controlled mode
If you are busy with a host-controlled call, incoming calls are handled as
follows:
274
!
An incoming host-controlled call is directed to the call waiting key by the
host PBX.
!
An incoming locally controlled call flashes the local call appearance key
indicator and sounds the alert tone.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
How Call Waiting works in locally controlled mode
If you are busy with a locally controlled call, incoming calls are handled as
follows:
!
An incoming host-controlled call flashes the host call appearance key and
sounds the alert tone.
!
An incoming locally controlled or station-to-station call flashes the next
available local call appearance key and sounds the alert tone. If both local
call appearance keys are busy, then the call is not presented to your station.
Call Transfer
Call transfer works the same way in both host- and locally controlled modes.
The only difference is the treatment the holding party receives, depending on
whether the original call is a host-controlled or locally controlled call.
A call on the host call appearance key can be transferred:
!
to another station that has remote call capability at this site
!
to a station at the host PBX site
A call on the local call appearance key can only be transferred to another station
at this site. You cannot transfer a call on the local call appearance key to a
station at the host PBX site.
For both, you can do an announced or unannounced (blind) transfer.
Transferring a call
To transfer a call:
1
Press the Transfer key.
Result: The active call is placed on hold and you hear a dial tone.
2
Dial the number that you want to receive the transferred call.
3
Press the Transfer key again to complete the transfer.
Note: You can press the Transfer key while the call is still ringing, or after
the called party answers.
When you transfer a local call using the Trunk Access code to dial an outbound
local call, the corresponding voice path is not established. Remote Gateway
9100 Series does not support this function.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
275
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Conference
The Conference feature is supported for host-controlled calls only. You cannot
conference in someone who must be called through the local PSTN.
Placing a conference call
To place a conference call:
1
Press the Conference key.
Result: The active call is placed on hold and you hear a dial tone.
2
Dial the number of the party you want to conference in.
3
When the called party answers, press the Conference key again to
complete the conference.
Call Forward
Remote Gateway 9100 Series supports Call Forward for host-controlled calls.
When you enable DN Discovery, your Remote Gateway 9100 Series system
supports Call Forward for locally controlled calls, as well.
Paging
When you press a local call appearance key, and then dial the Paging SPRE
code, you can announce a page to all other stations at your site.
Note: You can disable Paging for any station.
276
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Going online and offline
Stations at the Remote Gateway 9150 site operate in either online mode or
offline mode. This is controlled by one or both of the following:
!
SPRE codes to manually toggle all stations at your site between online and
offline modes
!
an online/offline schedule on the host PBX to automatically toggle all
stations at your site between online and offline modes
For a description of the online and offline modes, refer to “Modes of operation”
on page 260.
Using the SPRE code to put all stations into online mode
To use the SPRE code to put all stations into online mode:
1
Lift the digital telephone handset, or press one of the local call appearance
keys.
2
Press the octothorpe key (# in North America) followed by the Online SPRE
code.
Note: To learn this code, consult with your system administrator.
Result: The connection to the host PBX is initiated and negotiated with the
host PBX. During this negotiation period (up to 5 seconds), stations at your
site cannot be used for host-controlled calls. When negotiation is
completed and connection to the host PBX has been established, Online
Mode displays on the telephone display.
Using the SPRE code to put all stations into offline mode
To use the SPRE code to put all stations into offline mode:
1
Lift the digital telephone handset, or press one of the local call appearance
keys.
2
Dial the pound key (# in North America) followed by the Offline SPRE code.
Note: To learn this code, consult with your system administrator.
Result: Offline Mode displays on the digital telephone set.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
277
Using Remote Gateway 9150 stations
Standard 3.1
Overriding an automatic offline event from the host PBX
To override an automatic offline event from the host PBX:
If the host PBX attempts to process an offline event while you are on a hostcontrolled call, you are alerted by both an audible alert and a display message
indicating that you are about to go offline in 30, 20, or 10 seconds. If you ignore
this warning, your call will be disconnected.
To prevent your call from being disconnected, enter the online SPRE code. You
can do this without putting your call on hold first. The online SPRE code cancels
the offline event, leaving all stations online until the next offline event occurs.
278
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 7
Administration
In this chapter
Changing the administration password
280
Creating a backup configuration file
282
Restoring the configuration
285
Display logs
290
Statistics screens
294
Verifying the firmware and software version
335
Obtaining the latest upgrade file
337
Performing a firmware upgrade
338
Performing a software upgrade
346
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
279
Administration
Standard 3.1
Changing the administration password
Two layers of password security protect the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
configuration. To secure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s configuration so that
only those with passwords unique to the unit can make configuration changes,
alter the following items:
!
Configuration Manager password
This password prevents unauthorized users from performing offline
configuration changes.
!
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s password
This password prevents unauthorized users from performing online
changes of the configuration residing in the RLC’s Flash memory.
Note: Nortel recommends that you change these passwords for logging on to
both Configuration Manager and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Make sure that
you record the password and store it in a safe, secure location. If you forget or
lose the password, contact your Nortel customer support representative.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Changing the Configuration Manager password
To change the Configuration Manager (local) password:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Change Password → Local.
Result: The Change Password dialog box displays, similar to the following:
280
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
2
Complete the fields in the Change Password dialog box.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Password changed successfully dialog box displays.
4
Click on the OK button.
Changing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit password
To change the Remote Gateway 9150 unit (node) password:
ATTENTION!
1
Do not change the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s password
until the system is up and working.
From the Menu Bar, choose Connect → Change Password → Node.
Result: The Change Password displays, similar to the following:
2
Complete the fields in the Change Password dialog box.
3
Click on the OK button.
Result: The Board Password Changed Successfully dialog box displays.
Note: This means that Configuration Manager has written the password to
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory.
4
Click on the OK button.
5
From the Menu Bar, choose Upload/Download → Save to Flash.
Result: Configuration Manager updates the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
memory with the new password.
6
Restart the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
281
Administration
Standard 3.1
Creating a backup configuration file
Create a backup copy of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s configuration by
downloading the configuration from Flash memory to a text file on your
administration PC. Nortel recommends that you create a backup of your
configuration file whenever you make configuration changes or after you
perform a firmware upgrade.
Storing backup configuration files
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit is an extension of the telecommunications and
data network. It is extremely important that you keep a backup copy of the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s configuration. If the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
Flash memory or configuration becomes corrupted or is lost, you can easily
restore it.
Store the configuration file in a safe, secure location, such as on backup tape or
other media that is stored offsite.
Nortel recommends that you keep the backup files indefinitely.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
282
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Creating the backup file
To create the backup file:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Upload/Download → Download Configuration.
Result: The Download Configuration dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Choose the mode you want to use for the file transfer according to the
following table:
IF you wish to save the
configuration file to
THEN do the following:
the administration PC,
Click on the Dump option button.
a different location on the IP
network,
1 Click on the TFTP option button.
Result: This enables the IP
Address fields.
2 Enter the IP address of the PC that
you want to save the configuration
file on.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
283
Administration
Standard 3.1
3
Click on the Browse button and navigate to the folder where you want to
keep the configuration text file.
4
Enter a name for the file in the File name field.
Note: This configuration file becomes your backup file, so ensure the file
name is meaningful. The file name’s extension must be .TXT.
5
Click on the Download button.
Result: The Download configuration dialog box closes, and the following
message displays in the status bar at the bottom of the screen:
Downloading Config From Board
When the download is complete, the Downloaded Configuration Data
dialog box displays, similar to the following:
6
Click on the OK button.
Note: Flash downloads to remote M39xx telephones can take twice as long
compared to when these telephones are connected directly to a standard Nortel
digital line card (XDLC).
284
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Restoring the configuration
Restore the configuration to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Flash memory by
uploading a configuration text file from a PC on the same network as the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. To do this, perform the upload over the IP network
using the TFTP protocol.
Before you begin
Before you can upload the configuration file to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit,
you must complete the following steps:
1
Start the TFTP server application.
2
Ensure that the TFTP base directory points to the location of the
configuration file.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
285
Administration
Standard 3.1
Uploading a configuration file over the IP network
To upload a configuration file over the IP network:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose → Upload/Download → Upload Configuration.
Result: The Upload Configuration dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the IP Address fields.
Note: Since the TFTP server application is running on your administration
PC, this is the IP address of the administration PC.
286
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
3
Administration
Click on the Browse button.
Result: The Open dialog box displays, similar to the following:
4
Ensure the Files of type drop down box shows Text File (*.TXT).
5
Navigate to the folder containing the configuration file.
6
Select the configuration file, and then click on the Open button.
Result: The Upload Configuration dialog box displays with the file you
selected shown in the File Name field.
7
Click on the Upload button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
287
Administration
Standard 3.1
The middle of the Upload Configuration dialog box displays status
messages relating to the upload. The following is an example.
CAUTION
Risk of incorrect operation due to partial configuration.
.
Do not interrupt the configuration upload. If you interrupt the
configuration upload, this results in an incomplete
configuration in the Remote Gateway 9150 unit's database.
If the configuration upload is interrupted, repeat this
procedure immediately.
288
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
IF the upload
THEN
is successful,
the following message displays:
CONFIG UPLOAD SUCCESSFUL... USE
SAVECFG TO UPDATE FLASH.
Proceed to step 8.
fails,
the following message displays in the middle of
the Upload Configuration dialog box:
CONFIG UPLOAD FAILED
For further instructions, refer to Chapter 8,
“Troubleshooting.”
8
On the Upload Configuration dialog box, click on the Save to Flash button.
Result: The FLASH CONFIG dialog box displays, similar to the following:
9
Click on the Yes button.
Result: The following message displays in the status bar at the bottom of
the screen:
Saving to Flash in Progress
When the save is finished, the following message displays in the middle of
the Upload Configuration dialog box:
CONFIGURATION IS UPDATED INTO FLASH...
10
Click on the Close button.
11
Restart the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: For instructions, refer to “Performing a system restart or shutdown”
on page 169.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
289
Administration
Standard 3.1
Display logs
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit keeps track of system performance through the
maintenance of display logs. Each line, or display log, represents a separate
action completed by the unit. Refer to Appendix D, “Display log definitions,” or
Configuration Manager online Help for a complete listing of all display logs and
the condition indicated by each.
Use the display logs when troubleshooting system problems. Click on the Save
Report button to print the display logs to a text file, or you can copy the
information from the Display Logs window, and paste it into a text file.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Viewing display logs
From the menu, choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Display Logs.
Result: You can view the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s display logs in a window
similar to the following. You can use the scroll bar to browse through the logs.
290
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Printing the display logs to a file
If you request technical support, your support representative can ask you to
provide a copy of the logs. To recreate the log in a file on your administration
PC, follow this procedure:
1
After displaying the logs using the procedure explained under “Viewing
display logs” on page 290, click on the Save Report button on the Display
Logs window.
Result: The Save As dialog box displays, similar to the following:
2
Navigate to the folder where you want to store the log file.
3
Enter a name for the configuration in the File name field.
4
Click on the Save button.
Result: Configuration Manager saves the logs to a text file in the location
indicated in the Save As dialog box.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
291
Administration
Standard 3.1
Changing the size of Remote Gateway 9150 unit logs
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit retains a maximum of 1000 display logs, each
requiring one line of text. When the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s display logs
reach 1000 lines, new display logs overwrite existing display logs on a first in,
first out basis. If you want to change the number of display logs retained by the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Resize Logs.
Result: The Resize Log dialog box displays, similar to the following:
Note: “Maximum logs” refers to the number of text lines maintained in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit system log. The log holds a maximum of 1000
text lines, or the 1000 most recent display logs, when it shipped from the
factory.
292
2
Enter the maximum number of display logs you want the Remote Gateway
9150 unit to keep in the Maximum Logs field.
3
Click on the OK button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Clearing logs
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit allows you to delete unneeded information by
clearing the display logs that the Remote Gateway 9150 unit keeps. To discard
or clear display logs that are no longer useful:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Clear Logs.
Result: The CLEAR LOGS dialog box displays, similar to the following:
IF you select
THEN
No,
the Clear logs dialog box closes and the logs remain
as they are.
Yes,
!
the Remote Gateway 9150 deletes its stored
display logs.
!
the LOGS cleared dialog box displays, similar
to the following:
Click on the OK button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
293
Administration
Standard 3.1
Statistics screens
All statistics screens provided by the Alarms/Stats/Logs menu, function
primarily to help you obtain information to provide to technical support
personnel, upon request.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Trunk Connection Statistics
Trunk Connection Statistics show you the PSTN trunk usage for the selected
remote site, similar to the following:
294
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
To display the Trunk Connection Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the
Trunk Connection Statistics screen”. To obtain the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Trunk Connection Statistics screen, refer to “Trunk Connection
Statistics field descriptions” on page 296.
Displaying the Trunk Connection Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Trunk Connection Statistics from the Menu Bar to
display the Trunk Connection Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Trunk Connection Statistics screen, similar to the
example on page 294.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Trunk Connection Statistics on the Close button.
screen,
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Trunk Connection Statistics
screen,
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
295
Administration
Standard 3.1
Trunk Connection Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics on the Trunk Connection Statistics
screen:
Statistic
Description
Trunk Number
RLC - Identifies the Network Port number used for the
call.
The third pair of numbers (the third item in the triplet)
corresponds to the port on the RLC.
9150 - Identifies the ISDN BRI module and B-channel
used for the call.
911x - Identifies the only trunk available to the remote
unit with all zeroes.
Status
Identifies the current status of the trunk.
Valid values are Active and Idle.
Call Type
Identifies whether the call is a local call or a remote
signaling call.
Valid values are Local and Signaling.
Remote ID
Identifies the remote unit involved in the call.
Called Number
Identifies the remote DN regardless of who initiated
the call.
Start Time
Identifies the time that the last call on this trunk began.
Close Time
Identifies the time that the last call on this trunk ended.
If the trunk is active, this statistic displays “NA”.
Duration
296
Identifies the amount of time taken for the call.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Bandwidth Connection Statistics
Bandwidth Connection Statistics allow you to see how much bandwidth is
actually being used. These statistics help you determine if you need to add more
bandwidth on the PSTN or IP network connections. They show the amount of
bandwidth all remote units connected to the logged-on RLC have available to
them, similar to the following:
To display the Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the
Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen” on page 298. To obtain the definitions
for the statistics presented on the Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen, refer
to “Bandwidth Connection Statistics field descriptions” on page 299.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
297
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → BW Connection Statistics from the Menu Bar to
display the Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Bandwidth Connection Statistics, similar to the
example on page 297.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Bandwidth Connection
Statistics screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Bandwidth Connection Statistics
screen,
298
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Bandwidth Connection Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics on the Bandwidth Connection
Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Remote Unit Number Identifies the remote unit that initiated the call.
Signaling Status
Identifies whether a connection is up on this unit.
Valid values are Active and Idle.
No of Voice Calls on
IP
Identifies the number of calls in progress on this unit’s
IP connection.
No of Voice Calls on
PSTN
Identifies the number of calls in progress on this unit’s
PSTN connection.
Used IP BW
Identifies the IP bandwidth in use on this unit.
Used Trunk BW
Identifies the PSTN bandwidth in use on this unit.
Total Up Trunk BW
Identifies the total PSTN bandwidth up and available to
this unit.
IP QoS Status
Identifies the Quality of Service (QoS) level on this
unit’s IP connection.
Valid values are Good and Bad.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
299
Administration
Standard 3.1
Caller Info Statistics
Caller Info (Information) Statistics show you the types of calls being made (IP
or PSTN) and how often QoS transitions occur. Use these statistics to help you
determine if voice QoS on your IP network is stable. The Caller Info Statistics
screen is similar to the following:
To display the Caller Info Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the Caller Info
Statistics screen” on page 301. To obtain the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Caller Info Statistics screen, refer to “Caller Info Statistics field
descriptions” on page 302.
300
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the Caller Info Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Caller Info Statistics from the Menu Bar to display
the Caller Info Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Caller Info Statistics screen, similar to the example on
page 300.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Caller Info Statistics screen, on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Caller Info Statistics screen,
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
301
Administration
Standard 3.1
Caller Info Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics on the Caller Info Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Connection ID
Identifies the sequential number of the call processed
by the remote unit in relation to all calls ever
processed by that unit.
Remote ID
Identifies the Unit ID of the remote site that was
involved in the call. Local calls on a Remote Gateway
9150 unit result in a 0 in this field.
Current Media
Identifies whether the call took place over the PSTN or
IP network.
Type
Identifies the type of call.
Valid values are Signaling, Voice, and Local.
Priority
Identifies the priority setting of the involved trunk.
Valid values are PSTN Only, IP Only, High, and
Normal.
302
Call BW
Identifies the amount of bandwidth used by the call.
Start Time
Identifies the time that the connection initiated.
Transitions to PSTN
Identifies the number of times the RLC moved the call
to the PSTN.
Transitions to IP
Identifies the number of times the RLC moved the call
to the IP network.
Last Transition to
PSTN
Identifies the last time the RLC moved the call from the
IP network to the PSTN.
Last Transition to IP
Identifies the last time the RLC moved the call from the
PSTN to the IP network.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Hardware Statistics
Hardware Statistics provide information concerning the trunk interface or DSP
application modules that are installed on the logged-on Remote Gateway 9150
unit. Use these statistics to determine which module positions are populated and
the type of modules present in those positions. The Hardware Statistics screen is
similar to the following:
To display the Hardware Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the Hardware
Statistics screen” on page 305. To obtain the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Hardware Statistics screen, refer to “Hardware Statistics field
descriptions” on page 306.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
303
Administration
Standard 3.1
Information concerning the trunk interface and DSP application modules that
are installed on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit also displays in the Startup
Information dialog box. This dialog box includes the following information:
The column
contains the following information:
SLOTNO
the slot number occupied by the application module.
Valid options are 1, 2, 3, and 4.
STATUS
whether the slot contains a functioning DSP application
module.
Valid options are:
!
EQUIPPED—a working DSP application module is in
the slot
!
OUT SERVICE—a faulty application module is in the
slot
!
UNEQUIPPED—no application module is in the slot
TYPE
the type of application module in the slot.
VERSION
the version of application module in the slot.
This dialog box displays as a result of a successful attempt to log on to a
particular Remote Gateway 9150 unit. You can locate the information contained
in the preceding table by using the scroll bar available in the System Information
section of the dialog box. Refer to page 160 for further details.
304
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the Hardware Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Hardware Statistics from the Menu Bar to display
the Hardware Statistics screen:
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Hardware Statistics screen, similar to the example on
page 303.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Hardware Statistics screen, on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Hardware Statistics screen,
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
305
Administration
Standard 3.1
Hardware Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics on the Hardware Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Module No
Identifies the DSP application module's position on the
Remote Gateway 9150 or RLC motherboard.
Status
Identifies whether there is a functional DSP application
module in the position identified in the Module No field.
Valid values are Equipped and Unequipped. Equipped
means that a DSP application module is installed in
the module position and Unequipped means that there
is not a DSP application module installed in the
module position.
306
Module Type
Identifies the part number of the hardware installed in
the module position.
Version
Identifies the version of DSP application module
installed in the module position.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
DSP Statistics
DSP Statistics provide information about the DSP application modules installed
on the logged-on Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Use this screen to determine the
module positions that are populated, what type of DSP those positions contain,
and the functionality provided by each. The DSP Statistics screen is similar to
the following:
To display the DSP Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the DSP Statistics
screen” on page 308. To obtain the definitions for the statistics presented on the
DSP Statistics screen, refer to “DSP Statistics field descriptions” on page 309.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
307
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the DSP Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → DSP Statistics from the Menu Bar to display the
DSP Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the DSP Statistics screen, similar to the example on page
307.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the DSP Statistics screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the DSP Statistics screen,
308
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
DSP Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics on the DSP Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Single Digit Device
ID
Identifies an internal sequence number for indexing
this DSP device among all others on the RLC.
Module Number
Identifies this DSP Application Module’s module
number on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Valid values are 0, 1, 2, and 3.
Device Number
Identifies the DSP device that processed the call.
In Service
Identifies any voice channels operating on this DSP
application module.
Total MIPS
Identifies the total millions of instructions per second
(MIPS) capacity for this DSP device.
Available Mips
Identifies the millions of instructions per second
(MIPS) currently available on this DSP device.
Total Channels
Identifies the total channel capacity for this DSP
device.
Total Voice Channels Identifies the total voice channel capacity for this DSP
device.
Available Voice
Channels
Identifies the number of unused voice channels on this
DSP device.
Total Modem
Channels
Identifies the number of channels on this DSP device
that can transmit modem calls.
Available Modem
Channels
Identifies the number of unused channels on this DSP
that can transmit modem calls.
Total Flex Channels
Identifies the number of channels on this DSP that can
provide multiple functionalities.
Available Flex
Channels
Identifies the number of channels on this DSP
currently available to provide multiple functionalities.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
309
Administration
310
Standard 3.1
Column
Description
Total Tones
Channels
Identifies the number of channels on this DSP that can
transmit tones.
Total Reserved
Channels
Identifies the number of special purpose channels on
this DSP reserved for internal use.
Name
Identifies the name of the DSP load, that is, the
combination of DSP algorithms, on the DSP
application module.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Ethernet Interface Statistics
Ethernet Interface Statistics provide information about the connection between
the IP network and the logged-on Remote Gateway 9150 unit that is achieved
over the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s Ethernet interface. The Ethernet Interface
Statistics screen is similar to the following:
To display the Ethernet Interface Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the
Ethernet Interface Statistics screen” on page 312. To review the definitions for
the statistics presented on the Ethernet Interface Statistics screen, refer to
“Ethernet Interface Statistics field descriptions” on page 313.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
311
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the Ethernet Interface Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Ethernet Interface Statistics from the Menu Bar to
display the Ethernet Interface Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Ethernet Interface Statistics screen, similar to the
example on page 311.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Ethernet Interface Statistics on the Close button.
screen,
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Ethernet Interface Statistics
screen,
312
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Ethernet Interface Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics found on the Ethernet Interface
Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Channel
Identifies the Ethernet device that the statistics on that
line apply to.
The valid values are is1.
LAN Drv
Identifies the LAN driver used by the call.
Admin
Identifies the administrative state of the port.
Valid values are 1 (Enabled) and 0 (Disabled).
Oper
Identifies the operational state of the port.
Valid values are 1 (Up) and 0 (Down).
IfcType
Identifies the interface type used by the call.
IfcNo
Identifies the Ethernet interface used by the call.
The valid value is 1 (CLAN).
MTUlen
Identifies the Maximum Transmission Unit for this
interface in bytes.
Speed
Identifies the data rate of this interface in Mbps.
Rx Octet
Identifies the number of bytes received on the given
channel since the statistics were last reset.
Rx Ucast
Identifies the number of packets with a unicast
Ethernet address that directly matches the Ethernet
address of the identified unit. This statistic describes
the period of time since the statistics were last reset.
Rx Mcast
Identifies the number of multicast packets received.
These packets can be broadcast MAC addresses for
protocols such as ARP, as well as multicast packets
for group-oriented transmissions such as IP Multicast.
This statistic describes the period of time since the
statistics were last reset.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
313
Administration
Standard 3.1
Column
Description
Rx Disc
Identifies the number of packets discarded on the
channel since the statistics were last reset.
Rx Err
Identifies the number of error packets received on the
given channel since the statistics were last reset.
Tx Octet
Identifies the number of outbound bytes transmitted on
the given channel since the statistics were last reset.
Tx Ucast
Identifies the number of outbound packets sent to a
Unicast Address (single recipient) on the given
channel since the statistics were last reset.
Tx Mcast
Identifies the number of outbound packets sent to
multiple recipients on the given channel since the
statistics were last reset.
Tx Disc
Identifies the number of outbound packets discarded
due to resource problems on the given channel since
the statistics were last reset.
Tx Err
Identifies the number of outbound packets discarded
due to errors on the given channel since the statistics
were last reset.
QLen
Identifies the number of bytes currently in the
interface's outbound queue.
Collisions
Identifies the number of collisions that have occurred
on the Ethernet interface while attempting to transmit
packets since the statistics were last reset.
Note: The Collisions statistic appears on both the
Ethernet Interface and Network Statistics screens. The
Collisions statistic is only applicable in half-duplex
mode.
314
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
BRI Information Statistics
BRI Information Statistics provide information about the BRI modules installed
on the logged-on Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Use this screen to determine the
module positions that are populated, the type and status of each module, the
number of BRI channels available and being used, and the cross-connections
being used. The BRI Information Statistics screen is similar to the following:
To display the BRI Information Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the BRI
Information Statistics screen” on page 316. To review the definitions for the
statistics presented on the BRI Information Statistics screen, refer to “BRI
Information Statistics field descriptions” on page 317.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
315
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the BRI Information Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → BRI Statistics from the Menu Bar to display the
BRI Information Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the BRI Information Statistics screen, similar to the
example on page 315.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the BRI Information Statistics
screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the BRI Information Statistics screen,
316
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
BRI Information Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes statistics found on the BRI Information Statistics
screen:
Column
Description
Module Index
Identifies the port where the call originated.
Valid values are 0 through 63.
Module Number
Identifies the module position of the ISDN BRI module
that handled the call.
Valid values are 4, 5, 6, and 7.
Device Number
Identifies internal sequence number for indexing ISDN
BRI devices.
In Service
Indicates the successful initialization of the ISDN BRI
module.
Usage
Bit-encoded field identifies the module as an ISDN BRI
module.
Total Channels
Identifies the ISDN BRI module’s working and nonworking channels.
Available Channels
Identifies the working channels on the ISDN BRI
module.
Cross Connection
Type
Identifies the cross-connect type used by the ISDN
BRI module.
Valid values are DS30X, AMB, REG, and VHD.
Name
Identifies the type and version of the ISDN BRI module
that handled the call.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
317
Administration
Standard 3.1
Local Call Statistics
The Local Call Statistics screen allows you to see how many local calls the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit processes through the local PSTN and how long
these calls last. The Local Call Statistics screen is similar to the following:
To display the Local Call Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the Local Call
Statistics screen” on page 319. To obtain the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Local Call Statistics screen, refer to “Local Call Statistics field
descriptions” on page 319.
318
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the Local Call Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Local Call Stats from the Menu Bar to display the
Local Call Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Local Call Statistics screen, similar to the example on
page 318.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create at text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Local Call Statistics screen, on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Local Call Statistics screen,
Local Call Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics found on the Local Call Statistics
screen:
Column
Description
Port No.
Identifies the Remote Gateway 9150 port that
processed the call.
Call Start Time
Identifies the time when the call started.
Call Duration
Identifies the length of the call.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
319
Administration
Standard 3.1
Remote Call Statistics
The Remote Call Statistics screen allows you to see how many calls the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit processes through the host PBX. This screen shows which
ports handle the calls, and how long each call lasts. Use this statistics log to
determine how much host PBX traffic the Remote Gateway 9150 unit processes.
The Remote Call Statistics screen is similar to the following:
To display the Remote Call Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the Remote
Call Statistics screen” on page 321. To review the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Remote Call Statistics screen, refer to “Remote Call Statistics
field descriptions” on page 321.
320
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the Remote Call Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Remote Call Stats from the Menu Bar to display
the Remote Call Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Local Call Statistics screen, similar to the example on
page 320.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Remote Call Statistics
screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Remote Call Statistics screen,
Remote Call Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics found on the Remote Call Statistics
screen:
Column
Description
ROU (Remote
Gateway 9150) Port
No
Identifies the Remote Gateway 9150 port that
processed the call.
Connection ID
A sequential number used for tracking individual calls.
RLC ID
Identifies the Unit ID of the RLC that processed the
call.
RLC Port No
Identifies the RLC port that processed the call.
Call Start Time
Identifies the time when the call began.
Duration
Identifies how long the call lasted.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
321
Administration
Standard 3.1
Device Information Statistics
The Device Information Statistics screen allows you to see all telephones
connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, their capability, and current status.
The Device Information Statistics screen is similar to the following:
To display the Device Information Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the
Device Information Statistics screen” on page 323. To review the definitions for
the statistics presented on the Device Information Statistics screen, refer to
“Device Information Statistics field descriptions” on page 324.
322
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the Device Information Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Device Information to display the Device
Information Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Device Information Statistics screen, similar to the
example on page 322.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Device Information
Statistics screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Device Information Statistics
screen,
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
323
Administration
Standard 3.1
Device Information Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics found on the Device Information
Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Port Number
Identifies the Remote Gateway 9150 unit port number
associated with the displayed information.
Type
Identifies the port type.
Valid values are Remote, Data, and Local TCM.
Device Type
Identifies whether the telephone connection on the
port identified above is Normal or ACD.
Valid values are Normal and ACD.
Call Status
Identifies whether the port is currently handling a call.
Valid values are Busy and Idle.
Login Status
Identifies whether the telephone connected to this port
is active on the system.
Valid values are Logged on and Logged off.
Note: This statistic applies only to ports associated
with ACD telephones.
324
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
ISDN Module Information Statistics
The ISDN Module Information Statistics screen allows you do review the
current status of the ISDN BRI modules on your Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
The ISDN Module Information Statistics screen is similar to the following.
To display the ISDN Module Information Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying
the ISDN Module Information Statistics screen” on page 326. To review the
definitions for the statistics presented on the ISDN Module Information
Statistics screen, refer to “ISDN Module Information field descriptions” on page
326.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
325
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the ISDN Module Information Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → ISDN Module Information to display the ISDN
Module Information Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the ISDN Module Information Statistics screen, similar to
the example on page 325.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the ISDN Module Information
Statistics screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the ISDN Module Information
Statistics screen,
ISDN Module Information field descriptions
The following table describes statistics found on the ISDN Module Information
Statistics screen:
Column
Description
Module Number
Identifies the module position of the ISDN BRI module.
Valid values are 4, 5, 6, and 7.
Module Type
Identifies the type of the ISDN BRI module.
Valid values are BRI-U, BRI-ST, and INVALID.
Link Status
Identifies the current status of the ISDN BRI line.
Valid values are UP, DOWN, and INVALID.
Usage
Identifies whether the ISDN BRI line is in use or not.
Valid values are IDLE and ACTIVE.
326
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Network Statistics
Network Statistics allow you to see the performance over the last 24 hours of the
logged-on Remote Gateway 9150 unit. Use these statistics to identify periods
when other network activity can adversely affect 9150 system performance. This
screen shows Remote Gateway 9150 unit performance in terms of the
transmission and reception of frames and packets, similar to the following.
To display the Network Statistics screen, refer to “Displaying the Network
Statistics screen” on page 328. To review the definitions for the statistics
presented on the Network Statistics screen, refer to “Network Statistics field
descriptions” on page 329.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
327
Administration
Standard 3.1
Displaying the Network Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → Network Statistics from the Menu Bar to display
the Network Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the Network Statistics screen, similar to the example on
page 327.
IF you want to
THEN click
update the statistics with the latest
information,
on the Refresh button.
create a text file containing these
statistics,
on the Save to File button.
close the Network Statistics screen,
on the Close button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in on the Help button.
the Network Statistics screen,
328
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Network Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the statistics found on the Network Statistics
screen:
Statistic
Hour
Description
Identifies the 60-minute period, within the most recent
24 hours, that the other statistics on this line apply to.
The statistics on the line where "0" is in this column
refer to activity that occurred within 60 minutes of the
request for statistics. The statistics on the line where
"1" is in this column refer to activity that occurred
during the 60-minute period that ended 60 minutes, or
one hour, before the request for statistics. The
statistics on the line where "2" is in this column refer to
activity that occurred during the 60-minute period that
ended two hours before the request for statistics, and
so on.
Tx Voice Samples
Identifies the number of decoder packets transmitted
by the DSP during the given hour. This number
corresponds to in-band signaling, such as DTMF or
Fax Relay, and voice signaling transmitted by the DSP.
Note: This statistic formerly was expressed in
superpackets rather than decoder packets.
Rx Voice Samples
Identifies the number of decoder packets received by
the DSP during the given hour. This number
corresponds to in-band signaling, such as DTMF or
Fax Relay, and voice signaling received by the DSP.
Note: This statistic formerly was expressed in
superpackets rather than decoder packets.
Rx Error
Identifies the number of decoder packet overruns and
underruns during the given hour, as determined by the
DSP.
Rx Dropped
Identifies the number of superpackets that were
received out of sequence during the given hour.
This can result from one or more superpacket's being
lost or delivered out of order and, thus, discarded.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
329
Administration
Statistic
%Error
Standard 3.1
Description
Identifies the packet error percentage that was
received during the given hour.
Remote Gateway 9100 Series begins calculating this
statistic by adding the number out-of-sequence
packets (Rx Dropped) to the number of overruns. After
multiplying this sum by 100, Remote Gateway 9100
Series then divides the product by the number of
received decoder packets (Rx Voice Samples) to
produce the error percentage.
This is an imprecise measurement due to the fact that
multiple packet losses or overruns can be counted as
a single error.
EthTx Mcast
Identifies the number of multicast packets transmitted
during the given hour.
Multicast packets are packets intended for multiple
Ethernet addresses.
EthTX Ucast
Identifies the number of unicast packets transmitted
during the given hour.
Unicast packets are packets intended for a specific
Ethernet address. Voice packets are always
transmitted as unicast packets.
EthTx Disc
Identifies the number of packets discarded on the
transmit side due to lack of resources, such as
memory buffers, during the given hour.
This can be an indirect result of excessive collisions in
the transmit queue.
EthRx Mcast
Identifies the number of multicast packets that were
received during the given hour. This is inclusive of
packets with broadcast MAC addresses for protocols
such as ARP, and multicast packets for group-oriented
transmissions, such as IP Multicast.
Multicast packets are packets intended for more than
one Ethernet address.
330
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
EthRx UCast
Administration
Description
Identifies the number of unicast packets that were
received during the given hour with a unicast Ethernet
address directly matching that of the specified unit.
Unicast packets are packets intended for only one
Ethernet address.
EthRx Disc
Identifies the number of packets that were received
during the given hour and discarded due to a lack of
available receive buffers.
EthTx Err
Identifies the number of packets that could not be
transmitted because of errors within the packets.
EthRx Err
Identifies the number of packets that were received
during the given hour that contained errors that
prevented them from being deliverable to a higherlayer protocol.
Collisions
Identifies the number of collisions that have occurred
on the Ethernet interface when attempting to transmit
packets since the statistics were last reset.
Note: The Collisions statistic appears on both the
Ethernet Interface and Network Statistics screens. The
Collisions statistic is only applicable in half-duplex
mode.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
331
Administration
Standard 3.1
PSTN Error Statistics
PSTN Error Statistics allow you to see the PSTN performance, in terms of
signaling errors, of digital telephone sets connected to the logged-on Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. Use these statistics to gauge the effectiveness of your
connection to the PSTN. The table displays error totals for all active PSTN calls
placed from your Remote Gateway 9150 unit, similar to the following.
332
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Displaying the PSTN Error Statistics screen
Choose Alarms/Stats/Logs → PSTN Error Statistics from the Menu Bar to
display the PSTN Error Statistics screen.
Result: Configuration Manager gathers statistics from the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and displays the PSTN Error Statistics screen, similar to the example
on page 332.
IF you want to
THEN click on the
update the statistics by adding PSTN Refresh button.
error information that occurred since
your original request,
create a text file containing these
statistics,
Save to File button.
close the PSTN Error Statistics
screen,
Close button.
begin collecting new statistics,
Reset button.
obtain descriptions of the statistics in Help button.
the PSTN Error Statistics screen,
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
333
Administration
Standard 3.1
PSTN Error Statistics field descriptions
The following table describes the information on the PSTN Error Statistics
screen:
Statistic
Description
Channel Number
Identifies the channel that the statistics on that line
apply to.
Receive Buffer
Allocation Failures
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that there was an error in the allocation of a
packet to the receive buffer.
Frame Length
Violations
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that a frame contained too many packets.
CRC Errors
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) bits
did not match.
The CRC errors that Trunk Protocol reports on the
Remote Gateway 9100 Series product are check
performed end-to-end at the High-level Data Link
Control (HDLC) framing level. This check includes the
ISDN framing errors as well as PSTN spans and
clocking issues. The CRC error count does not always
indicate that there are CRC errors on the physical line
between the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the CO,
or the host PBX and the CO. However, the CRC error
count is a good indication that you need to investigate
the physical line.
334
Unknown Receive
Errors
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that a receive error that is not otherwise
classified in this display occurred.
ITE Frame Length
Violations
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that the ITE received an over-length frame.
ITE Transmitter
Underruns
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that the ITE transmitter contained underruns.
ITE Receiver Busy
Errors
Identifies the number of times since the statistics were
last reset that the ITE received busy errors.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Verifying the firmware and software version
This section describes how to determine the version of firmware and software
currently installed.
Before you perform a firmware or software upgrade, determine what version is
currently installed. This ensures that you do not replace the installed firmware or
software with an older version.
Verifying the software version
To verify the software version on your Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Help → About Configuration Manager.
Result: The About Configuration Manager dialog box displays, similar to
the following:
2
Review the About Configuration Manager dialog box. This identifies the
version of software installed on the unit.
3
Click on the OK button.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
335
Administration
Standard 3.1
Verifying the firmware version
To verify the firmware version on your Remote Gateway 9150 unit:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose System Information → System Data.
Result: The System Configuration Details dialog box displays, similar to
the following:
2
Review the Unit Version field. This identifies the version of firmware
installed on the unit.
3
Click on the Close button.
Determining the current firmware and software versions
To determine the current firmware and software versions, refer to the Remote
Gateway 9100 Series and RLC Release Notes (NTP 555-8421-102).
336
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Obtaining the latest upgrade file
If you need to upgrade the firmware or software, you can obtain the latest
upgrade files by clicking on the Software Downloads link at the following
website:
www.nortel.com
Nortel provides upgrade files in self-extracting executable files. You must
extract the upgrade files before you can perform the upgrade.
Types of upgrades
You can perform the following types of upgrades for your Remote Gateway
9150 unit:
!
Configuration Manager software upgrade
!
firmware upgrades
— Remote Gateway 9150 motherboard firmware
Note: This includes any firmware updates that have been made for DSP
application modules.
— trunk interface module firmware
The firmware contains the code necessary for operating the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Downloading the upgrade file
To download the upgrade file:
1
With your web browser, connect to the Nortel web site at:
www.nortel.com
2
Click on the Software Downloads link.
3
Locate the software and firmware you need.
4
Download the files into a temporary location on your PC.
5
Double-click on the .exe file to extract the files into a temporary location on
your PC.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
337
Administration
Standard 3.1
Performing a firmware upgrade
This section describes how to perform a firmware upgrade on your Remote
Gateway 9150 unit. You perform the upgrade over the IP network using the
TFTP protocol.You can perform the RLC upgrade manually or configure the
RLC to perform an automatic or scheduled firmware upgrade. Refer to “Auto
upgrade configuration” on page 243 for further details.
Note: Over an IP network with low delay and packet loss, Flash download times
to remote M39xx digital telephone sets are comparable to PBX wired
downloads. Download times increase when you use PSTN bandwidth on a
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
You must have a TFTP server application running on the administration PC. The
TFTP server’s base directory must point to the directory that contains the
upgrade files.
Manual firmware upgrade
To ensure trouble-free communication between the RLC and Remote Gateway
9150 unit during and after the manual firmware upgrade, Nortel recommends
that you perform the upgrades as follows:
1
Create backup configuration files for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and
RLC. Refer to “Creating a backup configuration file” on page 282.
2
Upgrade the Configuration Manager software on the administration PC.
3
Disable the PBX slot(s) where an RLC is installed.
4
Upgrade the RLC firmware.
5
Upgrade the Remote Gateway 9150 unit firmware.
6
Upgrade the BRI module firmware for each BRI module on your Remote
Gateway 9150 units.
7
Restart the RLC.
8
Restart the upgraded Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
9
Re-enable the PBX slot(s) where an RLC is installed.
Note: Upgrade the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s firmware before upgrading
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s BRI module firmware.
338
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
When to perform a firmware upgrade
Perform a firmware upgrade if you have determined that you are using out-ofdate firmware. For instructions on determining if you need to perform an
upgrade, refer to “Verifying the firmware and software version” on page 335.
ATTENTION!
The protocol for communication between the RLC and the
Remote Gateway 9150 units requires that they be running the
same version in order for them to communicate with each other.
About firmware upgrades and configuration files
Each time you perform a firmware upgrade, the configuration database is also
converted (if necessary) to a format that is compatible with the new firmware.
The conversion does not affect configuration settings.
Nortel recommends that each time you perform a firmware upgrade, you first
create a backup copy of the converted configuration file and store it in a safe,
secure location.
Before you begin
It is important to complete the following steps before performing a firmware
upgrade:
1
Obtain the firmware upgrade from Nortel.
For instructions, refer to “Obtaining the latest upgrade file” on page 337.
2
Extract the upgrade files from the file you received from Nortel.
3
Start the TFTP server application.
4
Ensure the TFTP base directory reflects the directory where the firmware
upgrade file you want to use resides.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
339
Administration
Standard 3.1
Upgrading the Remote Gateway 9150 unit firmware
To upgrade the firmware:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Upload/Download → Upload S/W.
Result: The Software Upload dialog box displays, similar to the following:
2
Do one of the following:
IF you are upgrading THEN
motherboard firmware, in the Module section, click on the Application
option button.
ISDN BRI module
firmware,
do the following:
a In the Module section, click on the BRI option
button.
b Enter the position on the motherboard where
the ISDN BRI module is installed.
Valid values are 4 through 7.
340
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
3
Administration
Enter the IP address of the TFTP server into the IP Address fields.
Note: Since the TFTP server application runs on your administration PC,
this is the IP address of the PC.
4
Click on the Browse button.
Result: The Open dialog box displays, similar to the following:
5
Ensure the Files of type drop down box shows Upgrade Files(*.UPG).
6
Navigate to the folder where the firmware file is located.
7
Select the file, and then click on the Open button.
Examples:
!
For motherboard firmware, select 9150-100.upg, and then click on the
Open button.
!
For ISDN BRI module firmware, select briv15u.upg, and then click on
the Open button.
Result: The Software Upload dialog box re-displays. The file you selected
is shown in the Uploaded File field.
8
Click on the Upload button.
Wait until the file uploads completely before entering any other commands.
The Log Report field displays a confirmation message when the upgrade is
complete.
9
Restart the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
341
Administration
Standard 3.1
Automatic or scheduled firmware upgrade
When you configure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to perform an automatic or
scheduled firmware upgrade using the Auto Upgrade Configuration property
sheet, the Remote Gateway 9150 unit queries the predefined TFTP server and
upgrades the firmware automatically. Refer to “Auto upgrade configuration” on
page 243 for further details.
USE CAUTION WHEN FORCING THE AUTO UPGRADE
PROCESS AS THE SYSTEM PERFORMS A SELF-RESET ON
ALL UNITS TO MAKE THE NEW FIRMWARE ACTIVE ONCE
THE DOWNLOAD OF NEW FIRMWARE IS COMPLETE.
.
Nortel recommends the following when performing an automatic or scheduled
firmware upgrade:
1
Complete the procedures in “Before you begin” on page 339 prior to
configuring the automatic or scheduled upgrade.
2
Complete the procedures in “Creating a backup configuration file” on page
282 before performing an automatic or scheduled firmware upgrade.
Notes:
342
!
The automatic or scheduled firmware upgrade only performs upgrades on
the Remote Gateway 9100 Series units you configure on the Auto Upgrade
Configuration property sheets. In order for the automatic or scheduled
firmware upgrade to complete, place the ro-ver.txt file in the same TFTP
server directory as you place the .upg file.
!
You must perform firmware upgrades on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
BRI module firmware separately. Refer to “Upgrading the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit firmware” on page 340 for further details.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
Self-contained firmware upgrade
A self-contained firmware upgrade executable file is also available.
To perform this form of upgrade, both the administration PC and the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit must be connected using a 10BaseT Ethernet connection.The
self-contained firmware upgrade executable file can run on a Windows 98, NT
Workstation 4.0, Millennium Edition (ME), 2000 Professional, or XP
(Professional and Home Edition) operating system.
To obtain the self-contained firmware upgrade executable file, click on the
Software Downloads link at the following website:
www.nortel.com
Note: You can also email this file to a remote user.
To perform the upgrade:
1
Double click on the .exe file.
Result: The WinZip Self-Extractor dialog box displays, similar to the
following:
2
Click on the Setup button to run the Remote Gateway 9100 Series
Firmware Upgrade Manager.
Note: You can cancel the upgrade at anytime by clicking on the Cancel
button on any of the upcoming dialog boxes. You can find out information
regarding this application by clicking on the About button on any of the
upcoming dialog boxes.
Result: The WinZip Self-Extractor unzips the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
upgrade file and displays an unzip progress bar, similar to the following:
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
343
Administration
Standard 3.1
3
Once the unzip process is complete, the Welcome dialog box displays,
similar to the following:
4
Click on the Next button.
Result: The Remote Gateway 9100 Series Unit Information dialog box
displays, similar to the following:
344
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Administration
5
Enter the IP address of the Remote Gateway 9150 unit that you want to
upgrade.
6
Enter your logon name in the Username field. If you have not yet
customized this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page
157 for the default logon ID.
7
Enter your password in the Password field. If you have not yet customized
this setting, refer to “Default logon ID and password” on page 157 for the
default password.
8
Click on the Next button and follow the instructions on the upcoming dialog
boxes to complete the upgrade process.
After successful installation, the executable file removes all residual files
excepting the executable itself. For the Remote Gateway 9150 unit, the selfcontained firmware upgrade application issues a software-reset command in
order to make the new firmware active.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
345
Administration
Standard 3.1
Performing a software upgrade
Perform a software upgrade if you have determined that you are using
out-of-date software. For instructions on determining if you need to perform an
upgrade, refer to “Verifying the firmware and software version” on page 335.
Upgrading the Configuration Manager software
To upgrade the Configuration Manager software:
1
Navigate to the directory that contains the upgrade files you extracted.
2
Locate and double-click on the setup.exe file.
3
Follow the prompts on the screen.
ATTENTION!
Do not ignore any warning messages that the
InstallShield displays about versions of files (such as
DLL files) that already exist on your PC. If you
overwrite these files, you can inadvertently cause other
applications on your PC to stop working.
Result: The InstallShield installs the software on top of the previous
version.
346
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
In this chapter
Before you begin
348
Remote Gateway 9150 unit LED indicators
349
Digital telephone set
351
Device connectivity
356
Software problems
360
Using Configuration Manager PING
362
Syslog testing
365
Alarms and alerts
366
Responding to a catastrophic failure
367
Repair and warranty information
368
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
347
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Before you begin
If you experience problems in setting up or running your Remote Gateway 9150
unit, this chapter can help you to isolate and solve the problem.
Identifying why a problem occurred
Before you begin, ask yourself the questions listed in the following table:
IF you
answered THEN do the following:
Question
Is this a new
installation?
yes
Perform troubleshooting in the
sequence presented in this chapter.
no
Answer the next question.
Did the Remote Gateway
9150 unit work, and then
suddenly stop
working?
yes
Answer the next question.
no
Perform troubleshooting in the
sequence presented in this chapter.
Did you modify the
configuration or
change any hardware
components?
yes
1 Verify that changes were done
correctly.
2 Check the hardware components
to ensure they are in working
order.
3 Perform troubleshooting for the
specific component.
no
348
Contact your telecom or data network
administrator. There might be a
problem with the network.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Remote Gateway 9150 unit LED indicators
During a Remote Gateway 9150 unit power-up cycle, watch the front panel of
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit. When the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is
functioning properly, the LED indicators do the following:
!
The Power LED lights and remains lit.
!
The Status LED remains lit after the power-up cycle is completed. The
Status LED remains lit all the time when the unit is healthy.
!
The remaining LED indicators flash whenever there is network activity.
What to do if the LEDs do not display correctly
The following table describes what to do if the LED indicators do not display
correctly:
IF Symptom
THEN What to do
The Status LED indicator is not 1
lit.
2
Did the Status LED indicator ever
illuminate? If not, contact your Nortel
distributor. There might be a hardware
problem.
Are other LED indicators lit or flashing? If
no, ensure the power cable is connected
to both the power source and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
If it has become disconnected, reconnect
it.
3
If the Status LED indicator is still out,
contact your Nortel distributor. There
might be a hardware problem.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
349
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
IF Symptom
THEN What to do
No LED indicators are lit on the 1
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
The Ethernet COLL LED
indicator is lit solid when HalfDuplex Ethernet is enabled in
the IP configuration.
350
Ensure that the Remote Gateway 9150
unit is connected to a power source.
2
If you are using an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), ensure the UPS is
powered on.
3
Verify that the AC power source is
operational.
Network collisions are bound to occur and
are normal. However, if this LED indicator is
lit solid when Half-Duplex Ethernet is
enabled in the IP configuration, do the
following:
1
Check the physical network connection.
2
Verify that the Remote Gateway 9150
unit can be PINGed.
3
Check the network configuration (such
as routing, traffic load, and so on). Adjust
the network configuration, if required.
4
Normally, there is no broadcast or
multicast activity on the telephony LAN
(TLAN). Interconnect a hub and a
network analyzer to the TLAN and
monitor for such activity. Identify the
source(s) and isolate them from the
TLAN.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Digital telephone set
This section identifies some problems that can occur on the digital telephone set,
and describes what to do to resolve them.
Symptoms descriptions
If you are having trouble with digital telephones, perform troubleshooting as
described in the following table:
Symptom
What to do
There is no dial tone when
pressing either the host call
appearance or local call
appearance keys.
1
Is this a first-time installation? If yes,
perform troubleshooting as described in
“What to do if the telephone connection
tests do not work” on page 130.
2
If you are trying to place a hostcontrolled call, check the IP network and
ensure that
!
it is not down
!
traffic is being routed between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and RLC
on the host PBX
3
If you are trying to place a host- or locally
controlled call, Ensure the ISDN BRI line
is working. Ask your service provider to
check this.
4
Restart the RLC, wait one minute, and
then restart the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
5
Ensure the RLC is enabled in its host
PBX slot.
In Load 97 on the Meridian 1 PBX, stat
the RLC, disable and enable it, or re-seat
it if necessary.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
351
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Symptom
What to do
There is no dial tone when
pressing either the host call
appearance or local call
appearance keys. (continued)
6
A stutter is heard during a
remote dial tone.
This is a normal occurrence and is caused by
the DSP activating a dial tone relay.
However, to eliminate stutter dial tone,
disable Dialtone Relay. Dialtone Relay
settings are in the Advanced Configuration
dialog box, which is available on the RLC
System Configuration Property sheet.
1
Lamps or indicators are not lit
after completion of a Remote
Gateway 9150 unit power cycle.
Check all cable connections to and from
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and
ensure they are all securely connected.
2
Is this a first-time installation? If yes,
check the telephone connections. Refer
to the Telco 1 and Telco 2 cable pin-out
tables in Appendix C, “Pin-out tables for
connections.”
3
Ensure the ISDN BRI line is working.
Ask your service provider to check this.
4
Check the IP network and ensure that:
5
Lamps or indicators do not
reflect the true status of the
telephone.
352
Contact your telecom administrator.
There might be problems at the host
PBX.
!
it is not down
!
traffic is being routed between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and RLC
on the host PBX
PING the RLC from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to verify IP network
connectivity.
It is possible that there is a synchronization
error between the Remote Gateway 9150
unit and the host PBX. Contact your telecom
network administrator.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Symptom
Troubleshooting
What to do
The display is blank (that is, the 1
time and date are not displayed).
2
Take the digital telephone handset off
hook and dial the Online SPRE code.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit
attempts to connect to the host PBX.
When the connection is established, the
time and date display.
Check the IP network and ensure that:
!
it is not down
!
traffic is being routed between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and RLC
on the host PBX
3
PING the RLC from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to verify IP network
connectivity.
4
Ensure the ISDN BRI line is working.
Ask your service provider to check this.
5
Restart the RLC, wait one minute, and
then restart the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
6
Ensure the RLC is enabled in its host
PBX slot.
In Load 97 on the Meridian 1 PBX, stat
the RLC, disable and enable it, or re-seat
it if necessary.
7
Contact your telecom administrator.
There might be problems at the host
PBX.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
353
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Symptom
What to do
1
There are noticeable gaps or
poor quality when a voice call is
active on the IP network.
Check the Quality of Service (QoS)
configuration on the RLC. Adjust the
configuration, if required.
Lower the QoS threshold so that
transition occurs earlier.
Incoming calls are not being
received from the host PBX.
354
2
Analyze the traffic patterns on your voice
and IP networks as described in the
Remote Gateway 9100 Series Network
Engineering Guidelines (555-8421-230).
It is possible that your IP network
capacity cannot accommodate the
additional voice data, especially during
High Day Busy Hour (HDBH) periods.
Make adjustments to your network as
required.
1
Ensure your telephone is not on call
forward.
2
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is not in offline mode by entering the
Online SPRE code at a digital telephone.
3
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is powered up. It cannot receive calls
from the host PBX if it is not powered up.
4
Ensure the RLC is correctly configured
with your Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
IP address, telephone number, and
security ID (if they are used).
5
Ensure the ISDN BRI line is working, if it
is being used to route host-controlled
calls. Ask your service provider to check
this.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Symptom
What to do
Incoming calls are not being
received from the host PBX.
(continued)
6
Incoming calls are not being
received from the PSTN.
Check the IP network (if it is being used)
and ensure that:
!
it is not down
!
traffic is being routed between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and RLC
on the host PBX
7
PING the RLC from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit to verify IP network
connectivity.
8
If the problem persists, contact your
telecom administrator or Nortel
distributor.
1
Ensure your telephone is not on call
forward.
2
Ensure the calling party has your office’s
correct telephone number.
3
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is powered up. It cannot receive calls
from the host PBX or the PSTN if it is not
powered up.
4
Ensure the ISDN BRI line is working.
Ask your service provider to check this.
5
If the problem persists, contact your
telecom administrator or Nortel
distributor.
A call in progress was suddenly 1
disconnected.
2
Does your telephone display “Offline
Mode?” If so, enter the Online SPRE
code to go back online.
Contact your telecom and data network
administrators. Perhaps network
problems caused the call to drop.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
355
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Device connectivity
This section identifies some problems that can occur on the data network, and
describes what to do to resolve them.
Symptom descriptions
If you are not able to establish or maintain data network connectivity, perform
troubleshooting as described in the following table.
Note: To enable valid loopback testing of serial ports and cables, Nortel
recommends that you use a breakout box.
Symptom
What to do
SERIAL CONNECTION FAILED 1
displays when attempting to
connect to the Remote Gateway
2
9150 unit.
356
Ensure that you entered the logon ID
and password correctly when trying to
establish the connection.
Ensure that someone else is not already
logged on to the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
3
Ensure that you selected the correct
COM port when trying to establish the
connection.
4
Verify that no other applications on the
administration PC are using the COM
port.
5
Verify that the serial connection is good.
6
Using a breakout box, verify that the
COM port is active.
7
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is powered up.
8
Power the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
off, and then back on.
9
Contact your Nortel distributor. There
might be a hardware problem.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Symptom
What to do
10060 TELNET CONNECTION
FAILED displays when
1
Ensure that you entered the logon ID
and password correctly when trying to
establish the connection.
2
Ensure that you entered the IP address
correctly when trying to establish the
connection.
3
Ensure that someone else is not already
logged on to the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
4
Verify that the Ethernet cable is
connected at both ends (the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and the network
hub).
5
Check the Ethernet cable and ensure it
is good.
6
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
is powered up.
7
Power the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
off, and then back on.
8
Ensure the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s
IP address, network mask, and default
gateway are correctly configured in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
9
PING the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to
see if it responds.
attempting to connect to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
10 If the Remote Gateway 9150 unit does
not respond, PING the Remote Gateway
9150 unit’s gateway to see if it responds.
11 If the gateway does not respond, PING a
known good device on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit’s network.
12 If steps 10 and 11 work, but step 9 did
not, there might be a gateway
configuration error. Contact your data
network administrator.
13 Contact your Nortel distributor. There
might be a hardware problem.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
357
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Symptom
What to do
There are many collisions on the
Ethernet network, as indicated
by a solid Ethernet COLL LED
indicator when the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit is configured
for half-duplex Ethernet traffic.
Network collisions are bound to occur and
are normal. However, if this LED indicator is
lit solid, do the following:
1
Check the physical network connection.
2
Verify that the Remote Gateway 9150
unit can be pinged.
3
Check the network configuration (such
as routing, traffic load, and so on). Adjust
the network configuration, if required.
4
Normally there is no broadcast or
multicast activity on the TLAN.
Interconnect a hub and a network
analyzer to the TLAN and monitor for
such activity. Identify the source(s) and
isolate them from the TLAN.
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit 1
will not send or receive Ethernet
traffic.
Ensure that the Remote Gateway 9150
unit is powered up. The Remote
Gateway 9150 unit cannot send or
receive traffic if it is not powered up.
2
Check the Ethernet cable between the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit and the
network, and ensure that it is good.
3
Ensure the Ethernet cable is connected.
4
If the Remote Gateway 9150 unit still will
not send or receive traffic, contact your
data network administrator.
5
Data network administrator: Ensure that
other network devices are configured to
allow traffic to and from the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
An attempt to log off from the
It is possible that communication has been
Remote Gateway 9150 unit does lost between the administration PC and the
not work.
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Close Configuration Manager, and then
restart it.
358
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Symptom
Troubleshooting
What to do
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit 1
cannot establish a connection
with the RLC.
Verify security authentication
configuration and ensure that it matches
at both ends. (For example, if the
security identifier security level is used,
ensure that the inbound and outbound
security identifiers are correctly
configured at each end.)
2
Ensure that the unit IDs have been
correctly configured at each end. An
incorrect unit ID causes security
authentication to fail.
3
Ensure that the RLC’s IP address and
PSTN number are correctly configured
on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit (as
appropriate).
4
Verify that the IP network and PSTN are
operational (up and running) as
appropriate.
5
Ensure that the RLC is enabled on the
host PBX.
6
Use the Ping option in Configuration
Manager to PING the RLC. For
instructions, refer to “Using
Configuration Manager PING” on page
362.
7
If the RLC does not respond, check the
network configuration (such as, routing,
traffic load, and so on). Adjust the
network configuration, if required.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
359
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Software problems
This section identifies some problems that can occur with the Configuration
Manager software, and describes what to do to resolve them.
Symptom descriptions
If you are not able to complete a task with Configuration Manager, perform
troubleshooting as described in the following table:
Symptom
What to do
The Configuration Manager
software installation fails.
Ensure that you close all background
applications, including anti-virus checking
software before performing the installation.
When performing one of the
following by TFTP, ERROR:
FILE OPEN FAILED displays:
1
Ensure the TFTP server application is
installed and running on your
administration PC.
2
Ensure the file you are trying to upload is
present in the target directory. That is,
either in the TFTP directory, or in the
directory that is specified as the base
directory in the TFTP server application.
3
Review messages displayed by the TFTP
server application for clues.
4
PING the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to
verify that network connectivity exists.
CONFIG UPLOAD FAILED when 1
Ensure that you selected an appropriate
file. That is, ensure that the file you
attempted to upload is a Remote
Gateway 9150 configuration file.
!
configuration upload
!
firmware upgrade
attempting to perform a
configuration upload by TFTP.
360
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Symptom
Troubleshooting
What to do
CONFIG UPLOAD FAILED when 2
attempting to perform a
configuration upload by TFTP.
(continued)
Ensure that the configuration file you are
attempting to upload is compatible with
current Remote Gateway 9150 firmware.
Perform the configuration upload using a
previous configuration file, if necessary.
Note: Each time you perform a Remote
Gateway 9150 firmware upgrade, create a
backup of the configuration. The
configuration database format in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit is dependent
on the version of firmware installed on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. If you
recently downgraded to a previous version
of Remote Gateway 9150 firmware, you
might also need to revert to a previous
configuration format.
System not responding
displays when working with
Configuration Manager.
It is possible that communication has been
lost between the administration PC and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Close Configuration Manager, and then
restart it.
Nothing happens when
attempting to log off from the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
It is possible that communication has been
lost between the administration PC and the
node you were logged on to.
Close Configuration Manager, and then
restart it.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
361
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Using Configuration Manager PING
PING, or Packet InterNet Groper, is a protocol and program to test whether a
device is accessible on a network. This section explains how to use the PING
option provided in Configuration Manager to verify network connectivity. Use
this procedure as a troubleshooting tool to determine if you can reach the RLC,
another remote unit, or any other device on the network.
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Performing a Configuration Manager PING
To perform a Configuration Manager PING:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Tests → Ping.
Result: The PING Test dialog box displays, similar to the following:
362
2
Enter the IP Address of the unit you want to PING in the IP Address field.
3
Enter the number of times you want to PING the unit in the Number of
Cycles field (1 to 100).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
4
Troubleshooting
Click on the OK button.
Result: The PING test window displays, showing the PING results. The
following is an example of a successful PING:
The following is an example of an unsuccessful PING:
5
Click on the Close button.
Result: The PING test window closes.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
363
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
ATTENTION!
It is possible to successfully PING a device on the network
and still not be able to log on to that device. If you log on to
a device (a Remote Gateway 9150 unit) using a serial
connection and neglect to log off, you may be able to
successfully PING the device but be unable to establish a
Telnet connection to it. (The device believes itself to be
busy.)
If you cannot log on to a device after a successful PING,
access the serial port and ensure that you are not logged on to
the device through this port.
Unsuccessful PING options
If the PING was unsuccessful:
364
1
Ensure you have entered the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway correctly.
2
PING the gateway to see if it responds.
3
Contact your data network administrator if the PING still does not work.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Syslog testing
Once you configure the syslog feature and save it to Flash, use the Syslog test
command to test the configuration. The 9150 system generates test syslog
messages. This allows you to verify the syslog configuration as well as the
syslog collector functionality on the syslog server(s).
Getting there 9150 → Configuration Manager
Performing Syslog testing
To perform syslog testing:
1
From the Menu Bar, choose Tests → Syslog.
Result: A message displays, similar to the following:
2
Click on the OK button.
3
Examine the syslog server(s) to see if the test was successful.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
365
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Alarms and alerts
For troubleshooting purposes, each Remote Gateway 9100 Series device
transmits alarms and alerts to the host PBX. These alarms and alerts indicate to
the host PBX that the Remote Gateway 9100 Series device is in a state of alarm
or alert. The host PBX then produces an alarm or alert through its software.
Refer to “Display logs” on page 412 to determine if the host PBX produces an
alarm or alert when Remote Gateway 9100 Series Configuration Manager
produces a display log.
366
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Responding to a catastrophic failure
For the purposes of this discussion, a catastrophic failure is defined as a failure
of the equipment to operate after review of all troubleshooting information and
implementation of appropriate procedures.
Inoperative hardware
If your RLC fails to operate after thorough review of the troubleshooting
information in this and related Guides, consult your Nortel distributor for
hardware replacement.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
367
Troubleshooting
Standard 3.1
Repair and warranty information
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit contains no user-serviceable components. If the
problem experienced with your Remote Gateway 9150 unit persists after you
have used all the appropriate procedures in this chapter, refer to the following
contact information for repair and warranty help, depending upon your location.
Note: If the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect it pending
resolution of the problem.
Canada
Nortel Service Selection Center
30 Norelco Drive
Weston, ON
Canada
M9L 2X6
Telephone: 1-800-466-7835
United States
Nortel
Product Service Center
640 Massman Drive
Nashville, TN 37210
USA
Telephone: 1-800-466-7835
368
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Troubleshooting
Europe
Nortel (NI) Ltd.
FAO: Irish Express Cargo (IEC)
Raheen Industrial Estate
Raheen, Limerick
Ireland
Telephone: 00 800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009
Fax: +33 4 9296 1598
Asia/Pacific
Nortel Distribution Center
c/o ACCO Transport
21 South St. Unit#2
Rydalmere, NSW
2116 Australia
CALA
Note: When you need warranty and repair service in Central American and
Latin American countries, you must first get an RR (repair and return) number
from your Nortel distributor before shipping to the Nortel CALA Repair Center.
Nortel c/o Wesbell
4019 S.W. 30th Avenue
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33312
USA
Notify: Receiving Department
RR no.:
Telephone:
Normal Service Hours (Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Central
Time): 1-954-851-8841
After Normal Hours (weekends and holidays): 1-888-594-8474
Fax: 1-954-581-2334
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
369
Troubleshooting
370
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Appendix A
Planning forms
In this appendix
Overview
372
Completing the Remote Gateway 9150 forms
374
Configuration Information—Stations
376
Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
380
Configuration Information—Network Connections
383
Configuration Information—Dialing Plans
384
System expansion worksheet
385
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
371
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Overview
This appendix provides several forms that you can use to plan and record the
various data necessary for proper configuration of a Remote Gateway 9150 unit
at your site.
Note: RLC forms are provided in the Reach Line Card Installation and
Administration Guide (NTP 555-8421-210).
Network planning
To help you plan your Remote Gateway 9100 Series network, study the network
diagram and sample configurations provided in Appendix B, “Sample
configuration files.” The information provided in this appendix demonstrates the
relationships between RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 configuration settings.
Remote Gateway 9150 forms
Use the Remote Gateway 9150 forms to record information and calculate
needed resources for a Remote Gateway 9150 unit. For more information about
using these forms, refer to “Planning the configuration” on page 81.
Data entry form completion sequence
Information from some forms might need to be copied to other forms. Nortel
recommends that you complete the data entry forms in the following sequence:
372
1.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Stations form
2.
Reach Line Card Connection Information (for either the 16-port or 32-port
RLC)
3.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Network Connections
form
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
4.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
form
5.
Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Dialing Plans form
6.
Reach Line Card Online/Offline Table Configuration (if required)
For more details, refer to “Completing the Remote Gateway 9150 forms” on
page 374.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
373
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Completing the Remote Gateway 9150 forms
This section briefly describes how to complete the Remote Gateway 9150
configuration forms.
To complete the forms:
1
Assign each user telephone or fax machine to a port on the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
Record the assignments on the Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration
Information—Stations form. Designate each port as a local port, remote
port, or local and remote port.
2
Use the information you received from the ISDN service provider for the
Remote Gateway 9150 site to complete the Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules form.
At the same time, do the following:
a. Designate a B-channel as a primary trunk. The Remote Gateway 9150
unit uses primary trunk to establish connections between the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit and the RLC.
Note: The primary trunk on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit is defined
as follows:
!
the lowest-numbered B-channel defined as Remote only
!
the lowest-numbered B-channel defined as Local and Remote
Do not include the primary trunk in any trunk groups. Nortel
recommends that you define the primary trunk as Remote only.
Record the primary trunk assignment in the “Connection to RLC
information” section on the Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration
Information—Network Connections form.
b. Assign B-channels to trunk groups. Record the assignments on the
ISDN BRI Modules form.
374
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
3
Planning forms
Assign an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway to the Remote Gateway
9150 unit. This information is required if you want to administer the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit over the IP network.
Record the addresses in the “Remote Gateway 9150 unit identification”
section on the Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Network
Connections form.
4
If the security level chosen is security code, record the security identifier
assigned to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
5
In the “Connection to RLC information” section on the Remote Gateway
9150 Configuration Information—Network Connections form, record the
RLC’s
!
IP address
!
telephone number
!
security code
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit uses this information to establish and
authenticate connections with the RLC.
6
If an online/offline table is configured on the RLC, configure the SPRE
codes for toggling the online/offline modes on the Remote Gateway 9150
unit.
Note: This step is optional, because default SPRE codes have already
been defined in the software (as indicated on the Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Dialing Plans form).
If you choose to change the code, record the new code on the Dialing Plans
form.
7
Define the trunk access and Paging SPRE codes.
Trunk access codes are used by Remote Gateway 9150 unit users to get
outside lines.
Note: Default trunk access digits and paging SPRE codes have already
been defined. Nortel recommends that you use the defaults.
If you choose to change the predefined codes, record them on the Remote
Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—Dialing Plans form. Also, record
the trunk access codes (as required) on the ISDN BRI Modules form.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
375
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Stations
Page 1 of 4
Notes:
! A maximum of seven MCAs and ATAs can be connected to digital telephones at this site.
! If you are connecting a fax machine or analog device that is not equipped with an ATA, it can be
connected only to port 64. If you want to connect a fax machine or analog device to any other
port, it must be equipped with an ATA.
9150 port Extension
#
number (DN)
376
Type
If a remote
port, host port
number (TN)
MCA or ATA?
0
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
1
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
2
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
3
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
4
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
5
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
6
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
7
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
8
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
9
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
10
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
11
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
12
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
13
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
14
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
15
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
16
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
17
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
18
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Stations
Page 2 of 4
Notes:
!
A maximum of seven MCAs and ATAs can be connected to digital telephones at this site.
!
If you are connecting a fax machine or analog device that is not equipped with an ATA, it can be
connected only to port 64. If you want to connect a fax machine or analog device to any other
port, it must be equipped with an ATA.
9150
port #
Extension
number (DN)
Type
If a remote port,
host port
number (TN)
MCA or ATA?
19
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
20
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
21
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
22
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
23
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
24
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
25
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
26
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
27
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
28
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
29
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
30
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
31
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
Use ports 32 through 63 only if this Remote Gateway 9150 unit connects to a 2-slot RLC on the host
PBX.
32
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
33
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
34
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
35
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
377
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Stations
Page 3 of 4
Notes:
!
A maximum of seven MCAs and ATAs can be connected to digital telephones at this site.
!
If you are connecting a fax machine or analog device that is not equipped with an ATA, it can be
connected only to port 64. If you want to connect a fax machine or analog device to any other
port, it must be equipped with an ATA.
9150
port #
Extension
number (DN)
Type
If a remote port,
host port
number (TN)
MCA or ATA?
36
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
37
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
38
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
39
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
40
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
41
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
42
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
43
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
44
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
45
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
46
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
47
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
48
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
49
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
50
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
51
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
52
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
53
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
378
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Stations
Page 4 of 4
Notes:
!
A maximum of seven MCAs and ATAs can be connected to digital telephones at this site.
!
If you are connecting a fax machine or analog device that is not equipped with an ATA, it can be
connected only to port 64. If you want to connect a fax machine or analog device to any other
port, it must be equipped with an ATA.
9150
port #
Extension
number (DN)
Type
If a remote port,
host port
number (TN)
MCA or ATA?
54
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
55
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
56
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
57
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
58
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
59
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
60
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
61
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
62
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
63
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
64: FAX
❒
Local
❒ Remote ❒ Both
❒
Yes
❒
No
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
379
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
Page 1 of 3
Module 4
ISDN line type (variant):
Switch type:
________________________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 1 DN:
SPID:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
SPID:
B-channel 2 DN:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
Module 5
ISDN line type (variant):
Switch type:
________________________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 1 DN:
SPID:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
380
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
Page 2 of 3
Module 5 (continued)
B-channel 2 DN:
___________________________
SPID:
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
Module 6
ISDN line type (variant):
Switch type:
________________________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 1 DN:
SPID:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 2 DN:
___________________________
SPID:
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
381
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules
Page 3 of 3
Module 7
ISDN line type (variant):
Switch type:
________________________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 1 DN:
SPID:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
B-channel 2 DN:
SPID:
___________________________
_____________________________
Connection type:
❒
❒
382
Local
❒
Local and Remote
Remote
Trunk group:
Trunk access code:
___________________________
_____________________________
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Network Connections
❒
Security level:
No security
❒
Caller ID
❒
Page 1 of 1
Provision ID
Remote Gateway 9150 unit identification
Node number:
______________________
Node name:
__________________________
IP address:
Subnet mask:
Default gateway:
If the security level is Provision ID, what is the Remote Gateway 9150 unit’s security identifier?
__________________________
Connection to RLC information
IP address to reach the host PBX (for IP network):
Telephone number to reach host PBX
(for PSTN):
__________________________
If security level is Provision ID, what is the
RLC’s security identifier?
__________________________
Trunk dedicated as the primary trunk:
Note: Refer to the Remote Gateway 9150 Configuration Information—ISDN BRI Modules form.
Module:
❒
4
❒
5
B-channel
❒
1
❒
2
❒
6
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
❒
7
383
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
Configuration Information—Dialing Plans
Page 1 of 1
Notes:
!
Nortel recommends that you use the pre-configured default codes listed below.
!
The pound sign (# in North America) is mandatory and is automatically pre-configured in
Configuration Manager. The pound sign prevents conflicts with the dialing plan on the host
PBX.
!
You can dedicate all B-channels to one trunk group. You do not have to create a trunk group
for each B-channel.
Description
Default code
Your code (maximum of 3 digits)
Online SPRE code
#99
#
Offline SPRE code
#98
#
Paging SPRE code
#05
#
Local Calling SPRE code
(for analog or ATA-equipped stations)
#8
Registration SPRE code
(for multi-user or dynamic pool ports only)
#97
De-registration SPRE code
(for multi-user or dynamic pool ports only)
#96
Access code for trunk group 1
#61
#
Access code for trunk group 2
#62
#
Access code for trunk group 3
#63
#
Access code for trunk group 4
#64
#
Access code for trunk group 5
#65
#
Access code for trunk group 6
#66
#
Access code for trunk group 7
#67
#
Access code for trunk group 8
#68
#
384
#
#
#
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
System expansion worksheet
Page 1 of 4
Complete one worksheet for each Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Number of simultaneous fax calls
1
How many simultaneous faxes do you want your equipment to support?
Multiply the number of simultaneous faxes by two to determine the total number
of DSP channels required for fax calls. (Each fax call requires two DSP
channels.)
_______ x 2 = _______
___________
Notes:
2
!
If the number of DSP channels required for fax calls is not divisible by four,
round up the number entered in step 1 to the next multiple of four. (Each
DSP device contains four channels.)
!
Always round up to a higher number.
Divide your Step 1 answer, the total number of DSP channels required for fax
calls, by four to determine the number of DSP devices required for fax calls.
(Configuration Manager assigns DSP function on a per-device basis.)
Step 1: _______ / 4 = _______
___________
Note: This calculation assumes G.729A/FAX compression. For G.711 or
G.726, divide by four.
Number of stations:
3
How many digital telephones will be installed at the Remote Gateway 9150
site?
Note: A maximum of 32 digital telephones can be connected to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
___________
4
How many Analog Telephone Adapters (ATAs) will be installed?
___________
5
How many Meridian Communication Adapters (MCAs) will be installed?
___________
6
Add lines 3 and 4 together.
___________
Notes:
!
A maximum of four MCAs and ATAs can be installed when connecting the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit to a 1-slot RLC. A maximum of seven MCAs and
ATAs can be installed when connecting to a 2-slot RLC.
!
The total number of ATAs and digital telephones cannot exceed 32.
7
Will a fax machine be used for faxes through the host PBX?
8
If line 7 is Yes, add 2 to line 6.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
❒
Yes
___________
❒
No
___________
385
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
System expansion worksheet
Page 2 of 4
Call blocking:
9
Do you want to implement call blocking? (Users will receive a
fast busy signal when resources are not available.)
❒
Yes
❒
No
10 If line 9 is Yes, calculate the number of calls that can be active at one time.
Note: A conservative estimate of one call in three being blocked when no
resources are available is recommended.
Multiply line 6 by your call blocking factor. For example, to calculate the number
of simultaneous calls that can be supported at a 3:2 blocking ratio, multiply line
8 by 2/3 (0.666). If the result contains a fraction, round up to a whole number.
Line 8: _________ x ___________ = _______________
If line 9 is No, the number of simultaneous calls is the same as the number of
stations installed. (Record your response to line 8 here.)
___________
Call routing:
11 How do you want to route host-controlled calls?
❒
IP network
❒
❒
PSTN
Both
Note: If you want to route host-controlled calls over both networks, then you can use QoS
Transitioning Technology.
12 If line 11 is PSTN or Both, do you want to support locally
controlled calls through the PSTN (that is, support local
calling)?
❒
Yes
❒
No
Number of trunk interface modules needed for QoS transition support or routing calls over the PSTN
Note: If you are routing calls over the IP network only, skip this section.
13 If line 12 is No, enter 0.
If line 12 is Yes, how many simultaneous digital telephone or ATA local calls do
you want to support?
Enter a value between 1–7.
Note: Only one active call per ISDN BRI B-channel is allowed in locally
controlled mode because local calls are not compressed.
___________
386
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Planning forms
Remote Gateway 9150
System expansion worksheet
Page 3 of 4
Number of trunk interface modules needed (continued):
14 Calculate the number of B-channels required for simultaneous calls in hostcontrolled mode.
Each B-channel can support one MCA call, or up to eight simultaneous voice
calls using G.729A compression (where each call is compressed to 8 Kbps).
However, when using G.729A compression, the first B-channel can support
only six simultaneous calls because 16 Kbps are required for transporting call
signaling data for the entire Remote Gateway 9150 unit (and all of its connected
stations) to the host PBX.
Line 5: ________ + ((# of simultaneous calls: _______ * 8 Kbps) +
16 Kbps) / 64 = __________
Round up the result to a whole number.
___________
15 Calculate the number of B-channels required for both locally controlled and
host-controlled calls. Add lines 13 and 14.
If the result is greater than 8, then call blocking must be implemented, or the
number of simultaneous local calls must be reduced.
Recalculate lines 10, 13, 14, and 15.
___________
16 Calculate the number of trunk interface modules required for local calls.
Divide line 15 by 2. If the result contains a fraction, round it up to the
next whole number.
Line 15: __________ / 2 = ____________
___________
17 How many trunk interface modules are already installed in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit?
___________
18 Calculate the number of trunk interface modules you need to purchase.
Subtract line 17 from line 16.
___________
Note: A maximum of four trunk interface modules can be installed in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
387
Planning forms
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150
System expansion worksheet
Page 4 of 4
Number of DSP application modules needed:
19 Each DSP application module can support up to eight simultaneous calls over
the IP network.
Add line two to line eight, divide the sum by eight, and round up to the next
whole number.
(Line 2: __________ + Line 10: _____________) / 8 = ______________
___________
20 Record the number of DSP application modules already installed.
Note: The Remote Gateway 9150 unit ships from Nortel with the equivalent of
two DSP application modules built in. Your response here must include those ___________
modules.
21 Calculate how many DSP modules you need to purchase.
Subtract line 20 from line 19.
Note: A maximum of three DSP application modules can be installed in the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
388
___________
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Appendix B
Sample configuration files
In this appendix
Example of a network
390
Voice port configuration on the Meridian 1 PBX
392
Data port configuration on the Meridian 1 PBX
394
RLC configuration
396
Remote Gateway 9150 unit configuration
400
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
389
Sample configuration files
Standard 3.1
Example of a network
This section provides an example of a network diagram that shows one host site
(with one RLC installed on the host PBX) and one Remote Gateway 9150 unit
(with one user station). The purpose of this diagram is to demonstrate the
relationship between configuration settings on each unit in the network.
Sample configuration printouts
Sample Meridian 1 PBX configuration printouts for the voice and data ports are
provided as follows:
!
voice port: on page 392
!
data port: on page 394
Sample configuration printouts for the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit are
shown as follows:
!
RLC: on page 396
!
Remote Gateway 9150 unit: on page 400
Configuration recommendation
The quickest way to configure the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit is to run
the Configuration Wizard. For instructions, refer to “Using the Configuration
Wizard to perform initial configuration” on page 115. For your reference, the
Configuration Wizard screen examples are completed using the same
information.
Note: The network diagram shows information that cannot be configured
through the Configuration Wizard, such as the security identifiers. You must use
Configuration Manager to complete the configuration.
390
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Sample configuration files
Network diagram
Note: This diagram assumes that both the IP and PSTN are being used.
IP Configuration
IP Address:
1.2.3.4.
IP Network Mask: 255.255.0.0
IP Gateway:
1.2.3.5
Management
IP Address (optional)
Management IP
Network Mask (optional)
Connection to remote unit
information
9150's Unit ID:
2
IP Address:
5.6.7.8
Network Port:
16
PSTN Number:
606-555-6987
Security Level:
ID
Inbound Security ID: 1234567890
Outbound Security ID: 0987654321
Remote Port:
0
DN:
8734
Data Port 16
DN (key 0):
1234
Voice Port 0
DN (key 0):
8734
RLC
Note: If calls are routed over the
IP network, the network port and
PSTN number are not used.
Host
PBX
Host PBX number 613-555-1234
Host PBX ports configuration
The TN for each port is the IPE slot
number and RLC port number.
(0 and 16 in this example.)
Connection to RLC information
RLC's Unit ID:
1
IP Address:
1.2.3.4
PSTN Number:
613-555-1234
Security Level:
ID
Inbound Security ID: 0987654321
Outbound Security ID: 1234567890
Remote Port:
0
Note: If calls are routed over the
IP network, the PSTN number is
not used.
PSTN
Remote Gateway 9150
phone number 606-555-6987
Remote
Gateway
9150
POW
ER
ETH
ERN
ET
TX
RX
COLL
1
L1
L2
MOD
ULE
2
L1
L2
3
L1
L2
4
L1
V.35
L2
TX
RX
IP Configuration
IP Address:
IP Network Mask:
IP Gateway:
STA
TUS
5.6.7.8.
255.255.0.0
5.6.7.9
Port 0
DN: 8734
G101413
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
391
Sample configuration files
Standard 3.1
Voice port configuration on the Meridian 1
PBX
This section shows the configuration settings for the voice port on the
Meridian 1 PBX. Generally, define voice ports according to the needs of your
remote users.
Configuration example
This configuration example uses the settings identified in the network diagram
shown on page 391.
Note: This configuration example is from a Meridian 1 PBX 11.
REQ: prt
TYPE: 2616
MARP NOT ACTIVATED
TN
DATE
PAGE
DES
DES
TN
TYPE
CDEN
CUST
AOM
FDN
TGAR
LDN
NCOS
SGRP
RNPG
SCI
SSU
XLST
392
Telephone type
5 0
Bryan Dion
005 0 00 00
2616
8D
0
0
RLC slot and port numbers
1
NO
0
0
0
0
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Sample configuration files
CLS
CTD FBD WTA LPR MTD FND HTD ADD HFD
MWD LMPN RMMD SMWD AAD IMD XHD IRD NID OLD VCE DRG1
POD DSX VMD CMSD CCSD SWD LND CNDD
CFTD SFD MRD DDV CNID CDCA MSID DAPA BFED RCBD
ICDD CDMD LLCN MCTD CLBD AUTU
GPUD DPUD DNDD CFXD ARHD CLTD ASCD
CPFA CPTA ABDD CFHD FICD NAID BUZZ AHD
DDGA NAMA
DRDD EXR0
USMD USRD ULAD RTDD RBDD RBHD PGND FLXD FTTC DNDY DNO3
CPND_LANG ENG
HUNT
PLEV 02
VCE defines the port as a
AST
voice port.
IAPG 0
AACS NO
ITNA NO
DGRP
MLWU_LANG 0
DNDR 0
9150 unit user’s DN
KEY 00 SCR 8734 0
MARP
CPND
9150 unit user’s CPND
NAME Bryan Dion
XPLN 24
DISPLAY_FMT FIRST,LAST
01 CWT
02 MSB
03 TRN
04 CFW 4
05 AO6
06
07
08
09
10 MCR 8234 0 MARP
CPND
NAME Bryan Dion
XPLN 24
DISPLAY_FMT FIRST,LAST
11 AO6
12
13 DSP
14
15
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
393
Sample configuration files
Standard 3.1
Data port configuration on the Meridian 1 PBX
This section shows the configuration settings for the data port on the Meridian 1
PBX. The data port provides the communication path between the RLC and the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit, and must be configured as an MCA.
Configuration example
This configuration example uses the settings identified in the network diagram
shown on page 391.
Note: This configuration sample is from a Meridian 1 PBX 11.
REQ: prt
Telephone type
TYPE: 2616
TN
5 16
DES
DES Remote site 1
RLC slot and port numbers
TN
005 0 00 16
TYPE 2616
CDEN 8D
CUST 0
AOM 0
TGAR must be configured to allow trunk
FDN
access. Refer to your PBX
TGAR 1
documentation for more details.
LDN NO
NCOS 0
SGRP 0
DTA defines the port as a data port.
RNPG 0
SCI 0
SSU
XLST
CLS CTD FBD WTD LPR MTD FND HTD ADD HFD
MWD LMPN RMMD SMWD AAD IMD XHD IRD NID OLD DTA DRG1
POD DSX VMD CMSD CCSD SWD LND CNDD
CFTD SFD MRD DDV CNID CDCA MSID DAPA BFED RCBD
ICDD CDMD LLCN MCTD CLBD AUTU
GPUD DPUD DNDD CFXD ARHD CLTD ASCD
CPFA CPTA ABDD CFHD FICD NAID BUZZ AHD
DDGA NAMA
DRDD EXR0
USMD USRD ULAD RTDD RBDD RBHD PGND FLXD FTTC DNDY DNO3
394
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
TOV 0 MINS
DTAO MCA
PSEL DMDM
HUNT
PSDS NO
TRAN ASYN
PAR SPACE
DTR ON
DUP FULL
HOT OFF
AUT ON
BAUD 9600
DCD ON
PRM KBD ON
VLL OFF
MOD YES
INT OFF
CLK OFF
KBD ON
RTS OFF
PLEV 02
AST
IAPG 0
AACS NO
ITNA NO
DGRP
MLWU_LANG 0
DNDR 0
KEY 00 SCR 1234 0
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sample configuration files
Network ports must be defined as MCA.
MARP
The number that the Remote Gateway
9150 unit needs to connect to the RLC. It
must be a DID number.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
395
Sample configuration files
Standard 3.1
RLC configuration
This section shows the configuration settings for the RLC. You can obtain a
similar configuration printout by performing a configuration download while
connected to the RLC.
Note: Configuration settings are separated by commas (,).
Configuration example
This configuration example uses the settings identified in the network diagram
shown on page 391.
IPCFG 10.2.1.1,255.255.0.0,10.2.1.10,10.3.1.2,255.255.0.0
RLC’s IP address information:
!
!
APPMODCFG 0,NC,NC
APPMODCFG 1,E,G729A,G729A
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
2,NC,NC
3,NC,NC
4,NC,NC
5,NC,NC
6,NC,NC
7,NC,NC
SYSCFG 1,HOST1
!
!
!
IP address
Subnet mask
IP gateway
Management IP address
Management subnet mask
DSP application module
(only module 1 is configured in
this case)
Unit ID and node name
RLCCFG E,E
ACCFG D
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
396
0,1,0,2,2,D
1,1,0,2,2,D
2,1,0,2,2,D
3,1,0,2,2,D
4,1,0,2,2,D
5,1,0,2,2,D
Ports configured as remote ports
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Sample configuration files
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
6,0
7,0
8,0
9,0
10,0
11,0
12,0
13,0
14,0
15,0
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
PORTCFG
.
.
.
PORTCFG
16,2,2,6065556987
17,0
18,0
19,0
20,0
21,0
22,0
23,0
24,0
25,0
26,0
27,0
Ports configured as
local ports
Port configured as
network port
63,0
RUNITCFG 1,E,0,2,45,45,3,1234567890,0987654321,E,Y,10.1.1.2,
E,16,D,16,10,Y,6065556987,D
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
RUNITCFG
2,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
3,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
4,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
5,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
6,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
7,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
8,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
9,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
10,D,0,0,2,1,1,D,D,D
Remote unit connection
information (unit 1):
!
!
!
!
!
!
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
remote unit number
9150’s unit ID
security information
(inbound and outbound
security IDs)
remote unit’s IP address
network port
PSTN number
397
Sample configuration files
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
398
1,SUN,0
1,MON,0
1,TUE,0
1,WED,0
1,THU,0
1,FRI,0
1,SAT,0
2,SUN,0
2,MON,0
2,TUE,0
2,WED,0
2,THU,0
2,FRI,0
2,SAT,0
3,SUN,0
3,MON,0
3,TUE,0
3,WED,0
3,THU,0
3,FRI,0
3,SAT,0
4,SUN,0
4,MON,0
4,TUE,0
4,WED,0
4,THU,0
4,FRI,0
4,SAT,0
5,SUN,0
5,MON,0
5,TUE,0
5,WED,0
5,THU,0
5,FRI,0
5,SAT,0
6,SUN,0
6,MON,0
6,TUE,0
6,WED,0
6,THU,0
6,FRI,0
Standard 3.1
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
Online/offline schedule
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Sample configuration files
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
ONOFFCFG
6,SAT,0 00:00
7,SUN,0 00:00
7,MON,0 00:00
7,TUE,0 00:00
7,WED,0 00:00
7,THU,0 00:00
7,FRI,0 00:00
7,SAT,0 00:00
8,SUN,0 00:00
8,MON,0 00:00
8,TUE,0 00:00
8,WED,0 00:00
8,THU,0 00:00
8,FRI,0 00:00
8,SAT,0 00:00
9,SUN,0 00:00
9,MON,0 00:00
9,TUE,0 00:00
9,WED,0 00:00
9,THU,0 00:00
9,FRI,0 00:00
9,SAT,0 00:00
10,SUN,0 00:00
10,MON,0 00:00
10,TUE,0 00:00
10,WED,0 00:00
10,THU,0 00:00
10,FRI,0 00:00
10,SAT,0 00:00
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
FBQOSCFG
1,E,5,6,5,10,10,32
2,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
3,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
4,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
5,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
6,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
7,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
8,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
9,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
10,D,5,6,5,10,10,32
Item not Configured
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Quality of Service settings
(these are default settings)
Caller ID (not configured; one
line for each remote unit)
399
Sample configuration files
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 unit configuration
This section shows the configuration settings for the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
You can obtain a similar configuration printout by performing a configuration
download while connected to the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Note: Configuration settings are separated by commas (,).
Configuration example
This configuration example uses the settings identified in the network diagram
shown on page 391.
IPCFG 10.1.1.2,255.255.0.0,10.1.1.10
9150 unit’s IP interface information:
!
!
!
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
APPMODCFG
IP address
Subnet mask
IP gateway
On-board DSP module (module 0) and
0,SPARE,TSIDSP
installed DSP application module
1,E,G729A,G729A
2,NC,NC
(module 1)
3,NC,NC
4,1,1,E,1,1,5556987,60655569870101,E,1,1,
5556988,60655569880101
ISDN BRI module configuration
module number
PSTN number for each B-channel
SPID for each B-channel
APPMODCFG 5,NC,NC
APPMODCFG 6,NC,NC
APPMODCFG 7,NC,NC
!
SYSCFG 2, Remote site 1
Unit ID and node name
!
!
ROUCFG 13:00,0,JAN-13-2000,911,#222,#333,#345,#456,E
ACCFG N
System configuration:
!
!
!
400
Emergency service number
System date and time
SPRE codes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Sample configuration files
RLCDETCFG 1,3,0987654321,1234567890,E,10.2.1.1,E,6135551234,E,D
Host PBX connection
information:
!
!
!
!
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
ROUDEVCFG
RLC’s unit ID
security information
(inbound and outbound
security IDs)
RLC’s IP address
RLC PSTN number
0,2,0,E,E,E,Bryan Dion,8734,04
1,2,1,E,E,E,Marc Horman,8707,04
2,2,2,E,E,E,Brad McAllister,8708,04
3,2,3,E,E,E,Andrew Wong,8760,04
4,2,4,E,E,E,Corey Smith,8709,04
5,2,5,E,E,E,Tracey Black,8743,04
6,0,E,E,E,John Brown,8611,04
7,1,0
Port (station) configuration:
8,1,0
! Port number
9,1,0
! Local and remote capability
10,1,0
11,1,0
! CPND
12,1,0
! DN
13,1,0
! Restricted digits
14,1,0
15,1,0
16,1,0
17,1,0
18,1,0
Unconfigured ports
19,1,0
20,1,0
Note: The default capability is
21,1,0
Remote.
22,1,0
23,1,0
24,1,0
Fax port configuration:
25,1,0
26,1,0
! Port number
27,1,0
! Local and remote capability
28,1,0
! CPND
29,1,0
! DN
30,1,0
31,1,0
! Restricted digits
32,2,31,E,E,E,FAX,8664,900
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
401
Sample configuration files
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
FKEYCFG
0,2 TRN
1,2 TRN
2,2 TRN
3,2 TRN
4,2 TRN
5,2 TRN
6,8 LC1
7,NC
8,NC
9,NC
10,NC
11,NC
12,NC
13,NC
14,NC
15,NC
16,NC
17,NC
18,NC
19,NC
20,NC
21,NC
22,NC
23,NC
24,NC
25,NC
26,NC
27,NC
28,NC
29,NC
30,NC
31,NC
32,NC
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
TRKGRPCFG
12345678,3
12345678,3
12345678,3
12345678,3
12345678,3
12345678,3
,9 LC2 ,NC
1,E,#61,4.0.0
2,D,#62,1.0.0
3,D,#63,1.0.0
4,D,#64,1.0.0
5,D,#65,1.0.0
6,D,#66,1.0.0
7,D,#67,1.0.0
8,D,#68,1.0.0
Item not Configured
402
Standard 3.1
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
4000,8
4000,8
4000,8
4000,8
4000,8
4000,8
LC1
LC1
LC1
LC1
LC1
LC1
,9
,9
,9
,9
,9
,9
LC2
LC2
LC2
LC2
LC2
LC2
,NC
,NC
,NC
,NC
,NC
,NC
Local station feature keys
configuration:
!
!
!
!
!
Port number
Feature key number
Feature name
DN (if applicable)
locations of local call
appearance keys 1 and 2
Trunk group configuration:
!
!
!
!
4.0.1,8739
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
1.0.1 2.0.0
Trunk group number
Trunk access code
B-channels (ISDN module and
B-channel number)
DNs to alert
2.0.1,4002
2.0.1,4004
2.0.1,4006
2.0.1,4008
2.0.1,4010
2.0.1,4012
2.0.1,4014
Caller ID (not configured)
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Appendix C
Pin-out tables for connections
In this appendix
TELCO 1 connector pin-out table
404
TELCO 2 connector pin-out table
406
Ethernet connector pin-out table
408
Admin (serial) connector pin-out table
409
Power connector pin-out table
410
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
403
Pin-out tables for connections
Standard 3.1
TELCO 1 connector pin-out table
Note: The colors shown in this table represent standard telephone cable
pin-outs.
Port or module
Pin # Signal
Color Pin # Signal
Color
Digital port 0
1
DP 0 RING
BL-W
26
DP 0 TIP
W-BL
Digital port 1
2
DP 1 RING
OR-W 27
DP 1 TIP
W-OR
Digital port 2
3
DP 2 RING
GR-W 28
DP 2 TIP
W-GR
Digital port 3
4
DP 3 RING
BR-W 29
DP 3 TIP
W-BR
Digital port 4
5
DP 4 RING
SL-W
30
DP 4 TIP
W-SL
Digital port 5
6
DP 5 RING
BL-R
31
DP 5 TIP
R-BL
Digital port 6
7
DP 6 RING
OR-R
32
DP 6 TIP
R-OR
Digital port 7
8
DP 7 RING
GR-R
33
DP 7 TIP
R-GR
Digital port 8
9
DP 8 RING
BR-R
34
DP 8 TIP
R-BR
Digital port 9
10
DP 9 RING
SL-R
35
DP 9 TIP
R-SL
Digital port 10
11
DP 10 RING
BL-B
36
DP 10 TIP
B-BL
Digital port 11
12
DP 11 RING
OR-B
37
DP 11 TIP
B-OR
Digital port 12
13
DP 12 RING
GR-B
38
DP 12 TIP
B-GR
Digital port 13
14
DP 13 RING
BR-B
39
DP 13 TIP
B-BR
Digital port 14
15
DP 14 RING
SL-B
40
DP 14 TIP
B-SL
Digital port 15
16
DP 15 RING
BL-Y
41
DP 15 TIP
Y-BL
Leave open for UL
spacing requirements
17
Open
OR-Y
42
Open
Y-OR
MOD 3 Tip 0+
GR-Y
43
Module 3 Tip 0-
Y-GR
Module 4
18
(ISDN BRI—ST only)
404
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Port or module
Pin-out tables for connections
Pin # Signal
Color Pin # Signal
Color
Module 4
19
(ISDN BRI—U or ST)
MOD 3 Ring 0+ BR-Y
44
Module 3 RING 0- Y-BR
Module 5
20
(ISDN BRI—ST only)
MOD 4 Tip 0+
SL-Y
45
Module 4 Tip 0-
Module 5
21
(ISDN BRI—U or ST)
MOD 4 Ring 0+ BL-V
46
Module 4 RING 0- V-BL
Module 5
(for future use)
22
MOD 4 Tip 1+
OR-V
47
Module 4 TIP 1-
Module 5
(for future use)
23
MOD 4 Ring 1+ GR-V
48
Module 4 RING 1- V-GR
Leave open for UL
spacing requirements
24
Open
BR-V
49
UK Ring
V-BR
Analog port
25
AP TIP
SL-V
50
AP RING
V-SL
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Y-SL
V-OR
405
Pin-out tables for connections
Standard 3.1
TELCO 2 connector pin-out table
Note: The colors shown in this table represent standard telephone cable
pin-outs.
Port or module
Pin # Signal
Color Pin # Signal
Color
Digital port 16
1
DP 16 RING
BL-W
26
DP 16 TIP
W-BL
Digital port 17
2
DP 17 RING
OR-W 27
DP 17 TIP
W-OR
Digital port 18
3
DP 18 RING
GR-W 28
DP 18 TIP
W-GR
Digital port 19
4
DP 19 RING
BR-W 29
DP 19 TIP
W-BR
Digital port 20
5
DP 20 RING
SL-W
30
DP 20 TIP
W-SL
Digital port 21
6
DP 21 RING
BL-R
31
DP 21 TIP
R-BL
Digital port 22
7
DP 22 RING
OR-R
32
DP 22 TIP
R-OR
Digital port 23
8
DP 23 RING
GR-R
33
DP 23 TIP
R-GR
Digital port 24
9
DP 24 RING
BR-R
34
DP 24 TIP
R-BR
Digital port 25
10
DP 25 RING
SL-R
35
DP 25 TIP
R-SL
Digital port 26
11
DP 26 RING
BL-B
36
DP 26 TIP
B-BL
Digital port 27
12
DP 27 RING
OR-B
37
DP 27 TIP
B-OR
Digital port 28
13
DP 28 RING
GR-B
38
DP 28 TIP
B-GR
Digital port 29
14
DP 29 RING
BR-B
39
DP 29 TIP
B-BR
Digital port 30
15
DP 30 RING
SL-B
40
DP 30 TIP
B-SL
Digital port 31
16
DP 31 RING
BL-Y
41
DP 31 TIP
Y-BL
Leave open for UL
spacing requirements
17
Open
OR-Y
42
Open
Y-OR
MOD 5 Tip 0+
GR-Y
43
Module 5 Tip 0-
Y-GR
Module 6
18
(ISDN BRI—ST only)
406
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Port or module
Pin-out tables for connections
Pin # Signal
Color Pin # Signal
Color
Module 6
19
(ISDN BRI—U or ST)
MOD 5 Ring 0+ BR-Y
44
Module 5 Ring 0-
Y-BR
Module 7
20
(ISDN BRI—ST only)
MOD 6 Tip 0+
SL-Y
45
Module 6 Tip 0-
Y-SL
Module 7
21
(ISDN BRI—U or ST)
MOD 6 Ring 0+ BL-V
46
Module 6 Ring 0-
V-BL
Module 7
(for future use)
22
MOD 6 Tip 1+
OR-V
47
Module 6 Tip 1-
V-OR
Module 7
(for future use)
23
MOD 6 Ring 1+ GR-V
48
Module 6 Ring 1-
V-GR
Leave open for UL
spacing requirements
24
Open
49
Open
V-BR
Fault Relay
Contact 1
25
BR-V
UNUSED
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
50
UNUSED
407
Pin-out tables for connections
Standard 3.1
Ethernet connector pin-out table
Pin number
Signal name
I/O
Description
1
TX+
O
Transmit Clock +
2
TXC
I
Transmit Clock Common (Ground)
3
TX-
O
Transmit Clock -
4
Chassis Ground
I
Shield
5
Chassis Ground
I
Shield
6
RXC
I
Receive Clock Common (Ground)
7
RX+
I
Receive Clock +
8
RX-
I
Receive Clock -
408
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Pin-out tables for connections
Admin (serial) connector pin-out table
Pin number
Signal name
I/O
Description
2
MMI-RXD
I
MMI RS-232C Receive Data
3
MMI-TXD
O
MMI RS-232C Transmit Data
Ground
I
Logic Ground
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
409
Pin-out tables for connections
Standard 3.1
Power connector pin-out table
Pin number
Signal name
I/O
Current
Description
1
+5V
I
5.0 A
+5v
2
Ground
I
3
+24V
I
1.5 A
+24v
4
-12V
I
0.1 A
+24v
410
Logic Ground
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Appendix D
Display log definitions
In this appendix
Display logs
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
412
411
Display log definitions
Standard 3.1
Display logs
The display log functionality is significantly improved over prior releases of
Remote Gateway 9150. This appendix lists the 9150 system’s display log error
and status messages.
Statistic
Definition
LOG NUMBER
0
DESCRIPTION
This is a description of the log that is being generated.
SEVERITY
NORMAL, WARNING, MINOR, MAJOR, CRITICAL
(Assigns one of these levels to the Log.)
TASK
This is the task that originates the trap. This can be the full name or
an abbreviation. (For development use only.)
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x (Lists all products that can generate this log.)
CANCELLATION
This is a cross-reference to another log number that is the
complement of the current log (for example, QOS Transition/
Recovery, Link Up/Down.) This consists of a LOG NUMBER and
send Log IDType.
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
If the Severity is higher than NORMAL, this normally contains
information that would help the end user correct the problem, if
possible (for example, a Configuration Change), or give them
information about where the user can go for help.
PARAMETERS
1) description of parameter 1
2) description of parameter 2
.
.
.
N) description of parameter N
DISPLAYED TEXT
This information describing the event that led to the occurrence of
this log appears in the Display Logs pop-up window.
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
This information indicates whether the host PBX produces an alarm
and alert.
412
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
1
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the system started.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Version string
DISPLAYED TEXT
System started. S/W Version - P1
LOG NUMBER
2
DESCRIPTION
This logs indicates that there was a failure in allocation of the TCM
block.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
None
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
TCM buffer is exhausted. If the problem persists re-boot the system
and report back to vendor.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Out of TCM buffer
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
413
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
3
DESCRIPTION
This logs indicates that there was a failure in allocation of memory
of size 'n'.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
None
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Memory buffers exhausted. If the problem persists re-boot the
system.
PARAMETERS
1) Size of memory block that the system failed to allocate
DISPLAYED TEXT
Couldn’t allocate memory of size P1
LOG NUMBER
4
DESCRIPTION
This logs indicates that there was a failure in sending a message to
a Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
None
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) The destination host is unreachable check its status.
2) Check the configuration.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of remote board for which message was intended
DISPLAYED TEXT
Couldn’t send message to unit ID: P1
414
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
5
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the QoS of the IP network degraded and the
system transitioned to the PSTN.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
QoS Transitioning
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 2 - FB_RECOVERY_LOG_ID
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Investigate why the IP network was determined to be below VoIP
quality. Review the Engineering Guidelines.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit for which the IP
QoS has degraded
DISPLAYED TEXT
Transition to Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
LOG NUMBER
6
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the QoS of the IP network recovered and the
system transitioned to the IP Network.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Fallback
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 1 - FB_FALLBACK_LOG_ID
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Investigate why the IP network was determined to be below VoIP
quality. Review the Engineering Guidelines.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit for which the IP
QOS has recovered
DISPLAYED TEXT
Recovery to Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
415
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
7
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a user logged onto the system.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Session Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 8
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Connection (serial or Telnet) through which user logged onto
system
DISPLAYED TEXT
User logged on: P1
LOG NUMBER
8
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a user logged off from the system.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Session Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 7
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Logoff type – normal or terminated
DISPLAYED TEXT
User logged off: P1
416
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
9
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that logon to the system failed.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Session Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Reason – wrong user name, password, device busy, and so on
DISPLAYED TEXT
User login failed: P1
LOG NUMBER
10
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a debug Session Terminated. A debug session
that was inactive for more than 15 minutes was automatically
logged off from the system.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Session Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Reason for termination
DISPLAYED TEXT
Debug session terminated: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
417
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
11
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that database reading from Flash at Power on
failed. This can be caused by corrupted Flash. As a result, the
system starts with the default configuration.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Re-configure the system and then save it to Flash.
Note: When you save configuration changes to Flash, the
system suspends new call processing for approximately 30
seconds.
2) Restart the system and log into the system and check the
configured parameters. If the problem persists contact your
vendor.
PARAMETERS
1) Reason reading from Flash failed
DISPLAYED TEXT
Database reading from Flash failed - P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
418
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
12
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that user tried saving a new configuration to
Flash.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status of Save to Flash – success or failure
DISPLAYED TEXT
Database save to Flash: P1
LOG NUMBER
13
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a user defaulted the configuration of the
board using the Set default configuration command.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Database defaulted
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
419
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
14
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that User tried a configuration upload.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status - success or failure
2) Name of configuration file
3) IP address of source of configuration file
DISPLAYED TEXT
Database upload: P1 (P2 from P3)
LOG NUMBER
15
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an application module is enabled and not
plugged in. This can happen when the user configures a module
and then removes it from the system.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Re-configure the application module and plug it in again.
PARAMETERS
1) Module type
2) Mismatch details
DISPLAYED TEXT
Application module configuration mismatch: P1 P2
420
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
16
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there is a DN clash. This can happen for the
following reasons:
! One DN is configured for multiple ports
! One access code is configured for trunk groups
! One SPRE code is configured for different functions
! A longer DN number exists
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check for duplication of configuration (Use “Get DN List” to see the
data) and correct it.
PARAMETERS
1) Type of Data
2) First clashing port number
3) Second clashing port number
DISPLAYED TEXT
DN clash: P1 P2 P3
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
421
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
17
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the user tried to upload software. This could
be application software or ISDN module software.
After an application software upload, the system is normally
restarted. Therefore, it is possible that this log was lost.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status - success or failure
2) Module type - application or ISDN
3) File name
4) Source of file (for example, IP address)
DISPLAYED TEXT
Software upload: P1 (P2, P3 from P4)
LOG NUMBER
18
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a user tried a cross connection to the host
PBX over RS232 Port using the XConnect command.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status of cross-connect attempt - success or failure
DISPLAYED TEXT
User cross connect to PBX: P1
422
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
19
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a user tried a Remote connection to another
system using the Telnet command.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status of Telnet attempt - success or failure
2) Destination (for example, IP address)
DISPLAYED TEXT
User remote connection: P1 P2
LOG NUMBER
20
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the power on initialization of the ports completed.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Power-on initialization of ports completed
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
423
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
21
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the remote site re-initialized upon Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit configuration change.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit re-initialized
DISPLAYED TEXT
Remote site: P1 is re-initialized
LOG NUMBER
22
DESCRIPTION
This log signals that the link to the specified Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit went down.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for transport medium (IP or PSTN) connectivity and
configuration.
2) If medium is PSTN, check BRI status on the PBX.
3) If transport medium connectivity is OK, but the problem
continues, then re-boot the RLC and the remote unit.
4) If the problem persists, contact your vendor.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit to which the link
went down
DISPLAYED TEXT
Link down for Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
424
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
23
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
registered.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit that registered
DISPLAYED TEXT
Remote site: P1 is registered
LOG NUMBER
24
DESCRIPTION
This log signals a port registration clash for a dedicated port.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Possible mis-configuration on remote. Check the configurations.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number of first clashing remote port
2) Unit ID of the remote on which first clashing port resides
3) Number of dedicated RLC port for which there is a clash
4) Port number of second clashing remote port
5) Unit ID of the remote on which the second clashing port resides
DISPLAYED TEXT
Registration clash for port P1 on Remote Site: P2 with port P3 on
the RLC. Dedicated port P3 is already registered with port P4 of the
Remote Site: P5
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
425
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
25
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a remote port registered with a multi-user/
dynamic RLC port.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Port number of remote port registered on multi-user/dynamic port
2) Unit ID of remote on which remote port resides
3) Port number of multi-user/dynamic port on RLC
DISPLAYED TEXT
Port P1 on Remote Site: P2 is registered with multi-user /dynamic
pool port P3
426
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
26
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a port registration clash for a multi-user port.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Make sure that this port is not registered with any other remote
unit.
2) If the port is already registered with another remote unit,
determine to which remote unit the port needs to be registered.
3) If you need to register the port with a remote unit other than the
one it is currently registered to, change the configuration and reboot the RLC and the remote unit.
PARAMETERS
1) Number of remote port for which there is a registration clash
2) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit on which port
resides
3) Port number of multi-user port on RLC
4) Port number of currently registered remote port
5) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit on which
currently registered port resides
DISPLAYED TEXT
Registration clash for port P1 on Remote Site: P2 with multi-user
port P3. Multi-user port P3 is already registered with port P4 on
Remote Site P5
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
427
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
27
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a port registration failed for a dynamic pool
port. All ports in this dynamic pool are registered and no port is
available for use.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Make sure that this port is not registered with any other remote
unit.
2) If the port is already registered with another remote unit,
determine to which remote unit the port needs to be registered.
3) If you need to register the port with a remote unit other than the
one it is currently registered to, change the configuration and reboot the RLC and the remote unit.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number on remote for which there is a registration failure
2) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit on which port
resides
DISPLAYED TEXT
Registration failed for dynamic pool port P1 on Remote Site: P2
428
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
28
DESCRIPTION
This logs indicates that there was a failure in allocation of a new call
register.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Device Control, Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
The system memory allocation has failed and might have been
exhausted. If the problem persists re-boot the system.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number
DISPLAYED TEXT
Call register allocation failed in local calling on Port P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
429
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
29
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there were insufficient DSP channels when a
voice call was attempted.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Device Control/Call Processing
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) All the DSP channels on the system are in use. Wait for calls to
be dropped.
2) To avoid blocking, either distribute calls onto additional RLCs
and 9150s, or add DSP modules to existing equipment, provided
there is space available for additional modules. Otherwise action
# 1 applies.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP resource allocation failed on Port P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
430
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
30
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that allocation of a local trunk for a local call
failed. The possible reasons for failure are:
1) All the trunks are in use.
2) There are no Local or Local/Remote trunks configured.
3) The BRI link may be down or the BRI module might not be
plugged in completely.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Confirm that the BRI modules are plugged in properly and the
BRI link is UP.
2) Confirm that the BRI configuration is correct.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number
DISPLAYED TEXT
Local trunk allocation failed on port P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
431
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
31
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a local call failed because the dialed DN
didn’t exist.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Verify the dialed digits with the configuration numbers.
PARAMETERS
1) Dialed digits
DISPLAYED TEXT
Unassigned number P1
LOG NUMBER
32
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a local call failed because the sequence of
dialed digits is not allowed on the set that is attempting to place the
call.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Verify that the dialed digits don't match the disabled outbound
digits.
PARAMETERS
1) Dialed digits
DISPLAYED TEXT
Disabled outbound digits blocked P1
432
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
33
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the DSP cross connect failed, which might
have resulted in no voice path being established.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Contact the vendor if the problem persists.
PARAMETERS
1) Port number
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP cross connect failed on port P1
LOG NUMBER
34
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a change in the system mode.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control, Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status: online/offline
DISPLAYED TEXT
Changing system mode to: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
433
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
35
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there was a failure in registering to a remote
RLC. This would indicate that the Host is unreachable through both
the IP and the PSTN.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for the IP/PSTN connectivity.
2) Check for the remote Host status.
3) Check the correctness of configuration. Units must be enabled.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of remote site to which registration failed
DISPLAYED TEXT
Failed to register to Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
434
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
36
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the success or failure of a Remote Gateway 9150
unit port’s attempt to register with a multi-user/dynamic port on a
RLC.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Determine if the port was in use.
2) Configure the port as a multi-user/dynamic port.
3) The host RLC is unreachable.
PARAMETERS
1) 9150 unit’s port number attempting to register with the multiuser/dynamic port on the RLC
2) Registered or unregistered status of 9150 unit’s port
3) Port number of multi-user/dynamic port on RLC
DISPLAYED TEXT
ROU port P1, P2 to RLC port P3
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
435
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
37
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an attempt to connect to a Remote Gateway
9100 Series unit on the specified medium failed.
1) If the same message is displayed with both IP and PSTN, in
succession, the specified remote cannot be reached.
2) If only one message displays with a specific medium while
connections on other medium are fine, it indicates a possible
attempt to connect on the medium due to:
a) Priority of the call that requires only that medium. Voice call
would have failed. Check for log number 55.
b) IP QoS state and priority level required a first attempt on the
specified medium. A voice call would have succeeded on the
other medium, though it cannot be guaranteed.
c) Attempt was made on receiving a QoS status message.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Verify the following:
1) Correctness of configurations
2) Whether the network connections are proper
3) Status of the remote board
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
2) Medium on which the attempt failed
DISPLAYED TEXT
Not able to connect to Remote Site: P1 on P2 medium
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
436
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
38
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an attempt to bring up an additional trunk
failed due to the lack of an unoccupied, configured trunk.
This could cause the failure of a voice call depending on the media
allowed to communicate to that remote, the priority of the call, and
the Extra Bandwidth configured.
However, verify the presence of log number 55 on the RLC to see if
a voice call did not succeed. Look for the presence of log number
37 on the RLC. It indicates that an attempt was made to connect
the voice call on that medium, but that the medium was not
reachable.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Verify for the specified log numbers and note them. If this happens
frequently, new trunks may have to be added.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
No free additional trunk available to Remote Site: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
437
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
39
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there an attempt was made to get an
additional trunk on the PSTN.
This message has a corresponding message with same number on
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit board. This can cause a voice call
to fail, depending on the media allowed to communicate with that
remote device and the priority of the call.
However, check for the presence of log number 55 on the RLC to
see if a voice call did not succeed. Look for the presence of log
number 37 on the RLC. It indicates that an attempt was made to
connect the voice call on that medium, but that the medium was not
reachable.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Ensure the PSTN numbers shown in Trunk Configuration are
correct on both the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
2) Ensure the trunk route to that Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
is not busy.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
2) PSTN number attempted
3) A flag to indicate whether attempt is made by remote board or
local board.
a) indicates attempt made by local board
b) indicates attempt made by remote board
DISPLAYED TEXT
Attempt to bring-up additional trunk failed. Remote P1, PSTN
number P2, flag P3
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
438
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
40
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an attempt to transition to the PSTN failed.
Appearance of this message does not cause a voice call to drop.
However, if RLC log numbers 42 or 56 display, the system can drop
voice calls and not be able to connect to the Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit temporarily.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Look for correctness of primary PSTN number. If PSTN is disabled,
ignore this message
2) Trunk route might be busy to that remote.
3) If the specified logs also display, IP network could be down
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Transition did not happen to Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
439
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
41
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the failure of the system to connect to the specified
remote on the IP network due to a network problem other than
unacceptable QoS.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for problems on the IP network.
2) Wait for more attempts because connections can take more time
depending on nature of the network.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Attempt to recover to IP network failed to Remote Site: P1
440
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
42
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the IP network failed abruptly while there
were connections routed over IP, dropping active voice calls. To
check for dropped voice calls, look for log number 56.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check if the IP connection is intact or if there is another problem on
the IP network.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Abnormal failure of IP network. Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
441
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
43
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the failure of a non-primary trunk. This might lead
to dropping of voice calls to compensate the bandwidth loss in the
absence of an IP connection to the Remote Gateway 9100 Series
unit. Look for log number 56 to see if any calls were dropped.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Verify that the PSTN connections are OK.
2) If this displays on the RLC, look for log number 46 on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. If this ID is there, it is a genuine
closure.
3) Link might have failed somewhere in the PSTN.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Abnormal failure of one of the additional trunks. Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
442
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
44
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates an abnormal failure of the primary signaling link.
This leads to the dropping of all active connections to the Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check IP and trunk connections. (physical connections)
2) If this displays on the RLC, look for log number 45 on the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit. If this log is there, it is a genuine
closure.
3) Link might have failed some where in the Public network.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID to which communication is
lost
DISPLAYED TEXT
Abnormal failure of primary signaling to Remote Site: P1
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
443
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
45
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the primary signaling was dropped due to a
request for a 911 (emergency) call, resulting in a temporary loss of
communication with RLC.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
This indicates that there are not enough trunks and the primary
trunk had to be used for a 911 (emergency) call. Check if number of
trunks can be increased (9150 only).
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Primary trunk dropped to place 911 call
LOG NUMBER
46
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the system dropped one of the additional
trunks to place a 911 (emergency) call as there were no available
trunks.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Closing an additional trunk to place 911 call
444
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
47
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that inactivity timer creation failed. This could
lead to the primary signaling channel not closing to the remote. If
the IP QoS is BAD, the PSTN trunk stays on. Otherwise, IP stay on.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
To overcome this situation, make sure no one is using a Remote
Gateway 9100 Series unit telephone, then go to offline mode and
come back to online. This restores normal operation. Use online/
offline spree codes on theRemote Gateway 9150 or Remote
Gateway 911x Series unit.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Timer creation failed. Signal will not be closed to Remote Site: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
445
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
48
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the failure of a connection because of incorrect
security information due to one of the following situations:
1) A valid remote tried to connect with inappropriate security data.
2) The Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit rejected a connection
initiated by the local unit.
3) There is a security issue with bringing up an additional trunk.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check that the security levels and security IDs are correct in
configuration.
2) Security issue for additional trunks comes up if security level is
CLID security and configuration is improper.
3) This may be an indication of an unauthorized Remote Gateway
9100 Series unit attempting to connect.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
2) Medium
3) Connection type: primary/additional
DISPLAYED TEXT
Security Failure to Remote Site: P1 on Medium P2, ConnType = P3
446
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
49
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an unknown remote tried to connect and the
attempt failed.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Confirm that the configuration of the unit IDs are OK between the
units.
2) This may be an indication of an unauthorized Remote Gateway
9100 Series unit attempting to connect.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
DISPLAYED TEXT
Message from invalid Remote Site: P1
LOG NUMBER
50
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a connection came in on an unconfigured
port and was rejected by the system. (PSTN connections)
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for proper port configurations on the RLC and Remote
Gateway 9150 unit.
2) Check if a local call came in on a remote-only BRI port. Ensure
that non-remote only BRI trunk numbers only are given to
outsiders to call 9150's local sets.
3) Unauthorized unit may be trying to connect. Verify!
PARAMETERS
1) PSTN number from which the call originates
DISPLAYED TEXT
Incoming connection rejected. Address P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
447
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
51
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that an incoming connection from the specified
Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit failed because the specified
medium is not allowed to connect to that Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check the correctness of configurations.
2) Verify that unit trying to connect has needed authorization.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
2) The medium to which it attempted to connect
DISPLAYED TEXT
Remote Site: P1 trying to connect on unconfigured Medium P2]
LOG NUMBER
52
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that no activity was found on the signaling link
and all remote service phones were idle.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Signaling closed to Remote Site: P1 due to no activity
448
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
53
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit went
offline. No communication is possible until the unit goes online
again or online time occurs. In offline mode, all connections,
including permanent trunks, if any, are closed.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID going offline
DISPLAYED TEXT
Close signal as unit goes offline. Remote Site: P1
LOG NUMBER
54
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates an attempt to reach an invalid remote.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for proper configuration
2) Check for updates completed while system was active.
3) If the message is consistent, even after proper configuration,
report to vendor.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit to which connection
was attempted
DISPLAYED TEXT
Connection attempted to invalid Remote Site: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
449
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
55
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the system was unable to place a voice call,
which could be caused by the following conditions:
1) No connection to the remote. Attempts failed.
2) HIGH/NORMAL priority: No bandwidth on trunk and IP not
available.
3) PSTN only call: No bandwidth available, trunk disabled, or trunk
not reachable.
4) IP only call: IP not reachable or not enabled.
5) Some inconsistency within the system - Synchronization
between RLC - 9150/911x.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Verify correctness of configurations.
2) Verify physical connections on the medium according to
information in 1), above.
Note: If this happens consistently for all calls, and is not an
obvious problem due to configuration or bandwidth limitations,
view the statistics and report the problem.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
2) amount of bandwidth the system needs to place the additional
call
DISPLAYED TEXT
Voice call did not succeed to Remote Site: P1 [BW required P2]
450
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
56
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates an abnormal failure of a call. Possible reasons
include:
1) Sudden link failure on the given medium
2) Drop of remote trunks on the 9150/911x side for a 911
(emergency) call
3) Sudden primary signaling failure
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Look for log numbers 42, 43, and 44 to ascertain the reason active
calls were dropped.
PARAMETERS
1) Bandwidth of the call
2) Unit ID of remote to which call is connected
3) Medium on which the call was active at the time of failure
DISPLAYED TEXT
Call of P1 BW got dropped to Remote Site: P2, medium: P3
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
451
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
57
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a failed attempt to switch a voice connection to
the specified medium. This is an indication of a loss of one of the
following:
1) Signaling packets
2) Synchronization between RLC - 9150, 911x
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
This does not happen in normal operation. Report its occurrence.
PARAMETERS
1) Bandwidth of the call
2) Medium from which the system attempted to switch the call
3) Medium to which the system attempted to switch the call
4) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Call of P1 BW did not switch from medium: P2 to medium: P3
Remote Site: P4
LOG NUMBER
58
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there is no available trunk in the given trunk
group to place a local trunk call.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
If this happens consistently, consider reconfiguring B-channel
allocations on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
PARAMETERS
1) Trunk Group Number
DISPLAYED TEXT
Local call did not succeed
452
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
59
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a local call was dropped because of an
abnormal link failure.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Confirm that physical trunk connections are intact.
2) Check for failure on the PSTN.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Local trunk call abnormally failed
LOG NUMBER
60
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a local trunk call was dropped for an
emergency (911) call because there were no free trunks.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Local call dropped for 911
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
453
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
61
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the signaling link to a Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit was established on the specified medium.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit ID
2) Medium
DISPLAYED TEXT
Signaling is UP to Remote Site: P1 on medium: P2
LOG NUMBER
62
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the IDVR server has gone down.
(This log is not generated in the 1.2.1 release.)
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Device Control, Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, IDVR
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Check for the IP connectivity to server.
2) Check for the IDVR server status.
PARAMETERS
1) IDVR server’s IP address
DISPLAYED TEXT
IDVR server status: P1
454
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
63
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a PSTN connection to a peer unit failed. This
could be caused by several possible problems, including:
1) A cabling issue at the Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit could
keep that unit from being able to connect on the PSTN.
2) The data port on the RLC could be disabled.
3) For BRI connections between a 9150 and an RLC the PSTN
path may not be a 64K clear channel (the required path).
4) Incorrect dial numbers could be keeping the circuit from
establishing.
5) Bit errors could be occurring preventing communication from
working. This could be due to bad cables or a bad connection.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
TP
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
To check for the possible problems named above, do the following:
1) Check the PSTN connections at the Remote Gateway 9100
Series unit.
2) Confirm that the RLC’s data port is enabled.
3) Confirm that BRI connections between a 9150 unit and its RLC
are 64K clear channel (the required path).
4) Confirm that the correct numbers are configured on both ends.
5) Confirm that cables and connections on both ends are good.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN connection failed to initialize
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
455
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
64
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the unit attempted a PSTN connection to its
peer unit at too slow a bit rate. This severely damages system
performance since all bandwidth calculations are incorrect.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
TP
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
The PSTN path between a 9150 and RLC requires a clear 64K
channel.
If this log occurs every time a PSTN call is made, then either the
wrong service has been ordered from the telephone company or the
telephone company has provided the wrong service.
If this log occurs intermittently then the connection through the central
office has encountered some sort of problem.
It is still possible, however, that the wrong service has been ordered,
or provided, and that the majority of the time the PSTN has had a
clear channel by chance. Some customers have reported that they
requested the 64K channel, but a 54K channel was provided instead.
Another possible scenario is that bit errors could be occurring,
preventing communication from initializing at 64K, but allowing 56K.
This is probably the lease frequent cause.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN connection initialized at 56K clear channel unavailable
456
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
65
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the unit attempted a PSTN connection to its
peer unit, and that the connection attempt succeeded initially at
56K, failed at 65K, and then failed again at 56K.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
TP
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
This problem is most likely related to log number 64 where a clear
64K channel could not be obtained.
It is possible that the attempt to increase speed to 64K caused a
problem with the central office, making it impossible to re-establish
at 56K. This would increase the likelihood of the problem being due
to a high bit error rate on the link.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN connection failed to re-initiate at 56K
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
457
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
66
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the database has been converted from an
older version to the current version. The start and end versions are
specified. The status of the conversion is also available.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
If the status is Failure, then re-configure the system.
PARAMETERS
1) Status
2) Starting version (From version)
3) Current version (To version)
DISPLAYED TEXT
Database Conversion: P1 P1 [From Ver P2 to P3]
458
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
67
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a locally defined feature clashes with a PBX
defined feature.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
1) In the case of failure, check the key configurations on the switch
and the key configurations done on the 911x, 9150, IDVR for the
port concerned.
2) In case of clash re-define the local feature on a key that is not
being used for a PBX feature.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit Port Number
2) Key Number
DISPLAYED TEXT
Port P1: Local Feature Overrides PBX Feature on key P2
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
459
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
68
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a PSTN connectivity test has started to a
specified remote, in a specified mode.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote board ID
2) Mode in which test started
a) Disruptive test
b) Non disruptive test
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN connectivity test started for remote = P1, in mode = P2
460
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
69
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a PSTN connectivity test is completed or
aborted.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote board ID
2) Reason that the test ended
a) Normal end
b) Aborted
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN connectivity test ended for remote = P1 and P2
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
461
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
70
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there was a failure in adding a DN to the
system because the DN was already in the system. If you want to
place a local call to this digital telephone set, you must use the
number configured through Configuration Manager.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
Do not configure MADN on the primary key if both of the digital
telephone sets are on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit Port Number
2) DN which couldn’t be added to the system
DISPLAYED TEXT
MADN Conflict for DN P1 on Port P2: Could not update local DN
462
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
71
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the PBX has returned an Illegal number error
when attempting to dial from the Network port on the RLC to the
Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
Most frequently, this error occurs when the dialed number is going
to be routed by the PBX, or Central Office, over an analog trunk
instead of a clear channel data path.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
DL
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
1) Verify that the Network port is configured correctly on the PBX.
2) Verify that the number dialed from the RLC to the Remote
Gateway 9150 unit is correct.
3) Verify that the PBX trunks used allow clear channel data. LD 80
traces of the data port are helpful.
4) Verify that Central Office is not routing the data call over voice
circuits.
PARAMETERS
1) Network port from which this call was placed
2) Last number dialed by a Network port, usually this port
DISPLAYED TEXT
Network Port P1 call to P2 may be routed over Voice circuits
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
463
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
72
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a key map update is written into the Flash.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Status - SUCCESS if Save to Flash is successful. FAILED if the
Flash save attempt failed.
DISPLAYED TEXT
Key Map Save to Flash: P1
LOG NUMBER
73
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates an invalid compression algorithm (such as,
G.729A/Fax or G.726) has been configured for a port connected to
a Remote Gateway 911x Series unit and that the algorithm has
been reset to G.729A.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the 911x unit
2) Port number used for the 911x unit
DISPLAYED TEXT
"Remote Site: P1[911x] registered to Port P2 with Invalid
Compression, reset to G.729A
464
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
74
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates a status change (such as, UP/DOWN) for the BRI
line.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
BRI Manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Describes status change (such as, UP/DOWN)
2) BRI Module Number
DISPLAYED TEXT
P1 detected for BRI Module P2
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
LOG NUMBER
75
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the system is not able to bring up an analog
line due to non-availability of modem DSPs.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
1) Ensure that enough Modem channels are configured on the
DSPs.
2) Determine whether you need more DSP application modules to
provide adequate DSP resources.
PARAMETERS
1) Unit ID of the affected remote unit
DISPLAYED TEXT
Not able to connect remote: P1 on modem due to non availability of
Modem channels
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
465
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
76
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the software version of the remote unit is
incompatible with the software version installed in the unit
generating this message.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
9150, RLC, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
Verify software versions on both units.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Communication with Remote P1 is not possible due to software
incompatibility
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
LOG NUMBER
77
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the RLC's remote unit configuration does not
match the remote device that is initiating the call. This is probably
due to a configuration error.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
A log that indicates signaling is up on any medium to that remote
unit.
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
1) Verify the Remote Unit configuration.
2) Ensure that no one else is trying connect to this unit through
improper configuration.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Remote Unit = P1 is found to be of incompatible board type.
Communication not possible
466
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
78
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the key map version of the PBX software has
changed. This is normal when upgrading major PBX versions.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
None
PARAMETERS
1) Key map database start version
2) Key map database end version
3) Status (Success or Failure)
DISPLAYED TEXT
PBX Model database conversion from Ver P1 to Ver P2 P3
LOG NUMBER
79
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates an error in reading key map Flash.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
1) Reset remote unit. If the problem persists, try action #2.
2) Disable and re-enable the RLC. If the problem persists, try action
#3.
3) Reset the RLC and the remote unit. If the problem persists,
contact your vendor.
PARAMETERS
1) SUCCESS or reason for failure
DISPLAYED TEXT
PBX Model database read - P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
467
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
80
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that connectivity on the specified medium to the
specified remote unit closed. This is a part of normal system
operation.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote unit
2) Medium (ISDN, IP)
DISPLAYED TEXT
Connectivity is closed to Remote: P1 on Medium: P2
468
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
81
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that connectivity on the specified medium to the
specified remote failed abnormally due to an unspecified problem
on the network.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
A message that indicates that signaling is up on the specified
medium
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check for the following on the specified medium:
1) Check the network connectivity both at the RLC and remote site.
2) Check if any problem arose anywhere else on the network
between the RLC and remote site.
3) Check if any of the units were reset for any reason.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote unit
2) Medium (ISDN, IP)
DISPLAYED TEXT
Abnormal failure of connectivity on Medium: P1 to Remote: P2
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
469
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
82
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that Network Manager task states for a particular
remote unit was reset and all the connections to the remote were
cleared. This can happen due to the following reasons:
1) An error occurred in the system to automatically trigger Network
Manager reset.
2) The user has issued a debug command "nmr x" where x is a
valid remote unit number.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
System usually works as normal after the log is displayed. If not,
contact technical support personal for help. If the log is displayed
too frequently, check if anyone is entering debug commands. If not,
contact technical support.
PARAMETERS
1) Remote unit
DISPLAYED TEXT
States reset in NM for Remote: P1
470
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
83
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the result of DN Discovery on the RLC. If the result
in the log is Failure or Partial Success then the system retries for up
to five times at three minute intervals if the port(s) is (are) busy during
the first attempt. The system records the status of the initial attempt
as well as the last attempt, if made.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Ensure that the log shows SUCCESS after every DN Discovery
session (either triggered by time-of-day or manually). In case of
FAILURE/PARTIAL SUCCESS, check if the DN Discovery port is in
idle (not in set busy or call forwarded) state.
PARAMETERS
1) Status: SUCCESS, PARTIAL SUCCESS, FAILURE
DISPLAYED TEXT
DN Discovery has completed: result - P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
471
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
84
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a voice/modem DSP has loaded successfully.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
VPM
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Single-digit DSP device ID
2) DSP module
3) DSP device
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP #P1 load successful. (P2, P3)
472
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
85
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a voice/modem DSP load attempt has Failed,
indicating a possible hardware problem.
If this log entry is not followed by log entry 83, the DSP is out of
service for the duration of the session (that is, until RESET or powercycle).
On the 911x, this message indicates failure of the only DSP and
represents a CRITICAL failure.
SEVERITY
MAJOR (CRITICAL on 911x)
TASK
VPM
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 83 (DSP load successful)
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
1) Swap DSP module slot positions to see if the failure follows one
DSP module. Report failures to on-board DSPs (Module 0) to
Nortel.
2) Check DSP status using Configuration Manager's Alarms/Stats/
Logs → DSP Statistics screen.
PARAMETERS
1) Single-digit DSP device ID
2) DSP module number
2) DSP device number
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP #P1 load failure. (P2, P3)
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
473
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
86
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a DSP failure was detected and automatic
dynamic recovery was initiated.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
VPM
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Single-digit DSP device ID
2) DSP module number
3) DSP device number
4) If the user manually initiates the request, the cause shows as User.
If the reload arose from detection of DSP failure and subsequent
automatic dynamic DSP recovery, the cause shows as Auto.
Note: If the DSP has already been taken out of service (OOS) due
to catastrophic failure, the code ignores the reload request and
leaves the DSP OOS.
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP #P1 reloading. (Mod, Dev) = (P2, P3) Cause: P4
474
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
87
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a DSP has been taken Out Of Service. This
can occur for the following reasons:
1) Download or initialization failure (such as, at system startup)
2) Dynamic DSP failure with automatic recovery
3) User execution of the DSP restart debug command, which first
takes the DSP OOS, then tries to restart it
SEVERITY
MAJOR (CRITICAL on 911x)
TASK
VPM
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
This action is followed by either log number 83 or 84, to indicate
reload SUCCESS or FAILURE, respectively.
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
No action is required unless this results from DSP load failure (refer
to log number 84).
PARAMETERS
1) Single-digit DSP device ID
2) DSP module number
3) DSP device number
DISPLAYED TEXT
DSP #P1 taken OOS. (Module, Device) = (P2, P3)
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
475
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
88
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that a modem channel has been requested when
no modem channels were available. It can occur if an insufficient
number of DSPs have been configured with the 911x DSP load.
SEVERITY
MAJOR (CRITICAL on 911x)
TASK
VPM
PRODUCT
RLC, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check the RLC configuration to ensure that a sufficient number of
DSPs have been configured with the 911x DSP load.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Modem channel request denied: No modem channels available
LOG NUMBER
90
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that no emergency number is programmed in the
table..
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
MMI
PRODUCT
9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN:
Configure at least one emergency number on the Remote Gateway
9100 Series Configuration Manager 9150 or 911x System
Configuration property sheet, as appropriate to your remote unit.
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
No Emergency no's are configured
476
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
91
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates the status of a BRI module that has started (or
restarted) because of a system startup or manual restart.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
BRI manager
PRODUCT
9150
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Monitor the BRI module. If the cause is not a user-initiated reset, a
problem exists with either the BRI hardware or software. Try
replacing the BRI module, or swapping the BRI module with another
slot that shows no problem. If the problem persists, contact Nortel.
Note: MMI code (via MMI_SW_UPLD_LOG_ID) reports the status of
a BRI module restart resulting from an upload command.
PARAMETERS
1) BRI Module
2) Reset status (SUCCESS or FAILURE), activity leading to the error
(System Startup, User Reset)
DISPLAYED TEXT
BRI #P1 boot status: P2
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
477
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
92
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that there is a mismatch in the circuit rule for the
MADN ports. All ports in the same MADN group should have the
same compression rate and priority.
SEVERITY
WARNING
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Configure the Circuit rule for all the ports in the MADN Group the
same. Save the configuration and force DN Discovery from
Configuration Manager.
PARAMETERS
1) MADN Group Number
2) DN
3) Port Number
4) Port Number
DISPLAYED TEXT
478
MADN group P1 (DN P2) Circuit rule mismatch for ports P3 and P4
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
93
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the Emergency Access Code (EAC) has
been dialed from a port.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Port number that dialed the emergency access code
2) DN that dialed the emergency access code
DISPLAYED TEXT
Emergency Code Dialed from port: P1, DN: P2
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
LOG NUMBER
94
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that ONLINE SPRE code was dialed from a port.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 2 - FB_RECOVERY_LOG_ID
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Port number that dialed the SPRE code
DISPLAYED TEXT
Online SPRE Code dialed from port: P1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
479
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
95
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the OFFLINE SPRE code was dialed from a
port.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Device Control
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 2 - FB_RECOVERY_LOG_ID
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Port number that dialed the SPRE code
DISPLAYED TEXT
Offline SPRE Code dialed from port: P1
LOG NUMBER
96
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that the Auto Upgrade function was attempted.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Auto Upgrade
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
Log number 2 - FB_RECOVERY_LOG_ID
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Success/Failed
2) TCPIP Address of TFTP Server used
3) Filename used in the transfer
4) Result of the action
DISPLAYED TEXT
Upgrade P1 TFTP Server: P2 File: P3 - P4
PRODUCES HOST PBX
ALARM AND ALERT
Yes
480
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
97
DESCRIPTION
This log indicates that no activity is found on the signaling link,
when all digital telephone sets connected to Remote Gateway 911x
Series units are idle, and the modem needs to be retrained. The
error is detected by the RLC.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) Remote Unit ID
DISPLAYED TEXT
Modem retrain, remote ID P1, error detected by RLC
LOG NUMBER
99
DESCRIPTION
This message indicates that an incoming call is being transferred
due to network congestion but the transfer has failed.
SEVERITY
CRITICAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check PBX configuration.
PARAMETERS
1) String indicating the nature of the failure.
2) Destination port number of the incoming call.
3) Device key number the call is on.
DISPLAYED TEXT
Network Congestion Call Transfer failure: P1 Port P2, Key P3
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
481
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
100
DESCRIPTION
This message indicates that an incoming call is being transferred
due to network Congestion but the transfer has failed.
SEVERITY
MAJOR
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check PBX configuration for this device.
PARAMETERS
1) String indicating the nature of the failure.
2) Destination port number of the incoming call.
3) Device key number the call is on.
DISPLAYED TEXT
Network Congestion Call Transfer failure: P1 Port P2, Key P3
LOG NUMBER
101
DESCRIPTION
This message indicates that an incoming call is being transferred
due to network congestion but the transfer has failed.
SEVERITY
MINOR
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
Check communication with the PBX.
PARAMETERS
1) String indicating the nature of the failure.
2) Destination port number of the incoming call.
3) Device key number the call is on.
DISPLAYED TEXT
482
Network Congestion Call Transfer failure: P1 Port P2, Key P3
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Statistic
Display log definitions
Definition
LOG NUMBER
102
DESCRIPTION
This message indicates successful transfer of an incoming call due
to network congestion.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Call Processing
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) String indicating "Completed".
2) Destination port number of the incoming call.
3) Device key number the call is on.
DISPLAYED TEXT
Network Congestion Call Transfer: P1 Port P2, Key P3
LOG NUMBER
103
DESCRIPTION
Indication of the PSTN Direction Establishment feature.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
Network Manager
PRODUCT
RLC
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
1) String
DISPLAYED TEXT
PSTN Direction Establishment Feature P1.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
483
Display log definitions
Statistic
Standard 3.1
Definition
LOG NUMBER
104
DESCRIPTION
Software system reset is being performed.
SEVERITY
NORMAL
TASK
None
PRODUCT
RLC, 9150, 911x
CANCELLATION
None
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
None
PARAMETERS
None
DISPLAYED TEXT
Software System Reset.
484
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Glossary
10BaseT Ethernet
The Ethernet standard for baseband local area networks using twisted-pair cable
carrying 10 megabits per second (Mbps) in a star topology.
A
A-law
A companding technique used in encoding and decoding audio signals in
30-channel pulse code modulated (PCM) systems. A-law companding is the
primary method used in Europe. Refer also to Mu-law.
adapter
Hardware required to support a particular device. For example, network adapters
provide a port for the network wire. Adapters can be expansion boards or part of
the computer’s main circuitry.
administrator
A user who is responsible for maintaining the RLC or its associated remote
units.
agent
A person who is responsible for handling customer calls.
analog
The type of signal used by most telephone connections. A modem converts a
digital (computer) signal to analog, and vice versa, so that the signal can travel
through telephone lines.
API
Refer to Application Program Interface.
application
A program that runs on a computer.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
485
Glossary
Standard 3.1
Application Program Interface
A set of routines, protocols, and tools that programmers use to develop software
applications. APIs simplify the development process by providing commonly
used programming procedures.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications
A separate system or built-in feature of a PBX that equally distributes incoming
calls to agents. As calls come in, they are placed into a queue (or a waiting line)
for the next available agent. The RLC and its associated remote units support all
of Nortel’s ACD applications.
B
bandwidth
The amount of data that the network can transmit, usually expressed in Mbytes
per second.
baseboard
Refer to motherboard.
Basic Input/Output System
Flash ROM-based code that runs the Power-On Self-Test (POST) and bootstrap
loader. BIOS contains low-level access routines for hardware that can be called
from DOS.
BIOS
Refer to Basic Input/Output System.
bit
Short for binary digit, the smallest unit of information on a machine. A single bit
can hold only one of two values: 0 or 1.
branch station
A telephone set or fax machine located at the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
BRI
Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN subscriber service that uses two B (64 Kbps)
channels and one D (64 Kbps) channel to transmit voice, video, and data signals.
486
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
bridge
A protocol-independent device that connects two LANs or two segments of the
same LAN. Bridges are faster (and less versatile) than routers because they
forward packets without analyzing and rerouting messages.
bus
A collection of wires that connects the microprocessor and main memory to
internal computer components. All buses consist of an address bus that transfers
data and a data bus that transfers information about where the data should go.
In a network, the bus (also called the backbone) is the main cable that connects
all devices on a LAN.
byte
Abbreviation for binary term, a unit of storage capable of holding a single
character. On almost all modern computers, a byte is equal to eight bits. Large
amounts of memory are indicated in terms of kilobytes (1024 bytes), megabytes
(1 048 576 bytes), and gigabytes (1 073 741 824 bytes).
C
cache
A temporary storage area in computer memory.
call duration timer
Used in PSTN mode only, it specifies the minimum length of time that each call
to the host PBX remains open, regardless of telephone activity (or lack thereof).
call on demand
A call connection that is opened only when a connection to the host PBX is
required. This is different from a permanent connection, which is open all the
time.
call treatment
A method of handling applied to a call while it is waiting to be answered or
serviced.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
487
Glossary
Standard 3.1
Caller ID
Caller ID is used on the RLC to identify the number of the caller requesting
access to one of its ports. It is also used on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit to
authenticate incoming calls from the RLC.
Calling Line IDentification
An optional service that identifies the telephone number of the caller. This
information can then be used to route the call to the appropriate agent or skillset.
The caller’s telephone number can also be displayed on a telephone set.
card
A thin, rectangular plate on which chips and other electronic components are
placed. Examples of cards include motherboards, expansion boards,
daughterboards, controller boards, network interface cards, and video adapters.
CD-ROM
A type of optical disk capable of storing large amounts of data (up to 1 Gbyte),
although the most common size is 630 Mbytes. A single CD-ROM has the
storage capacity of 700 floppy disks and is particularly well-suited to
information that requires large storage capacity.
CLAN
Refer to Customer Local Area Network.
CLID
Refer to Calling Line IDentification.
client
The part of a client/server architecture that runs on a personal computer or
workstation and relies on a server to perform some operations. For example, an
e-mail client is an application that enables you to send and receive e-mail.
codec
An acronym for COder-DECoder. A device that codes analog signals into digital
signals for transmission and decodes digital signals into analog signals for
receiving.
488
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
COM or COMM
Communications port. This usually refers to the Logical Device name of PC
serial ports as defined by DOS.
computer-based training
Computer-based training (CBT) is a type of education in which students learn by
running special training programs on a computer. CBT is especially effective for
training people to use computer applications, because the CBT program can be
integrated with the applications.
Configuration Manager
The software application used to configure and administer the Remote Gateway
9150 unit and the RLC to which it is connected.
controller board
A special type of expansion board that contains a controller for a peripheral
device. When you attach new devices to a computer, such as a disk drive, often a
controller board must also be added.
CPU
Central Processing Unit. This is the system unit that holds a PC’s essential
components.
crash
A serious computer failure during which the computer stops working or a
program closes unexpectedly. A crash indicates a hardware malfunction or a
serious software bug.
Customer Local Area Network
The LAN to which your corporate services and resources connect. The RLC and
its associated remote units both connect to the CLAN.
D
daughterboard
Usually used as a synonym for an expansion board, a daughterboard is any
printed circuit board that connects directly or indirectly to a motherboard.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
489
Glossary
Standard 3.1
DB-9 connector
A 9-pin connector labeled ADMIN that provides the RS-232 serial port
interface. This serial port connection can be used to configure a Remote
Gateway 9150 unit that is directly connected to a PC.
DHCP
Refer to Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
Digital Signal Processor
A special type of coprocessor that manipulates analog data, such as sound or
photographs, that has been converted to digital form.
Directory Number
The number that identifies a phoneset on a switch. The directory number (DN)
could be a local extension (local DN), a public network telephone number, or an
automatic call distribution directory number (ACD-DN).
DLL
Refer to Dynamic Link Library.
DN
Refer to Directory Number.
driver
A program that controls a device. Every device, whether it is a printer, disk
drive, or keyboard, must have a driver program. A driver acts like a translator
between the device and programs that use the device.
DSP
Refer to Digital Signal Processor.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network.
490
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
Dynamic Link Library
A library of executable functions or data that can be used by a Windows
application. Typically, a DLL provides one or more particular functions and a
program accesses the functions by creating either a static or dynamic link to the
DLL. A DLL can be used by several applications at the same time.
dynamic port pool
A RLC feature that is similar to multi-user ports in that multiple stations can
share ports on the RLC. However, users sharing ports from a dynamic pool are
assigned to the first available port on the RLC.
E
ECC
Refer to Error Correction Code.
EEPROM
Refer to Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Media.
ELAN
Refer to Embedded Local Area Network.
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Media
A memory chip that needs only a higher than normal voltage and current to erase
its contents. An EEPROM chip can be erased and reprogrammed without taking
it out of its socket. An EEPROM chip gives a computer and its peripherals a
means of storing data without the need for a constant supply of electricity.
Embedded Local Area Network
This is the network connection from the PBX to the RLC. It is an Ethernet LAN
that is segmented from the rest of the Ethernet network and enables signaling
and administration access to the RLC. Nortel recommends the following:
!
IP traffic should not be routed between the main network and the ELAN.
!
An IP route should not be established between the two LANs.
Emergency Service Number
The Remote Gateway 9150 unit allows you to program an emergency service
number (such as 911).
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
491
Glossary
Standard 3.1
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
Error Correction Code
A scheme that can detect and fix single-bit memory errors without crashing the
system. Also known as Error Detection and Correction (EDAC).
Ethernet
A widely used LAN protocol that uses a bus topology and supports data transfer
rates of 10 Mbps.
event
An occurrence or action on the RLC or remote unit, such as the sending or
receiving of a message, the opening or closing of an application, or the reporting
of an error. Some events are for information only, while others can indicate a
problem.
expansion board
Any board that plugs in to one of the computer’s expansion slots. Expansion
boards include controller boards, LAN cards, and video adapters.
expansion bus
Enables expansion boards to access the microprocessor and memory. Refer to
also bus.
F
492
first-level threshold
The value that represents the lowest value of the normal range for a given field
in a threshold class. The system tracks how often the value for the field falls
below this value.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
G
Glossary
G.711
G.711 is the international standard for encoding telephone audio on a 64 Kbps
channel. It is a pulse code modulation (PCM) scheme operating at an 8 kHz
sample rate, with 8 bits per sample. According to the Nyquist theorem, which
states that a signal must be sampled at twice its highest frequency component,
G.711 can encode frequencies between 0 and 4 kHz. Telephone companies can
select between two different variants of G.711: A-law and mµ-law. A-law is the
standard for international circuits.
G.726
G.726 is a standard ADPCM algorithm specified by the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) for reducing the 64 kbps A-Law or mµ-law
logarithmic data of a normal telephone line to 16, 24, 32, or 40 kbps.
G.729A
G.729A is a voice compression International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
standard that can be used in a wide range of applications including wireless
communications, digital satellite systems, packetized speech, and digital leased
lines. G.729A provides 8 Kbps of bandwidth for compressed speech at toll
quality (equivalent to G.726 32 Kbps ADPCM under clean channel condition).
gateway
A device that functions as a node on two or more networks, forwarding packets
from one network to addresses in the other networks. In Remote Gateway 9100
Series context, the gateway is the device on the network that directs traffic to
and from the Remote Gateway 9150 unit or RLC.
Gigabyte (Gbyte)
1 073 741 824 bytes. One Gbyte is equal to 1024 Mbytes.
General Protection Fault
A computer condition that causes a Windows application to crash. GPFs usually
occur when one application attempts to use memory assigned to another
application.
GPCP
General Purpose Computing Platform
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
493
Glossary
Standard 3.1
GPF
Refer to General Protection Fault.
graphical user interface
The information displayed on the monitor when a Windows application (or
another non-command-based application) runs. A graphical user interface uses
features such as pointers, icons, I-beams, and menus to make the program easier
to use.
H
handshaking
A process involved in establishing a valid connection or signal between two
pieces of hardware or communications software.
host call appearance key
An assigned key on the telephone set at the remote site that is used to establish a
connection with the host PBX or to receive incoming calls from the host PBX.
host-controlled call mode
When a call is placed to someone at the host site, or when someone from the
host site calls the remote site, the call is in host-controlled call mode. Calls in
host-controlled mode are routed through the PBX.
host station
A telephone set located at the host PBX site.
host trunk
The ISDN PRI or TI connection located at the host site. Host trunks are used to
route calls from the host PBX to remote sites over the PSTN.
hub
A common connection point for all 10Base-T cables connected to a small
network. A hub enables data to go from one device to another.
I
494
icon
A small picture that represents an object or program in a graphical user interface.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
idle timer
Identifies the maximum length of time during which an ISDN connection should
remain idle before it can be closed. Idle means that a voice connection does not
exist, and buttons are not being pressed on the digital telephone.
input/output
Refers to any operation, program, or device that enters data into a computer or
extracts data from a computer.
I/O
Refer to input/output.
IP
Internet Protocol. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data
messages into packets, the routing of the packets from sender to destination
network, and the reassembly of the packets into the original data messages at the
destination.
IP address
Internet Protocol address. An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP
network. Networks use the TCP/IP protocol to route messages based on the IP
address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric
address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be
0–255. For example, 1.160.10.240 can be an IP address.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network. A worldwide digital communication
protocol that permits telephone networks to carry data, voice, and other source
material. There are two kinds of ISDN lines—Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and
Basic Rate Interface (BRI). Refer also to BRI.
J
jumper
A metal bridge that closes an electrical circuit. Typically, a jumper consists of a
plastic plug that fits over a pair of protruding pins. Jumpers are sometimes used
to configure expansion boards. By placing a jumper plug over a different set of
pins, you can change a board’s parameters.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
495
Glossary
K
L
Standard 3.1
kilobyte (kbyte)
1024 bytes
LAN
Refer to Local area network.
LED
Light emitting diode
Local area network
A computer network that spans a relatively small area. Most LANs connect
workstations and personal computers and are confined to a single building or
group of buildings.
local call
A call that originates at your site.
local call appearance key
An assigned key on the telephone set at the Remote Gateway 9150 site that is
used to call another station at the branch office, or to place and receive calls
through the local PSTN.
locally controlled call mode
When you place a call from a specified local call appearance key, or your call is
to another telephone at your branch site, you are in locally controlled call mode.
Calls in locally controlled mode are routed through the local PSTN.
local station
A telephone set located at the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
M
M1
Meridian 1 PBX
Megabyte (Mbyte)
1 048 576 bytes
496
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
megahertz (MHz)
One million cycles per second.
RLC
An abbreviation for Reach Line Card. The RLC is installed on the host PBX at
the host location and relays voice and signaling information from the digital
telephones connected at a remote site to the PBX at the host site.
motherboard
The principal board that has connectors for attaching devices to the bus.
Typically, the motherboard contains the CPU, memory, and basic controllers for
the system. On PCs, the motherboard is often called the system board.
MTBF
Mean time between failures
Mu-law
A companding method for encoding and decoding audio signals in 24-channel
pulse-code-modulated (PCM) systems. Mu-law is the method used in North
America and Japan. Refer also to A-law.
Multi-user ports
A RLC port feature that allows multiple stations to time-share a single port on
the host PBX. All stations that use a multi-user port are always assigned to the
same port number (TN) on the host PBX.
N
network interface card
An expansion board that enables a PC to be connected to a local area network
(LAN).
NIC
Refer to network interface card.
node
A device connected to the network capable of connecting to other network
devices. For example, the RLC and Remote Gateway 9150 unit are both nodes
on the network.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
497
Glossary
Standard 3.1
NPA
Refer to Number Plan Area.
Number Plan Area
Area code
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
O
OA&M
Operations, administration, and maintenance
object linking and embedding
A compound document standard that enables you to create objects with one
application and then link or embed them in a second application.
OEM
Original equipment manufacturer
online/offline table
The online/offline table is configured on the RLC. It allows you to schedule
times that the host PBX connection is made available to the remote site and at
which times all telephones at the remote site can use only the local telephone
service.
The online/offline table is used for controlling ISDN BRI costs.
Open System Interconnection
A worldwide communications standard that defines a framework for
implementing protocols in seven layers.
OS
Operating Standard
OSI
Refer to Open System Interconnection.
498
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
OTM
Optivity Telephony Manager. This is a Nortel software application that is used to
administer the Meridian 1 PBX.
P
Packet InterNet Groper
PING. A protocol that can be used to test the Ethernet connection to devices on
the network (such as the RLC and its associated remote units).
packetized voice
Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), located in the Remote Gateway 9150 unit and
RLC, convert analog voice into digital data. The data is constructed as a UDP/IP
voice packet for transmission over an IP network.
parity
The quality of being either odd or even. The fact that all numbers have parity is
commonly used in data communications to ensure the validity of data.
PBX
Refer to private branch exchange.
pegging
The action of incrementing statistical counters to track system events.
pegging threshold
A threshold used to define a cut-off value for statistics such as short call and
service level. Pegging thresholds are used in reports and historical statistics.
personal directory number
A DN on which an agent can be reached directly, usually for private calls.
PING
Refer to Packet InterNet Groper.
POST
Refer to Power-On Self-Test.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
499
Glossary
Standard 3.1
Power-On Self-Test
Initializes and performs rudimentary tests on baseboard hardware, including
CPU, floating point unit, interrupts, memory, real-time clock, video, and
auto-initializing PCI and EISA bus.
priority DN
A user station can be configured as a priority DN. There are two levels of
priority—high and normal. High priority level allows you to
!
ensure a trunk is always available
!
use PSTN trunking for the host PBX connections
!
move the high priority DN first from the IP network to the PSTN
private branch exchange
A telephone switch, typically used by a business to service its internal telephone
needs. A PBX usually offers more advanced features than are generally
available on the public network. Users of the PBX share a certain number of
outside lines for making telephone calls external to the PBX.
protocol
A standard format used for communication between two devices. The protocol
determines the type of error checking to be used, the data compression method
(if any), how the sending device indicates that it has finished sending a message,
and how the receiving device indicates that it has received a message.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network (also known as the public telephone
network).
Q
500
Quality of Service (QoS) Transitioning Technology
Technology that automatically switches calls from the IP network to the PSTN
when the voice QoS falls below a predetermined threshold, and back to the IP
network when the QoS returns to normal.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
R
Glossary
RAM
Random Access Memory. This is the most common type of memory found in
computers and other devices, such as printers. The term RAM is usually
synonymous with main memory, the memory available to programs. For
example, a computer with 8 Mbytes of RAM has approximately 8 million bytes
of memory that programs can use.
remote station
A telephone set or fax machine located at the Remote Gateway 9150 site.
remote trunk
From the RLC’s point of view, remote trunks are the ISDN BRI connections
between the PSTN and the Remote Gateway 9150 unit located at the branch
office site.
RJ-45 connector
An 8-position, 8-conductor modular jack that provides the 10BaseT Ethernet
connection.
ROM
Read-Only Memory. This is the computer memory on which data has been
prerecorded and from which it cannot be removed.
router
A device that connects two LANs. Routers are similar to bridges but provide
additional functionality, such as the ability to filter messages and forward them
to different places based on various criteria.
S
second-level threshold
The value used in display thresholds that represents the highest value of the
normal range for a given statistic.
security identifier
The remote unit sends the branch office security identifier (password) to the
RLC for each connection request. The RLC matches the identifier configured for
the RLC port. When it finds a match, it grants access to the port and allows the
call to proceed.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
501
Glossary
Standard 3.1
serial port
A general-purpose interface that can be used for almost any type of device,
including modems, mice, and printers (although most printers are connected to a
parallel port). Most serial ports on personal computers conform to the RS-232C
or RS-422 standards.
server
A computer or device on a network that manages network resources. Examples
of servers include file servers, print servers, network servers, and database
servers.
service
A process that adheres to a Windows NT structure and requirements. A service
provides system functionality.
Service Control Manager
A Windows NT process that manages the different services on the PC.
silence suppression
A feature that prevents packet transmission during periods when there is no
voice data present.
Simple Network Management Protocol
A set of protocols for managing complex networks. SNMP sends messages
called protocol data units (PDUs) to different parts of a network, and then
analyzes the responses.
single-user ports
A RLC port that supports one remote station.
SNMP
Refer to Simple Network Management Protocol.
SPID
Service Profile Identifier
502
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Glossary
SPRE code
A Special Prefix code that is used to initiate use of a PBX feature. In a Remote
Gateway 9100 Series context, SPRE codes are used to
!
toggle a remote site between online and offline modes
!
use the paging feature
!
switch an analog or ATA-equipped station from host-controlled mode to
locally controlled mode so that local calls can be made
!
register a Remote Gateway 9150 unit for a multi-user or dynamic port
station
A telephone or fax machine located at a Remote Gateway 9150 site.
stop bit
In asynchronous communications, a bit that indicates a byte has just been
transmitted. Every byte of data is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop
bit.
subnet mask
A subnet mask is the part of the IP address used to represent a subnetwork
within a network. A typical IP address might be 192.210.34.144. Each part of
this address is made up of eight bits. The subnet mask identifies to the RLC or
remote unit what portion of the IP address represents the network (and
subnetwork) and what portion represents the host.
switch
In a telecommunications network, a switch is the hardware that receives phone
calls and provides connections to telephone sets. The switch allows a connection
to be established as necessary and terminated when there is no longer a session
to support it.
In data networks, a switch is a device that filters and forwards packets between
LAN segments. Switches operate at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI
Reference Model and, therefore, support any packet protocol. LANs that use
switches to join segments are called switched LANs or, in the case of Ethernet
networks, switched Ethernet LANs.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
503
Glossary
Standard 3.1
switch resource
A device that is configured on the switch.
T
TCP/IP
Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The communication protocol used
to connect devices on the Internet. TCP/IP is the standard for transmitting data
over networks.
threshold
A value for a statistic at which system handling of the statistic changes.
threshold class
A set of options that specifies how statistics are treated in reports and real-time
displays. Refer also to pegging threshold.
trunk
A communications link between a PBX and the public central office, or between
PBXs. Various trunk types provide services such as Direct Inward Dialing
(DID), ISDN, and central office connectivity.
trunk access code
A trunk access code is a number that is used by the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
to determine which trunk to use when routing a call. For example, 9 is a
common trunk access code used to obtain an outside line.
Note: All trunk access codes are configured on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
with a pound sign (# in North America) so that there are no conflicts with host
PBX numbering plans.
trunk groups
A trunk group consists of one or more trunk lines that are logically grouped. You
can configure up to eight trunk groups on the Remote Gateway 9150 unit.
trunk interface modules
Used to route calls over the PSTN. The number of modules you must install on
the Remote Gateway 9150 unit depends on the number of simultaneous calls
you want in host-controlled or locally controlled mode.
504
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
U
Glossary
Uninterruptible Power Supply
A power supply that includes a battery to maintain power in the event of a power
outage. Typically, a UPS keeps a computer running for several minutes after a
power outage, enabling you to save data that is in RAM and to shut down the
computer safely.
UPS
Refer to Uninterruptible Power Supply.
utility
A program that performs a specific task, usually related to managing system
resources. Operating systems contain a number of utilities for managing disk
drives, printers, and other devices.
V
voice compression
Prior to transmission, the voice data is compressed; after transmission, the data
is converted back to voice data at the destination. Voice compression means that
voice consumes less bandwidth, leaving more bandwidth for data or other voice
or fax communications.
voice jitter attenuation
A feature that removes the variable delays from the voice packets sent across the
IP network, thus avoiding awkward-sounding speech.
Voice over IP (VoIP)
Technology that uses the IP data network to carry the voice conversation and
telephone set control signals between a remote site and the host PBX.
W
WAN
Wide area network. A computer network that spans a relatively large
geographical area. Typically, a WAN consists of two or more local area networks
(LANs). The largest WAN in existence is the Internet.
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
505
Glossary
506
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Fields index
Symbols
%Error 330
Numerics
802.1Q Mapping 195
Priority 195
VLAN ID 195
A
Add on Module Type 210
Admin 313
Auto Hold 210, 223
Available Channels 309, 317
Available Flex Channels 309
Available MIPS 309
Available Modem Channels 309
B
B Channel 238
B Channel Usage 125
Bandwidth (BW) Connection Statistics
IP QoS Status 299
No of Voice Calls on IP 299
No of Voice Calls on PSTN 299
Remote Unit Number 299
Signaling Status 299
Total Up Trunk BW 299
Used IP BW 299
Used Trunk BW 299
Bandwidth Connection Statistics
field descriptions 299
Block Incoming Local Call on Primary B Channel 204
BRI Information Statistics
Available Channels 317
Cross Connection Type 317
Device Number 317
In Service 317
Module Index 317
Module Number 317
Name 317
Total Channels 317
Usage 317
Bridge Port 211, 223
Browse
Upload Configuration 287
Browse (button)
Software Upload 341
C
Call BW 302
Call Duration 319
Call Start Time 319, 321
Call Status 324
Call Type 296
Called Number 296
Caller ID 201
Caller Info Statistics
Call BW 302
Connection ID 302
Current Media 302
Last Transition to IP 302
Last Transition to PSTN 302
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
507
Fields Index
Priority 302
Remote ID 302
Start Time 302
Transitions to IP 302
Transitions to PSTN 302
Type 302
Channel 313
Close Time 296
Collisions 331
COM port number 164
Compression Algorithms 242
Connection ID 302, 321
CPND 210
Cross Connection Type 317
Current Media 302
D
Date
Auto Upgrade 246
Day
Auto Upgrade 245
Default (button) 143
Delete
Syslog Configuration 249
Device 238
Device Information Statistics
Call Status 324
Device Type 324
Login Status 324
ROU Port Number 324
Type 324
Device Number 309, 317
Device Type 324
DiffServ CodePoint 194
Value 194
DN 210, 223
DSP Load 241
DSP Statistics
Name 310
508
Standard 3.1
DSP statistics
Available Channels 309
Available Flex Channels 309
Available MIPS 309
Available Modem Channels 309
Device Number 309
In Service 309
Module Number 309
Single Dig Dev ID 309
Total Channels 309
Total Flex Channels 309
Total MIPS 309
Total Modem Channels 309
Total Reserved Channels 310
Total Tones Channels 310
Total Voice Channels 309
Duration 296, 321
E
Emergency Feature 180
Enable PBX Alarms 181
Enter a node name to recognize the unit 121
Enter the local IP Address of the unit 121
Enter the Local IP Gateway of the unit 121
Enter the Local IP Mask of the unit 121
Enter the PSTN Number 125
Enter the SPID Number 125
Ethernet Interface Statistics
Admin 313
Channel 313
IFC No 313
IFC Type 313
LAN Drv 313
MTU Len 313
Oper 313
Speed 313
EthRx Disc 331
EthRx Err 331
EthRx Mcast 330
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
EthRx Ucast 331
EthTx Disc 330
EthTx Err 331
EthTx Mcast 330
EthTx Ucast 330
F
Facility Indicator 249
Forward Busy/No Answer 211, 223
Number of Rings before transfer 211
Transfer to DN 212
Frequency 245
Full Duplex Ethernet 196
G
Group No 237
H
Hardware Statistics
Module No 306
Module Type 306
Status 306
Version 306
Help (button) 143
Hour 329
I
IFC No 313
IFC Type 313
In Service 309, 317
International Tones 185
Cadence Time 190
End Repeat 189
No of Cycles 190
Tone Code 189
Tone Type 189
Fields Index
IP Address 161, 193
RLC Connection Configuration 203
Software Upload 341
Syslog Configuration 249
Upload Configuration 286
IP Connection 203
IP Gateway 193
IP Network Mask 193
IP QoS Status 299
IP Signaling 204
ISDN Line Type 229
ISDN Module Information
Link Status 326
Module Number 326
Module Type 326
Usage 326
L
LAN Drv 313
Last Transition to IP 302
Last Transition to PSTN 302
Link Status 326
Local Call Keys 212, 223
Local Call Statistics
Call Duration 319
Call Start Time 319
Port No. 319
Local CPND 223
Local DNs to Alert 237
Local SwitchOver 184
Login Status 324
M
Module
Software Upload 340
Trunk Group B-Channel 238
Module # 228
Module Index 317
Module No 306
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
509
Fields Index
Standard 3.1
Module Number 241, 309, 317, 326
Module Status 124
Module Type 306, 326
MTU Len 313
Multiple Subscriber Number 185
Port Type 208, 222
Priority 302
Provision ID 202
PSTN Connection 203
PSTN Number 231
N
R
Name 310, 317
Network Statistics
%Error 330
Collisions 331
EthRx Disc 331
EthRx Err 331
EthRx Mcast 330
EthRx Ucast 331
EthTx Disc 330
EthTx Err 331
EthTx Mcast 330
EthTx Ucast 330
Hour 329
Rx Dropped 329
Rx Error 329
Rx Voice Samples 329
Tx Voice Samples 329
No of Voice Calls on IP 299
No of Voice Calls on PSTN 299
Node Name 178
Number of Devices 241
Remote Call Statistics
Call Start Time 321
Connection ID 321
Duration 321
RLC ID 321
RLC Port No. 321
ROU (Remote Gateway 9150 unit) Port No.
321
Remote ID 296, 302
Remote Unit Number 299
Retrieve (button) 143, 150, 153
RLC ID 321
RLC Port 208, 222
RLC Port No. 321
ROU (Remote Gateway 9150 unit) Port No. 321
ROU Port Number 324
Rx Dropped 329
Rx Error 329
Rx Voice Samples 329
O
Security Level 201
Select the Country Type 125
Select the Protocol Type 125
Send (button) 143, 149, 153
Set the unique Unit ID of the unit 120
Set the Unit ID of the RLC to connect to 122
Signaling Status 299
Single Dig Dev ID 309
Speed (statistic) 313
SPID 231
OK (button) 143, 148, 153
Oper 313
Optional Feature Keys 213
P
Paging 210, 223
Phone Type 210
Port No. 319
510
S
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
SPRE Codes
DeRegistration 182
Local Calling 182
Offline 182
Online 181
Paging 181
Registration 182
Start Auto Upgrade 245
Start Time 296, 302
statistics
Bandwidth (BW) Connection Statistics
IP QoS Status 299
No of Voice Calls on IP 299
No of Voice Calls on PSTN 299
Remote Unit Number 299
Signaling Status 299
Total Up Trunk BW 299
Used IP BW 299
Used Trunk BW 299
Bandwidth Connection Statistics
field descriptions 299
BRI Information Statistics
Available Channels 317
Cross Connection Type 317
Device Number 317
In Service 317
Module Index 317
Module Number 317
Name 317
Total Channels 317
Usage 317
Caller Info Statistics
Call BW 302
Connection ID 302
Current Media 302
Last Transition to IP 302
Last Transition to PSTN 302
Priority 302
Remote ID 302
Start Time 302
Transitions to IP 302
Fields Index
Transitions to PSTN 302
Type 302
Caller Info Statistics field descriptions 302
Device Information Statistics
Call Status 324
Device Type 324
Login Status 324
ROU Port Number 324
Type 324
DSP Statistics
Name 310
DSP statistics
Available Channels 309
Available Flex Channels 309
Available MIPS 309
Available Modem Channels 309
Device Number 309
In Service 309
Module Number 309
Single Dig Dev ID 309
Total Channels 309
Total Flex Channels 309
Total MIPS 309
Total Modem Channels 309
Total Reserved Channels 310
Total Tones Channels 310
Total Voice Channels 309
Ethernet Interface Statistics
Admin 313
Channel 313
IFC No 313
IFC Type 313
LAN Drv 313
MTU Len 313
Oper 313
Speed 313
Hardware Statistics
Module No 306
Module Type 306
Status 306
Version 306
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
511
Fields Index
Standard 3.1
ISDN Module Information
Link Status 326
Module Number 326
Module Type 326
Usage 326
Local Call Statistics
Call Duration 319
Call Start Time 319
Port No. 319
Network Statistics
%Error 330
Collisions 331
EthRx Disc 331
EthRx Err 331
EthRx Mcast 330
EthRx Ucast 331
EthTx Disc 330
EthTx Err 331
EthTx Mcast 330
EthTx Ucast 330
Hour 329
Rx Dropped 329
Rx Error 329
Rx Voice Samples 329
Tx Voice Samples 329
Remote Call Statistics
Call Start Time 321
Connection ID 321
Duration 321
RLC ID 321
RLC Port No. 321
ROU (Remote Gateway 9150 unit) Port
No. 321
Trunk Connection Statistics
Call Type 296
Called Number 296
Close Time 296
Duration 296
Remote ID 296
Start Time 296
Status 296
Trunk Number 296
512
Trunk Connection Statistics field descriptions 296
Status 296, 306
Auto Upgrade Configuration 245
BRI Configuration 230
Syslog Configuration 249
Trunk Group Configuration 237
Switch Type 230
T
TFTP Server
IP Address 245
Time
Auto Upgrade 245
Time Offset 179
Total Channels 309, 317
Total Flex Channels 309
Total MIPS 309
Total Modem Channels 309
Total Reserved Channels 310
Total Tones Channels 310
Total Up Trunk BW 299
Total Voice Channels 309
Transitions to IP 302
Transitions to PSTN 302
Trunk Access Code 237
Trunk Connection Statistics
Call Type 296
Called Number 296
Close Time 296
Duration 296
field descriptions 296
Remote ID 296
Start Time 296
Status 296
Trunk Number 296
Trunk Group B Channels 238
Trunk Group B-Channel dialog box 238
Trunk Number 296
Trunk Support 183
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Tx Voice Samples 329
Type 230, 302, 324
U
Unit ID
9150 System Configuration 178
RLC Connection Configuration 203
Usage 317, 326
Used IP BW 299
Used Trunk BW 299
Fields Index
V
Version 306
W
Which module would you wish to configure 124
Wish to configure Multiple 9150 Ports 123
Wish to Enable IP Voice Connection to Remote
122
Wish to Enable PSTN Connection to RLC 123
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
513
Fields Index
514
Standard 3.1
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Index
Numerics
10BaseT Ethernet 10
as a component xix
connection option 10
10BaseT Ethernet connection xix
25-pair connector 5
802.1Q Mapping 34
9150
configuration
Auto Upgrade 244
Syslog 248
9150 Port Configuration
Bridge Ports 214
configuration scenarios 215, 216, 217, 218,
219
9150 Port Configuration property sheet 207
9150 System Configuration
NLP 175
A
ACD
Local Calling key 32
M3905 digital telephone set 27
Make Set Busy mode 32
Not Ready mode 32
Remote Connection Configuration property
sheet (RLC) 32
RLC Port Configuration property sheet 32
User On Demand Idle Timer 32
User On Demand Minimum Call Timer 32
ACD agent 32
ACD applications 32
refer to Automatic Call Distribution
applications
add-on modules 30
DSP application modules 9
trunk interface modules 8
Admin connector pin-out table 409
administration
password
changing 280, 281
password, changing 280
PC
connection options 59
Optivity Telephony Manager and
Configuration Manager 63
software
command line interface 44
Configuration Manager 43
connection options 43
Alarms and alerts 366
display logs 412
analog calling
required configuration 220
analog port 11, 220
basic POTS functionality 220
configuring 222
functionality not provided 220
Analog Telephone Adapters 30
application modules 30
associating trunk groups with local stations 254
ATA 257
maximum quantity 257
refer to Analog Telephone Adapters
ATA equipped stations 257
Auto Answer Back
M26xx digital telephone sets 26
Auto Hold 274
auto logoff 158
Auto Upgrade
Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet
243, 342
Auto Upgrade configuration
procedure 244
Automatic Call Distribution
refer to ACD
Automatic TEIs
multi-point configuration 227
point-to-point configuration 227
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
515
Index
Standard 3.1
B
B Channel
Trunk Group B-Channel 238
backup
configuration file, creating 282
bandwidth
allocating 65
allocation, description 14
approximate total 42
extra 37
measuring
Bandwidth Connection Statistics 297
peak
according to Codec 42
priority reserved 37
Bandwidth Connection statistics 297
Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen 297
descriptions 299
displaying 298
Boot status
LED indicator 4
BRI
Automatic TEIs
multi-point configuration 227
point-to-point configuration 227
refer also to Basic Rate Interface
BRI Configuration property sheet 225
BRI trunks
configuring 225
Norway and Sweden 226
Bridge Port 211
configuration
requirements 211, 250, 251
releasing 214
Bridge Ports 214, 250
configuration scenarios 215, 216, 217, 218,
219
C
calculating dial tone delay 254
Call appearance keys
MADN 253
SCR/SCN keys 253
516
call appearance keys 253
defined 253
dial tone delay 253, 254
host call appearance key 261
local call appearance key 262
call blocking 57
calculating system requirements 58
defined 57
reducing between Remote Gateway 9150 unit
and host PBX 58
Call Forward 211, 276
Call Log
M39xx digital telephone sets
country code 27
trunk access code 27
call set-up duration 254
ISDN line set-up 254
Call Transfer 275
call transfer
trunk-to-trunk 275
Call Waiting 274
caller identification (security level) 12
Caller Information Statistics screen 300
displaying 301
calling permissions and restrictions 255
calls
emergency service 273
host-controlled calls 265
methods for placing outgoing calls 265
outgoing locally controlled calls 266
placing 264
receiving 264
station-to-station calls 267
Channel Number 334
circuit only priority 36
clearing logs 293
Codecs
supported 42
data stream 42
G.711 42
G.726 42
G.729A 42
coding law
ISDN line type 226
Collisions 314
collisions 5
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
communications system and software
requirements 42
communications system requirements 42
Companding Algorithm
configuring 185
ISDN line type 226
components
10BaseT Ethernet connection xix
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) xix
ISDN Basic Rate Interface connection xix
ISDN BRI trunk interface modules xix
Remote Gateway 9150 unit xix
compression algorithms 67
and ATA devices 257
and MCA devices 257
G.711 257
G.729A 257
G.729A/FAX 257
no compression 257
Computer Telephony Integration applications 31
Conference calling 276
configuration
Auto Upgrade 244
Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet
243, 342
backup
creating 282
Bridge Port
requirements 211, 250, 251
Bridge Ports 215, 216, 217, 218, 219
DSP Configuration property sheet 239
EAC 176
host PBX 222
MCA 75
IP
addresses 193
IP addresses
saving to Flash 193
IP configuration
Full Duplex Ethernet 196
MADN 253
MCAs and ATAs
maximum quantity 257
Phone Type 207
recommendation 390
Index
Remote Gateway 9100 Series unit
connection types 134
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
Companding Algorithm 185
defining a fax station 221
NLP 175
RLC
connection types 134
samples
Meridian 1 PBX data port 394
Meridian 1 PBX voice port 392
Remote Gateway 9150 400
RLC 396
Syslog 248
Syslog Configuration property sheet 247
Configuration Manager
check boxes 140
command buttons 143
configuration
downloading 155
uploading 155
configuration file
creating 154
opening 154
description 134
device type, selecting 156
ending a session 171
file operations
description 148
diagram 145
logging on to a unit 157
menus 137
option buttons 140
parts of the screen 137
password 280
property sheets 139
scroll boxes 141
shutdown
performing 169
system restart
performing 169
system tree 138
Configuration Wizard
how it works 115
introduction 115
starting 116
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
517
Index
Standard 3.1
configuring
key labels
M3902 digital telephone sets
Local keys 27
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
BRI trunks 225
Norway and Sweden 226
configuring Remote Gateway 9150 unit
9150 Port Configuration sheet 207
BRI Configuration sheet 225
Cadence Time 190
emergency number 180
End Repeat 189
International Tones 186
local switchover 184
Multiple Subscriber Number 185
No of cycles 190
RLC Connection Configuration sheet 198
RLC connection information 198
security level 200
SPRE codes, defining 181–182
system identification information 178
Tone Code 189
Tone type 189
Trunk Group Configuration sheet 232
trunk groups, configuring 232
connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
cables you must provide 105
connection panel diagram 107
pin-out references 106
connection
what to do if the PING did not work 364
connection bandwidth
extra bandwidth 37
priority reserved bandwidth 37
connection options
10BaseT Ethernet interface 10
analog port for fax machines 11
ethernet connection 60
ISDN BRI lines to PSTN 10
QoS Transitioning Technology 10
serial connection 59
connection types 14
connectivity
troubleshooting
PING failure 364
518
connector pin-out tables
Admin 409
Ethernet 408
Power 410
Telco 1 404
Telco 2 406
connectors
25-pair 5
DB-9 6
RJ-45 5
country code
M39xx digital telephone sets 27
cover, removing the Remote Gateway 9150 90
CRC Errors 334
creating private lines 255
CS 1000 xxiv
CS 2100 xxiv
CTI applications
refer to Computer Telephony Integration
applications
D
data stream 42
DB-9 connector 6
default algorithm 33
defining a fax station 221
deploying Remote Gateway 9150 unit
overview 75
port and station assignment 75
Voice over IP mode, implementing 77
deployment
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
QoS Transitioning Technology 79
Device
Trunk Group B-Channel 238
device connectivity 356
Device Information screen 322
dial tone
analog port 220
dial tone delay 253, 254
calculating 254
call set-up duration 254
ISDN line set-up 254
Remote Gateway 9100 Series 254
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
Differentiated Services (DiffServ) 34
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) xix
digital telephone sets
supported
M39xx series accessories 30
supported models 26
M2006 26
M2008D 26
M2008HFD 26
M2216D 26
M2616D 26
M3110 26
M3310 26
M3820 26
M3901 26
M3902 26
M3903 26
M3904 26
M3905 26
digital telephones
display messages 270
supported 26
troubleshooting 351
Disabled Outbound Digit Sequence 212
display messages 270
displaying logs 290
download
M3904 digital telephone sets
Flash upgrade 28
Download Configuration 152, 153
DSP
calculating system requirements 385
compression algorithms
G.711 257
G.729A 257
G.729A/FAX 257
no compression 257
DSP Configuration property sheet 239
MCR keys 254
SCR/SCN keys 253
DSP modules
adding 72
installing 96
removing 96
when to install 93
where they can be installed 94
Index
DSP Statistics 309
DSP Statistics screen 307
DTMF tones
analog port 220
dynamic port pooling 35
E
EAC
configuration 176
emergency
activation code
description of 41
calls, placing 273
service calls 273
service number 180
Emergency Access Code
refer to EAC
Emergency service programmability 176
EPROM checksum validation 111
equipment
supported applications
Automatic Call Distribution applications
32
Computer Telephony Integration
applications 31
supported digital telephone sets 26
M2006 26
M2008D 26
M2008HFD 26
M2216D 26
M2616D 26
M3110 26
M3310 26
M3820 26
M3901 26
M3902 26
M3903 26
M3904 26
M3905 26
supported telephone modules 30
add-on modules 30
Analog Telephone Adapters 30
application modules 30
Meridian Communication Adapters 30
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
519
Index
Standard 3.1
Ethernet
collisions 5
connector pin-out table 408
LED indicator 4
Ethernet connection
default 10
full-duplex 10
half-duplex 10
Ethernet Interface Statistics
Collisions 314
QLen 314
Rx Disc 314
Rx Err 314
Rx Mcast 313
Rx Octet 313
Rx Ucast 313
Tx Disc 314
Tx Err 314
Tx Mcast 314
Tx Octet 314
Tx Ucast 314
extra bandwidth 37
firmware
types of 337
upgrade
performing 338
upgrade files
downloading 337
version, verifying 335
flash checksum validation 111
Flash download
M39xx digital telphone sets 338
Flash upgrade
M39xx digital telephone sets
download time 28
Frame Length Violations 334
full-duplex Ethernet 10, 196
future growth
DSP modules, adding 72
maximum configurations 73
trunk interface modules, adding 73
G
F
fax
host PBX configuration 222
fax port, configuring 222
fax support 41
features
supported 39
supported with Bridge Ports 39
Voice over IP
packet loss handling techniques 33
packetized voice 33
silence suppression 33
voice jitter attenuation buffer 33
field descriptions
Local Profile Configuration 211
File Open 148, 153
File Save As 149, 153
Firewall device 167
520
G.711 33, 42, 257
approximate total bandwidth 42
data stream 42
G.726 33, 42
approximate total bandwidth 42
G.729A 33, 42, 257
approximate total bandwidth 42
G.729A/FAX 257
general safety
introduction 86
precautionary messages 86
safety precautions 87
GUI
Auto Upgrade Configuration property sheet
243, 342
DSP Configuration property sheet 239
Syslog Configuration property sheet 247
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
H
half-duplex Ethernet 10
hardware description
connectors 5
LED indicators 4
mounting options 6
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
LED indicators 3
hardware installation tools 88
Hardware Statistics 303
host-controlled mode 260
and Call Transfer feature 275
and Call Waiting feature 274
and Hold feature 274
calls, placing 265
external corporate call, example 22
indicator updates 268
internal corporate call, example 20
I
idle timer 15
implementation
QoS Transitioning Technology 79
incoming call process 17
incoming calls
receiving 264
indicators, telephone
host-controlled indicator updates 268
introduction 268
locally controlled indicator updates 269
installation 98
Remote Gateway 9150 unit 98
installing the Remote Gateway 9150 unit 98
Configuration Wizard 115
connecting 105
cover, removing 90
general safety 86
mounting 98
network connections, testing 129
powering up 111
software, installing 113
unpacking and inspecting 89
installing, planning for
telecom manager’s installation checklist 46
interface loopbacks 111
Index
International Tones 186
Internet Protocol
refer to IP
IP
addresses 83
addressing and routing 55
configuration
addresses 193
saving to Flash 193
interface, configuring 192
IP Configuration property sheet 192
IP only priority 36
ISDN Basic Rate Interface connection xix
ISDN BRI
BRI Configuration sheet 225
connection option 10
planning for 82
trunks groups, configuring 232
trunks, configuring 225
ISDN line set-up 254
ISDN Line Type
default coding law 226
ITE Frame Length Violations 334
ITE Receive Busy Errors 334
ITE Transmitter Underruns 334
K
Key Feature Configuration dialog box 213
key map
M3904 digital telephone set 27
L
LED indicators
Boot status 4
Ethernet 4
hardware description 4
Module 4
Power 4
power up behavior 111
troubleshooting 349
V.35 4
local call appearance keys 253, 254
call set-up duration 254
ISDN line set-up 254
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
521
Index
Standard 3.1
local calling
Bridge Port 39
call restrictions 39
digital telephone features
supported 39
supported with Bridge Ports 39
local calls through PSTN 39
local extension calling 38
multiple DN appearances 261
Local Calling key 32
Local keys
M3902 digital telephone sets
key labels 27
Local Profile Configuration
field descriptions 211
Local Profile Configuration dialog box 209, 223
local ringback
analog port 220
local stations
trunk groups 254
local switchover 184
local trunk calls
pre-dialing 261
locally controlled mode 18, 261
Call Transfer feature 275
Call Waiting feature 274, 275
calls, placing 266
Hold feature 274
indicator updates 269
local call, example 24
local trunk calls
pre-dialing 261
logging off from a unit
auto logoff 158
logging off of a unit 166
logging on to a unit
connection history 157, 158
connection types 157
default logon ID and password 157
from Configuration Manager 157
logging on to multiple Remote Gateway 9100
Series units 167
522
logon ID
Configuration Manager 280
RLC 280
unit 157
logs
clearing 293
resizing 292
M
M2006 26
M2008D 26
M2008HFD 26
M2216D 26
M2616D 26
M26xx digital telphone sets
Auto Answer Back 26
CS 2100
Auto Answer Back 26
M3110 26
M3310 26
M3820 26
M3901 26
M3902 26
M3902 digital telephone sets
Local keys
key labels 27
M3903 26
M3904 26
M3904 digital telephone set
key map
Virtual Office 27
M3904 digital telephone sets
firmware
download 27
upload 27
M3905 26
M3905 digital telephone set
ACD queue
log on 27
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
M3905 digital telephone sets
firmware
download 27
upload 27
Phase I
Remote Gateway 9150 unit reboot 27
M39xx digital telephone sets
Flash download
download time 338
Flash upgrade
download time 28
PBX downgrade 28
software upgrade
download time 338
M39xx digital telphone sets
Call Log
country code 27
trunk access code 27
MADN 253
dial tone delay
calculating 254
Make Set Busy (MSB) mode
ACD 32
maximum collision re-try counter 5
MCA 257
maximum quantity 257
refer to Meridian Communication Adapters
MCA equipped stations 257
MCR keys
DSP requirements 254
Meridian 1 PBX xxiv
data port configuration (example) 394
voice port configuration (example) 392
Meridian Administration Tools (MAT) 63
Meridian Communication Adapters 30
messages, telephone display 270
minimum call duration timer 14
Module
LED indicator 4
Trunk Group B-Channel 238
mounting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
choosing a suitable location 98
installing in a rack 103
installing on a desk 99
installing the unit on the wall 100
MSN 185
Index
Multiple Appearance Directory Number
refer to MADN
Multiple Call Ringing
refer to MCR 254
multiple DN appearances
local calling 261
Multiple Subscriber Number
enabling 185
multi-user ports 35
N
NAPT routers 78
NAT router 167
NAT routers 78, 79
special configuration 79
network
connecting the Remote Gateway 9150 unit
109
considerations
call blocking 57
IP addressing and routing 55
network diagram 56
numbering plans 57
QoS 56
diagram (example) 391
testing
PSTN 131
no compression 257
no security (security level) 12
non-linear processor 175
normal priority 36
Norway and Sweden
BRI configuration
supplementary insulation 226
Not Ready mode
ACD 32
O
offline mode
defined 262
importance of 262
what controls offline mode 263
OK 148, 153
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
523
Index
Standard 3.1
online help 144
online mode
defined 262
what controls online mode 263
online/offline
automatic offline event, overriding 278
scheduling 64
SPRE codes, using 277
online/offline mode 262
changing 65
online/offline table
configuration 40
description 40
how the table works 40
optional modules
DSP application module 9
trunk interface module 9
outgoing calls
placing 17, 264
P
packet loss handling techniques 33
packetized voice
default algorithm 33
G.711 33
G.726 33
G.729A 33
packet loss handling techniques 33
silence suppression 33
voice jitter attenuation buffer 33
Paging 276
password
Configuration Manager
changing 280
overview 280
local
changing 280
node
changing 281
Remote Gateway 9150 unit
changing 281
RLC 280
password (for a unit) 157
524
PBX
CS 1000 xxiv
CS 2100 xxiv
Meridian 1 PBX xxiv
PBX downgrade
M39xx digital telephone sets 28
PBX message
idle
updating 26
PC
connection options 59
Optivity Telephony Manager and
Configuration Manager 63
Windows PC requirements 62
Phone Type 207
physical environment 50
cables not included 53
connections 52
included cables 53
mounting options 52
PING
failure 364
performing 362
unsuccessful PING 364
placing calls 264
planning
configuration 81
data entry forms
completion sequence 81
deployment options 75
future growth 72
network considerations 55
numbering plan 84
online/offline schedule 83
physical environment 50
security 70
station configuration 66
trunk configuration 84
trunk connection management 64
port management
dynamic port pool 35
multi-user ports 35
single-user ports 35
ports, types of 68
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
POTS functionality
analog port 220
Power
connector pin-out table 410
LED indicator 4
power supply
cable 6
UPS compatibility 6
power up
LED indicators 111
precautionary messages 86
pre-dialing
local trunk calls 261
priority level
circuit only 36
IP only 36
normal 36
priority reserved bandwidth 37
private lines 255
problems
solving
connectivity
PING failure 364
Provision ID (security level) 12
PSTN
testing 131
PSTN mode
implementing 76
PSTN Statistics
Channel Number 334
CRC Errors 334
Frame Length Violations 334
ITE Frame Length Violations 334
ITE Receive Busy Errors 334
ITE Transmitter Underruns 334
Receive Buffer Allocation Failures 334
Unknown Receive Errors 334
PSTN testing 131
Q
QLen 314
QoS
network considerations 56
recovery 34
Index
QoS transition recovery 34
QoS Transitioning Technology
connection option 10
connection options 10
implementation 79
log reports and statistics 35
Remote Gateway 9150 unit deployment 79
transport connections 34
trunk connections 64
Quality of Service
refer to QoS
Quality of Service Transitioning Technology
refer to QoS Transitioning Technology
R
rack installation 103–104
RAM memory test 111
Reach Line Card
as a component xix
configuration (example) 396
Receive Buffer Allocation Failures 334
receiving calls 264
releasing Bridge Ports 214
Remote Call Statistics 320
Remote Call Statistics screen
displaying 321
Remote Connection command 167
Remote Connection Configuration property
sheet (RLC)
ACD 32
Remote Gateway 9100 Series
dial tone delay 254
Remote Gateway 9150
communications system requirements 42
software requirements 42
Remote Gateway 9150 series
supported digital telephone sets
M39xx series accessories 30
Remote Gateway 9150 unit 98
add-on modules 8
administering 279–346
analog port 220
as a component xix
ATA capacity 257
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
525
Index
Standard 3.1
cables you must obtain 105
configuration
defining a fax station 221
example 400
Configuration Wizard 115
connecting to the network 109
connection options 10
cover
removing 91
replacing 92
description 2, 3
Ethernet connection
default 10
full-duplex 10
half-duplex 10
how it works 16
implementation
NAPT routers 78
NAT routers 78, 79
LED indicators 3, 349
Boot status 4
Ethernet 4
Module 4
Power 4
power up behavior 111
troubleshooting 349
V.35 4
MCA capacity 257
mounting 98
network connections, testing 129
password
overview 280
password, changing 281
port management 35
powering up 111
software, installing 113
station priority and connection bandwidth 36
stations, using 259–278
troubleshooting 348
Remote Gateway 9150 unit reboot
M3905 digital telephone sets 27
Remote Gateway 9150 units
supported Codecs 42
restarting the system
when to perform a restart 169
526
restore
before you begin 285
upload a configuration file over the IP
network 286
Retrieve 150, 153
ring trip voltage
analog port 220
RJ-45 connector 5
RLC Connection Configuration property sheet
198
RLC Port Configuration property sheet
ACD 32
Rx Disc 314
Rx Err 314
Rx Mcast 313
Rx Octet 313
Rx Ucast 313
S
safety precautions 87
Save to Flash 150
SCR/SCN keys 253
security
data network security 70
description 70
identifier 12, 200
security level, configuring 200
system configuration 71
toll fraud 70
Self-contained Firmware Upgrade 343
Send 149, 153
Send All 149, 153
shutting down the system
performing a system shutdown 170
when to perform a shutdown 169
silence suppression 33
single-user ports 35
SLOTNO 304
software
installing 113
troubleshooting 360
upgrades
performing 346
version, verifying 335
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
software requirements 42
software upgrade
M39xx digital telephone sets 338
SPRE codes
configuring 181–182
controlling online and offline modes 263
Startup Information
SLOTNO 304
STATUS 304
TYPE 304
VERSION 304
station configuration
call appearance keys 253
stations
9150 Device Configuration sheet 207
assignment and configuration 81
ATA and MCA-equipped stations and
bandwidth requirements 257
call appearance keys 253
call processing capabilities and station
settings 251
calling permissions and restrictions 255
configuration overview
Remote Gateway 9150 settings 68
RLC setting 66
Configuring Bridge Ports 250
defining 207
display messages 270
going online and offline 277
modes
controlling online and offline 263
host-controlled 260
importance of 262
locally controlled mode 261
of operation 260
offline mode 262
online mode 262
relationship between host-controlled and
locally controlled modes 261
placing and receiving calls 264
priority
circuit only priority 36
IP only priority 36
normal priority 36
private lines 255
Index
telephone features 273
telephone indicators 268
station-to-station calls 267
statistics
Bandwidth Connection Statistics screen 297
descriptions 299
displaying 298
Caller Information Statistics screen 300
displaying 301
Device Information screen 322
DSP Statistics screen 307, 309
Ethernet Interface Statistics
Collisions 314
QLen 314
Rx Disc 314
Rx Err 314
Rx Mcast 313
Rx Octet 313
Rx Ucast 313
Tx Disc 314
Tx Err 314
Tx Mcast 314
Tx Octet 314
Tx Ucast 314
Hardware Statistics screen 303
PSTN Statistics
Channel Number 334
CRC Errors 334
Frame Length Violations 334
ITE Frame Length Violations 334
ITE Receive Busy Errors 334
ITE Transmitter Underruns 334
Receive Buffer Allocation Failures 334
Unknown Receive Errors 334
Remote Call Statistics screen 320
displaying 321
Startup Information
SLOTNO 304
STATUS 304
TYPE 304
VERSION 304
Trunk Connection Statistics screen 294
description 296
displaying 295
STATUS 304
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
527
Index
Standard 3.1
Status
refer also to Boot status
supported applications
ACD applications 32
Computer Telephony Integration applications
31
supported Codecs
data stream 42
G.711 42
G.726 42
supported CodecsG.729A 42
supported digital telephone sets 26
M2006 26
M2008D 26
M2008HFD 26
M2216D 26
M2616D 26
M3110 26
M3310 26
M3820 26
M3901 26
M3902 26
M3903 26
M3904 26
M3905 26
M39xx series accessories 30
supported telephone modules 30
add-on modules 30
Analog Telephone Adapters 30
application modules 30
Meridian Communication Adapters 30
Syslog
Syslog Configuration property sheet 247
Syslog configuration
procedure 248
system
restart 169
shutdown 169, 170
System Configuration sheet 174
system security
caller identification 12
no security 12
security identifier 12
system tree 138
528
T
TEI 227
TEI Dropped 228
Telco 1
connector pin-out table 404
Telco 2
connector pin-out table 406
telephone features
Call Forward 276
Call Transfer 275
Call Waiting 274
Conference 276
emergency service calls 273
Hold 274
Paging 276
telephone modules
supported 30
add-on modules 30
Analog Telephone Adapters 30
application modules 30
Meridian Communication Adapters 30
telephones
digital telephones 26
refer also to stations
Terminal Endpoint Identifiers)
refer to TEI
tests
installation
what to do if tests do not work 130
PSTN 131
telephone connection
what to do if tests do not work 130
TFTP
firmware upgrades 338
server 62
tools required
hardware installation tools 88
software installation or upgrade tools 88
troubleshooting
before you begin 348
connectivity
PING failure 364
device connectivity 356
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
January 2005
digital telephone 351
LED indicators 349
overview 348
Ping option 362
recovering from a catastrophic failure 367
Remote Gateway 9150 LED indicators 349
software problems 360
trunk access code
M39xx digital telephone sets 27
trunk access codes 234
Trunk Connection Statistics 294
descriptions 296
displaying 295
trunk connections 13
bandwidth allocation 65
changing online/offline mode 65
managing 64
online/offline schedule 64
QoS Transitioning Technology 64
Trunk Group B-Channel
fields
B Channel 238
Device 238
Module 238
Trunk Group Configuration property sheet 232
trunk groups 234
configuring 232
local stations 254
trunk access codes 234
trunk groups, configuring 232
trunk interface modules
adding 73
installing 96
removing 96
when to install 93
where they can be installed 94
trunking
and idle timer 15
and minimum call duration timer 14
bandwidth allocation 14
connection types 14
types 13
Index
trunks
configuring 225
local and remote trunk 233
local trunk 233
managing trunk connections 64
remote trunk 233
trunk access codes 234
trunk groups 234
configuring 232
trunk-to-trunk transfer 275
Tx Disc 314
Tx Err 314
Tx Mcast 314
Tx Octet 314
Tx Ucast 314
TYPE 304
U
UDP port 20480
NAT configuration 79
Unknown Receive Errors 334
updating
PBX Idle message 26
upgrades
performing
obtaining the latest upgrade file 337
software upgrade 346
upgrades, performing
firmware upgrade 338
firmware version, verifying 335
software version, verifying 335
types of 337
upgrades and configuration files 339
when to perform 339
Upload Configuration 151, 153
UPS
requirements 6
User On Demand Idle Timer
ACD 32
User On Demand Minimum Call Timer
ACD 32
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
529
Index
Standard 3.1
V
W
V.35
LED indicator 4
VERSION 304
voice jitter attenuation buffer 33
Voice over IP
implementing 77
packetized voice
default algorithm 33
G.711 33
G.726 33
G.729A 33
packet loss handling techniques 33
silence suppression 33
voice jitter attenuation buffer 33
QoS Transitioning Technology 34
wall mounting
installing 100–102
530
X
X11 release 25.40
M39xx digital telephone sets 28
Remote Gateway 9150 Installation and Administration Guide
Remote Gateway 9150
Installation and Administration Guide
Copyright © 2005 Nortel. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in Canada.
All information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the
right to make changes to equipment design or program components, as progress in engineering,
manufacturing methods, or other circumstances may warrant.
*Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, Unified Networks, Meridian 1 PBX, Communication Server
1000 (CS 1000), and Communication Server 2100 (CS 2100) are trademarks of Nortel.
TelStrat is a registered trademark of TelStrat International, Ltd. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows
are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Publication number:
Product release:
Document release:
Date:
555-8421-215
1.5
Standard 3.1
January 2005